2013 honda pilot Owner's Manual - Car Owner's Manuals Online View
2013 Contents Pilot
Online Reference Owner's Manual
This owner's manual should be considered a permanent part of the vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
This owner's manual covers all models of your vehicle. You may find descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your particular model.
Images throughout this owner's manual (including the front cover) represent features and equipment that are available on some, but not all, models. Your particular model may not have some of these features.
This owner's manual is for vehicles sold in the United States and Canada.
The information and specifications included in this publication were
in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd.
reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications
or design at any time without notice and without incurring any
obligation.
Navigation Key
QRG Quick Reference Guide
TOC Chapter Table of Contents
Index Index
Home Book Table of Contents
00X31-SZA-64000 © 2012 American Honda Motor Co., Inc - All Rights Reserved
2 Safe Driving P. 23
For Safe Driving P. 24
Seat Belts P. 29
Airbags P. 37
2 Instrument Panel P. 67
Indicators P. 68
Gauges and Displays P. 80
2 Controls P. 97
Setting the Clock P. 98 Locking and Unlocking the Doors P. 99 Opening and Closing the Moonroof* P. 123 Adjusting the Seats P. 137
2 Features P. 171
Audio System P. 172
Audio System Basic Operation P. 216
General Information on the Audio System P. 272
Compass* P. 320
2 Driving P. 323
Before Driving P. 324
Towing a Trailer P. 329
Parking Your Vehicle P. 364
Rearview Camera* P. 369
Accessories and Modifications P. 375
2 Maintenance P. 377
Before Performing Maintenance P. 378 Maintenance MinderTM P. 381 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 410 Remote Control and Wireless Headphone Care* P. 425
2 Handling the Unexpected P. 433
Tools P. 434
If a Tire Goes Flat P. 435
Overheating P. 448
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking P. 450
2 Information P. 463
Specifications P. 464
Identification Numbers P. 466
Emissions Testing P. 470
Warranty Coverages P. 472
Gracenote® End User License Agreement P. 476
* Not available on all models
Child Safety P. 52
Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 65
Safety Labels P. 66
Opening and Closing the Tailgate P. 110 Security System P. 118 Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel P. 124 Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items P. 150
Opening and Closing the Windows P. 120 Adjusting the Mirrors P. 135 Climate Control System P. 165
Rear Entertainment System* P. 251
Audio Error Messages P. 266
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver* P. 276
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 278
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines P. 340 When Driving P. 342
Multi-View Rear Camera* P. 370
Refueling P. 371
Braking P. 360 Fuel Economy P. 374
Maintenance Under the Hood P. 389 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 402 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 414 Battery P. 423 Climate Control System Maintenance P. 427
Remote Transmitter Care P. 424 Cleaning P. 428
Engine Does Not Start P. 444
Jump Starting P. 445
Fuses P. 454
Emergency Towing P. 459
Shift Lever Does Not Move P. 447 When You Cannot Open the Tailgate P. 461
Devices that Emit Radio Waves P. 467 Authorized Manuals P. 474
Reporting Safety Defects P. 469 Customer Service Information P. 475
* Not available on all models
Contents
2013 Pilot Quick Reference Guide P. 2
Safe Driving P. 23 Instrument Panel P. 67
Controls P. 97 Features P. 171 Driving P. 323 Maintenance P. 377 Handling the Unexpected P. 433 Information P. 463
Index P. 478
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Pilot
Quick Reference Guide
Visual Index
QRG
Index Home
2
System Indicators (P68) Gauges (P 80) Information Display* (P81) Multi-Information Display* (P85) Hazard Warning Button
Audio System (P172) Navigation System*
() See Navigation System Manual
Climate Control System (P165) Rear Window Defogger (P131) Heated Mirror Button* (P131) Ignition Switch (P124) Steering Wheel Adjustments
(P134)
(Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®)
System OFF) Button (P352)
* Not available on all models
* Not available on all models
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Pilot
Headlights/Turn Signals (P125)
QRG
Fog Lights* (P127)
(Select/Reset) Knob (P81) Brightness Control (P130)
Cruise Control Buttons (P348)
Wipers/Washers (P128)
Horn (Press an area around .)
SEL/RESET Button* (P81)
/ (Information) Button* (P85)
Navigation System Voice Control Buttons*
() See Navigation System Manual
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® System
Voice Control Buttons (P301)
Remote Audio Control Buttons (P184)
(P217)
Index
Home
3
Quick Reference Guide -2013 Pilot
Visual Index
QRG
Power Window Switches (P120) Power Door Lock Master Switch (P103) Door Mirror Controls (P136) Parking Brake Release Handle (P360)
Index
Home
4
Hood Release Handle (P390) Fuel Fill Door Release Handle (P372)
Rearview Mirror (P135) Driver's Front Airbag (P40) Passenger's Front Airbag
(P40)
Shift Lever
Automatic Transmission
(P345)
Glove Box (P 152) Accessory Power Socket
(P156)
Seat Heater Switches* (P162) Parking Brake (P360) Interior Fuse Box (P456)
* Not available on all models
* Not available on all models
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Pilot
Sun Visors
QRG
Vanity Mirrors
Moonroof Switch* (P123)
Map Lights (P151)
Sunglasses Holder (P161)
HomeLinkr Button* (P276)
Side Curtain Airbags (P47)
Seat Belts (P29) Grab Handle
Coat Hook (P159)
Seat Belt (Installing a Child Seat) (P60) Seat Belt to Secure a Child Seat (P61) Accessory Power Socket (P156) USB Adapter Cable (P173) Auxiliary Input Jack (P173)
Accessory Power Socket (P157)
Third Row Seat (P57)
Second Row Seat (P146) Front Seat (P137) Side Airbags (P44)
Index
Home
5
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Pilot
Visual Index
QRG
Index Home
6
Maintenance Under the Hood (P389)
Windshield Wipers (P128) (P410) Power Door Mirrors (P136)
Door Lock/Unlock Control (P101) Headlights (P125) (P402) Front Turn Signal/Parking Lights (P125) (P405) Side Marker Lights (P125) (P405) Tires (P414) (P435) Fog Lights* (P127) (P403)
How to Refuel (P372) High-Mount Brake Light (P409) Rear Wiper (P129) (P410) Opening/Closing the Tailgate
(P110)
Tailgate Release Button (P111)
Rearview Camera* (P369)
Brake/Taillights (P406) Back-Up Lights (P406) Rear Turn Signal Lights (P406) Rear Side Marker Lights (P406)
* Not available on all models
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Pilot
Safe Driving (P 23)
QRG
Airbags (P37)
Your vehicle is fitted with airbags to help protect you and your passengers during a moderate-to-severe collision.
Child Safety (P52)
All children 12 and younger should be seated in the rear seat. Smaller children should be properly restrained in a forward-facing child seat. Infants must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat.
Exhaust Gas Hazard (P65)
Your vehicle emits dangerous exhaust gases that contain carbon monoxide. Do not run the engine in confined spaces where carbon monoxide gas can accumulate.
Seat Belts (P29)
Fasten your seat belt and sit upright well back in the seat.
Check that your passengers are wearing their seat belts correctly.
Before Driving Checklist (P28)
Before driving, check that the front seats, head restraints, steering wheel, and mirrors have been properly adjusted.
Fasten your lap belt as low as possible.
Index
Home
7
Instrument Panel (P 67)
QRG Gauges (P80)/Information Display* / (P81) Multi-Information Display* (P85)/System Indicators (P68)
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Pilot
System Indicators
Malfunction Indicator Lamp Low Oil Pressure Indicator Charging System Indicator
Daytime Running Lights Indicator*
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®) System Indicator
VSA® OFF Indicator
Information Display*/ Multi-Information Display*
Speedometer
Tachometer
Fuel Gauge
System Indicators
Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Indicators
Security System Alarm Indicator *
Seat Belt Reminder Indicator
Supplemental Restraint System Indicator
U.S. Canada
Side Airbag Off Indicator
CRUISE MAIN Indicator
Index Home
U.S. Power Tailgate Indicator*
Canada
Fuel Economy Indicator VTM-4r system Indicator*
Immobilizer System Indicator
U.S. Canada
Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator
Low Fuel Indicator Shift Lever Position Indicator
System Indicators
TPMS Indicator*
Low Tire Pressure Indicator*/Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator *
Maintenance Minder Indicator* Washer Level Indicator *
Lights Reminders
Lights On Indicator High Beam Indicator Fog Light Indicator*
CRUISE CONTROL Indicator
U.S. Canada
Starter System Indicator *
Door Open Indicator A/T Temperature Indicator * System Message Indicator * Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Indicator
8
* Not available on all models
Controls (P97)
Clock (P 98)
Models without navigation system
a Press the CLOCK button to access the
clock adjustment mode screen.
b Press to select the item you want to
adjust (12/24 hour mode, hour, minutes).
c Rotate to make the adjustment.
d Press to enter your selection. Repeat
steps 2 to 4 to adjust other items.
e To enter the selection, press and
select EXIT, then press .
Turn Signals (P125)
Turn Signal Control Lever Right
Left
Models with navigation system
The navigation system receives signals from GPS satellites, updating the clock automatically.
Lights (P125)
Light Control Switches
High Beam Low Beam
Flashing
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Pilot
QRG
Index Home
9
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Pilot
Wipers and Washers
QRG (P128)
Wiper/Washer Control Lever
Adjustment Ring : Long Delay : Short Delay
Steering Wheel (P134)
To adjust, pull the adjustment lever towards you, adjust to the desired position, then lock the lever back in place.
Tailgate (P110)
Pull toward you to spray washer fluid.
MIST OFF INT: Low speed with intermittent LO: Low speed wipe HI: High speed wipe
Index Home
10
With all the doors unlocked, press the tailgate release button and lift open the tailgate.
Models with the power tailgate
Press the power tailgate button on the driver's door or the remote transmitter to open and close the power tailgate.
Glass Hatch (P116)
To open the glass hatch, press the glass hatch release button on the tailgate.
Models without the power tailgate
Press the glass hatch release button on the driver's door or the remote transmitter to open the glass hatch.
Power Door Mirrors
(P136)
With the ignition switch in ON (w, move the selector switch to L or R.
Push the appropriate edge of the adjustment switch to adjust the mirror.
Place the selector switch in the L or R position to use the reverse tilt door mirror feature.
Selector Switch
Power Windows (P120)
With the ignition switch in ON (w, open and close the power windows.
If the power window lock button is in the off position, each passenger's window can be opened and closed with its own switch.
If the power window lock button is in the on position (indicator is on), each passenger's window switch is disabled.
Power Window Lock Button Indicator
Adjustment Switch
Window Switch
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Pilot
QRG
Index Home
11
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Pilot
QRG
Climate Control System (P165)
Press the AUTO button to activate the climate control system.
Press the
button to turn the system on or off.
Press the button to defrost the windshield.
Models with navigation system
The climate control system is voice operable. See the navigation system manual for complete
details.
(On/Off) Button
(Recirculation) Button
AUTO Button
SYNC (Synchronized) Button
Rear Climate Control
Press the AUTO button to activate the rear climate control system.
Press the OFF button repeatedly to turn the system off.
Rear Passenger Compartment Temperature Control Bar
Fan Control Bar
Driver's Side Temperature Control Dial
A/C (Air Conditioning) Button
Index
Home
12
MODE Control Button
Air flows from floor and windshield defroster vents. Air flows from floor vents.
Air flows from floor and dashboard vents. Air flows from dashboard vents.
Passenger's Side Temperature Control Dial
(Rear Window Defogger/Heated Mirror*) Button
(Windshield Defroster) Button Fan Control Bar
AUTO Button OFF Button
Airflows from the rear floor vents
Airflow is divided between the rear floor vents and rear ceiling vents.
Airflows from the rear ceiling vents
Features (P171)
Audio System (P172)
Button * FM/AM Button* VOL/ (Volume/ Power) Knob SKIP Bar SCAN Button Interface Dial* AUDIO Button*
Audio Remote Controls (P184) MODE Button
QRG
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Pilot
VOL Button CH Button
CD Button USB/AUX Button (CD Eject) Button Preset Buttons (1-6)
CD Slot
HDD Button
VOL (Volume) Button Press and release to adjust the volume up/ down.
MODE Button Press and release to change the audio mode: FM1/FM2/AM/XM1*/XM2*/CD/ CD-L */HDD */AUX.
CH (Channel) Button Radio:Press and release to change the preset station. Press and hold to select the next or previous strong station. CD/CD Library*/HDD*/USB device: Press and release to skip to the beginning of the next song or return to the beginning of the current song. Press and hold to change a folder.
PHONE Button
Index
Home
* Not available on all models 13
Driving (P323)
QRG
Automatic Transmission (P346)
Shift to (P and depress the brake pedal when starting the engine.
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Pilot
Shifting
Park
Turn off or start the engine. Transmission is locked.
Reverse
Release Button
Index
Neutral
Transmission is not locked.
Drive
Normal driving.
Second
Used to increase engine braking (the transmission is locked in 2nd gear)
First
Used to further increase engine braking (the transmission is locked in 1st gear)
(d Button
Drive (D3)
Press the (d button while the shift lever is in
(D .
Used when:
· Going up or down hills · Towing a trailer in hilly terrain
Shift Lever
Depress the brake pedal and press the release button to move out of (P. Press the release button to move the shift lever. Move the shift lever without pressing the release button.
Home
14
VSA® OFF Button (P353)
The vehicle stability assist (VSA®) system helps stabilize the vehicle during cornering, and helps maintain traction while accelerating on loose or slippery road surfaces.
VSA® comes on automatically every time you start the engine.
To turn VSA® on or off, press and hold the button until you hear a beep.
Cruise Control (P348)
Cruise control allows you to maintain a set speed without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.
To use cruise control, press the CRUISE button, then press DECEL/SET button once you have achieved the desired speed (above 25 mph or 40 km/h).
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (P355)
TPMS monitors tire pressure. TPMS is turned on automatically every
time you start the engine.
Refueling (P371)
Fuel recommendation: Unleaded gasoline with a pump octane number 87 or higher required
Fuel tank capacity: 21 US gal (79.5 L)
a Pull the fuel fill door
release handle.
b Turn the fuel fill cap
slowly to remove the cap.
c Place the cap in the
holder on the fuel fill door.
d After refueling, screw
the cap back on until it clicks at least once.
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Pilot
QRG
Index Home
15
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Pilot
Maintenance (P377)
QRG Under the Hood (P389)
Check engine oil, engine coolant, and windshield washer fluid. Add when necessary.
Check brake fluid. Check the battery condition monthly.
a Pull the hood release handle under the corner of
the dashboard.
Wiper Blades (P410)
Replace blades if they leave streaks across the windshield.
b Locate the hood latch lever, pull the lever up, and lift up
the hood.
Lights (P402)
Inspect all lights regularly.
Tires (P414)
Inspect tires and wheels regularly. Check tire pressures regularly. Install snow tires for winter driving.
Index Home
c When finished, close the hood and make sure it is firmly
locked in place.
16
Handling the Unexpected (P433)
Flat Tire (P435)
QRG
Engine Won't Start (P444) Overheating (P448)
Park in a safe location and replace the flat tire with the compact spare tire in the cargo area.
If the battery is dead, jump start using a booster battery.
Park in a safe location. If you do not see steam under the hood, open the hood, and let the engine cool down.
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Pilot
Indicators Come On
(P450) Identify the indicator and consult the
owner's manual.
Blown Fuse (P454)
Check for a blown fuse if an electrical device does not operate.
Emergency Towing (P459)
Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.
Index
Home
17
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Pilot
What to Do If
QRG
The ignition switch does not turn from (0 to (q. Why?
The ignition switch does not turn from (q to (0 and I cannot remove the key. Why?
Why does the brake pedal pulsate slightly when applying the brakes?
The rear door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle. Why?
Index
Home
18
The steering wheel may be locked. Try to turn the steering wheel left and right
while turning the ignition key.
The shift lever should be moved to (P.
This can occur when the ABS activates, and does not indicate a problem. Apply firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. Never pump the brake pedal.
Check if the childproof lock is in the lock position. If so, open the rear door with the outside door handle. To cancel this function, push the lever to the unlock position.
Why do the doors lock after I unlocked the doors using a remote transmitter?
Why does the beeper sound when I open the driver's door?
Why does the beeper sound when I start driving?
Why do I hear a screeching sound when I apply the brake pedal?
If you do not open the doors within 30 seconds, the doors are
relocked automatically for security.
QRG
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Pilot
The beeper sounds when: The key is left in the ignition switch. The exterior lights are left on.
The beeper sounds when: Driver and/or front passenger are not wearing their seat belts. The parking brake lever is not fully released.
The brake pads may need to be replaced. Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
Index
Home
19
California Proposition 65 Warning
QRG WARNING: This product contains or emits chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Pilot
Index Home
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: · How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
· Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
· How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator
and/or brake pedal; and,
· How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
20
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
The data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.
Service Diagnostic Recorders This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential.
California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this vehicle may contain perchlorate materials - special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/
As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded by a NOTICE symbol. This information is intended to help you avoid damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment.
A Few Words About Safety
Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. And operating this vehicle safely is an important responsibility.
To help you make informed decisions about safety, we have provided operating procedures and other information on labels and in this manual. This information alerts you to potential hazards that could hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the hazards associated with operating or maintaining your vehicle. You must use your own good judgement.
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Pilot
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms, including:
QRG Safety Labels - on the vehicle.
Safety Messages - preceded by a safety alert symbol 3 and
one of three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
These signal words mean:
3 DANGER 3 WARNING 3 CAUTION
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you don't follow instructions.
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you don't follow instructions.
You CAN be HURT if you don't follow instructions.
Safety Headings - such as Important Safety Precautions. Safety Section - such as Safe Driving. Instructions - how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information - please read it carefully.
Index
Home
21
QRG
Index Home
22
QRG
Safe Driving
You can find many safety recommendations throughout this chapter, and throughout this manual.
For Safe Driving Important Safety Precautions ............. 24 Important Handling Information......... 26 Your Vehicle's Safety Features............ 27
Seat Belts About Your Seat Belts........................ 29 Fastening a Seat Belt.......................... 32 Seat Belt Inspection............................ 36
Airbags Airbag System Components............... 37 Types of Airbags ................................ 40 Front Airbags (SRS) ............................ 40
Side Airbags ...................................... 44 Side Curtain Airbags .......................... 47 Airbag System Indicators.................... 48 Airbag Care ....................................... 51 Child Safety Protecting Child Passengers ............... 52 Safety of Infants and Small Children .......54 Safety of Larger Children ................... 63 Exhaust Gas Hazard Carbon Monoxide Gas....................... 65 Safety Labels Label Locations .................................. 66
Index
Home
23
For Safe Driving
QRG
The following pages explain your vehicle's safety features and how to use them properly. The safety precautions below are ones that we consider to be among the TOC most important.
Safe Driving
Important Safety Precautions
Always wear your seat belt A seat belt is your best protection in all types of collisions. Airbags are designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped with airbags, make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts, and wear them properly.
1Important Safety Precautions
Some states, provinces and territories prohibit the use of cell phones other than hands-free devices by the driver while driving.
Restrain all children Children age 12 and under should ride properly restrained in a back seat, not the front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in a child seat. Larger children should use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder seat belt until they can use the belt properly without a booster seat.
Be aware of airbag hazards While airbags can save lives, they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants who sit too close to them, or are not properly restrained. Infants, young children, and short adults are at the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all instructions and warnings in this manual.
Index Home
Don't drink and drive Alcohol and driving don't mix. Even one drink can reduce your ability to respond to changing conditions, and your reaction time gets worse with every additional drink. So don't drink and drive, and don't let your friends drink and drive, either.
24
uuFor Safe DrivinguImportant Safety Precautions
QRG
Pay appropriate attention to the task of driving safely
Engaging in cell phone conversation or other activities that keep you from paying
close attention to the road, other vehicles, and pedestrians could lead to a crash.
TOC
Remember, situations can change quickly, and only you can decide when it is safe to
divert some attention away from driving.
Safe Driving
Control your speed Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds. Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum speed posted.
Keep your vehicle in safe condition Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous. To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.
Index
Home
25
uuFor Safe DrivinguImportant Handling Information
QRG Important Handling Information
Your vehicle has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use 1Important Handling Information
only on pavement. Higher ground clearance has many advantages for off-highway TOC driving. It allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, and rough terrain. It also
For information on how to reduce the risk of rollover, read:
Safe Driving
provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier.
2 Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle P. 344
These advantages come at some cost. Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher off the ground, it has a higher center gravity making it more susceptible to tripping or roll over if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have a significantly higher
2 Off-Highway Driving Guidelines P. 340 Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in a crash or a rollover.
rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. As a reminder,
make sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts.
Index
Home
26
uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle's Safety Features
Your Vehicle's Safety Features
9
8 12 3
9
6
4
10
7 8
10
11
5
7
2
2
Safety Cage
2 Crush Zones 3 Seats and Seat-Backs 4 Head Restraints 5 Collapsible Steering Column 6 Seat Belts 7 Front Airbags 8 Side Airbags 9 Side Curtain Airbags 10 Door Locks 11 Seat Belt Tensioners
12 Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensor
The following checklist will help you take an active role in protecting yourself and your passengers.
1Your Vehicle's Safety Features Your vehicle is equipped with many features that work together to help protect you and your passengers during a crash.
Some features do not require any action on your part. These include a strong steel framework that forms a safety cage around the passenger compartment, front and rear crush zones, a collapsible steering column, and tensioners that tighten the front seat belts in a sufficient crash.
However, you and your passengers cannot take full advantage of these features unless you remain seated in the correct position and always wear your seat belts. In fact, some safety features can contribute to injuries if they are not used properly.
Continued
Safe Driving
QRG TOC
Index Home
27
uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle's Safety Features
Safe Driving
QRG TOC
Index
Safety Checklist
For the safety of you and your passengers, make a habit of checking these items each time before you drive.
· After everyone has entered the vehicle, be sure all doors and the tailgate are closed and locked. Locking the doors and the tailgate helps prevent an occupant from being ejected and an outsider from unexpectedly opening a door or the tailgate.
2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 103
· Adjust your seat to a position suitable for driving. Be sure the front seats are adjusted as far to the rear as possible while allowing the driver to control the vehicle. Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious or fatal injury in a crash.
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 137
· Adjust head restraints to the proper position. Head restraints are most effective when the center of the head restraint aligns with the center of your head. Taller persons should adjust their head restraint to the highest position.
2 Adjusting the Head Restraints P. 141
· Always wear your seat belt, and make sure you wear it properly. Confirm that any passengers are properly belted as well.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 32
· Protect children by using seat belts or child seats according to a child's age, height and weight.
2 Child Safety P. 52
1Safety Checklist
If the door and/or the tailgate open indicator is on, a door and/or the tailgate is not completely closed. Close all doors and the tailgate tightly until the indicator goes off.
2 Door Open Indicator P. 72 2 Door, Glass Hatch, and Tailgate Open
Indicator* P. 72
Home
28 * Not available on all models
Seat Belts
About Your Seat Belts
QRG
Seat belts are the single most effective safety device because they keep you
1About Your Seat Belts
connected to the vehicle so that you can take advantage of many built-in safety features. They also help keep you from being thrown against the inside of the
3 WARNING
TOC
Safe Driving
vehicle, against other passengers, or out of the vehicle. When worn properly, seat
Not wearing a seat belt properly increases
belts also keep your body properly positioned in a crash so that you can take full
the chance of serious injury or death in a
advantage of the additional protection provided by the airbags.
crash, even though your vehicle has
airbags.
In addition, seat belts help protect you in almost every type of crash, including: - frontal impacts - side impacts
Be sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts and wear them properly.
- rear impacts
- rollovers
Seat belts cannot completely protect you in every
crash. But in most cases, seat belts can reduce your
Lap/shoulder seat belts
risk of serious injury.
All eight seating positions are equipped with lap/shoulder seat belts with emergency locking retractors. In normal driving the retractor lets you move freely while keeping some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop the retractor locks to
Most states and all Canadian provinces and territories require you to wear seat belts.
restrain your body. The second and third row passenger's seat belts also have a
lockable retractor for use with child seats.
2 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt P. 60
Continued
Index
Home
29
uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts
Safe Driving
QRG TOC
Proper use of seat belts Follow these guidelines for proper use: · All occupants should sit upright, well back in the seat, and remain in that position
for the duration of the trip. Slouching and leaning reduces the effectiveness of the belt and can increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
· Never place the shoulder part of a lap/shoulder seat belt under your arm or behind your back. This could cause very serious injuries in a crash.
· Two people should never use the same seat belt. If they do, they could be very seriously injured in a crash.
· Do not put any accessories on the seat belts. Devices intended to improve comfort or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can reduce the protective capability and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
1About Your Seat Belts
If a rear seat passenger moves around and extends the seat belt, the lockable retractor may activate. If this happens, release the retractor by unfastening the seat belt and allow the belt to retract completely. Then refasten the belt.
Seat Belt Reminder
Index Home
30
Your vehicle monitors front seat belt use. If the ignition switch is turned to ON (w before the driver's seat belt is fastened, a beeper will sound and the indicator will blink. If the driver does not fasten the belt before the beeper stops, the indicator will remain on.
The beeper will also periodically sound and the indicator will blink while driving until the driver's and front passenger's seat belts are fastened.
1Seat Belt Reminder
The indicator will also come on if a front passenger does not fasten their seat belt within 6 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to ON (w. When no one is sitting in the front passenger's seat, or a child or small adult is riding there, the indicator will not come on. This is because the weight sensors in the seat cannot detect their presence.
uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts
QRG
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
1Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
The seat belt tensioners can only operate once.
The front seats are equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners to enhance safety. If a tensioner is activated, the SRS indicator will come
TOC
Safe Driving
The tensioners automatically tighten the front seat belts during a moderate-to-
on. Have a dealer replace the tensioner and thoroughly inspect the seat belt system as it may not
severe frontal collision, sometimes even if the collision is not severe enough to
offer protection in a subsequent crash.
inflate the front airbags.
During a moderate-to-severe side impact, the
tensioner on that side of the vehicle also activates.
Index
Home
31
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
Safe Driving
QRG TOC
Fastening a Seat Belt
After adjusting a front seat to the proper position, and while sitting upright and well
back in the seat:
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 137
Pull out slowly.
1. Pull the seat belt out slowly.
Correct Seated Posture.
1Fastening a Seat Belt No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat belt or one that does not appear to be working correctly. Using a seat belt that is not working properly may not protect the occupant in a crash. Have a dealer check the belt as soon as possible.
Never insert any foreign objects into the buckle or retractor mechanism.
Latch Plate
Buckle
2. Insert the latch plate into the buckle, then tug on the belt to make sure the buckle is secure. u Make sure that the belt is not twisted or caught on anything.
Index
Home
32
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
Lap belt as low as possible
QRG
3. Position the lap part of the belt as low as 1Fastening a Seat Belt
possible across your hips, then pull up on
the shoulder part of the belt so the lap part
3 WARNING
TOC
Safe Driving
fits snugly. This lets your strong pelvic bones take the force of a crash and reduces the chance of internal injuries.
4. If necessary, pull up on the belt again to remove any slack, then check that the belt rests across the center of your chest and over your shoulder. This spreads the forces of a crash over the strongest bones in your upper body.
Improperly positioning the seat belts can cause serious injury or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are properly positioned before driving.
To release the belt, push the red PRESS button then guide the belt by hand until it has retracted completely. When exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the way and will not get caught by closing the door.
Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor
The front seats have adjustable shoulder anchors to accommodate taller and shorter occupants.
1. Move the anchor up and down while holding the release button.
Push
Push
2. Position the anchor so that the belt rests across the center of your chest and over your shoulder.
1Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor The shoulder anchor height can be adjusted to four levels. If the belt contacts your neck, lower the height one level at a time.
After an adjustment, make sure that the shoulder anchor position is secure.
Index
Continued
Home
33
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
Safe Driving
QRG TOC
Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor
Small Latch Plate
1. Pull out the seat belt's small latch plate and the latch plate from each holding slot in the ceiling.
Latch Plate Small Latch Plate
2. Line up the triangle marks on the small latch plate and anchor buckle. Make sure the seat belt is not twisted. Attach the belt to the anchor buckle.
1Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor
3 WARNING
Using the seat belt with the detachable anchor unlatched increases the chance of serious injury or death in a crash.
Before using the seat belt, make sure the detachable anchor is correctly latched.
To unlatch the detachable anchor, insert the latch plate into the slot on the side of the anchor buckle.
Latch Plate
Anchor Buckle
Latch Plate
Index
Home
34
Buckle
3. Insert the latch plate into the buckle. Properly fasten the seat belt the same way you fasten the lap/shoulder seat belt.
Small Latch Plate
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
Advice for Pregnant Women
If you are pregnant, the best way to protect yourself and your unborn child when driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt and keep the lap part of the belt as low as possible across the hips.
Wear the shoulder belt across the chest avoiding the abdomen.
1Advice for Pregnant Women
Each time you have a checkup, ask your doctor if it is okay for you to drive.
To reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your unborn child that can be caused by an inflating front airbag:
· When driving, sit upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full control of the vehicle.
· When sitting in the front passenger's seat, adjust
the seat as far back as possible.
Safe Driving
QRG TOC
Wear the lap part of the belt as low as possible across the hips.
Index
Home
35
uuSeat BeltsuSeat Belt Inspection
Safe Driving
QRG TOC
Seat Belt Inspection
Regularly check the condition of your seat belts as follows:
· Pull each belt out fully, and look for frays, cuts, burns, and wear.
· Check that the latches work smoothly and the belts retract easily. u If a belt does not retract easily, cleaning the belt may correct the problem. Only use a mild soap and warm water. Do not use bleach or cleaning solvents. Make sure the belt is completely dry before allowing it to retract.
Any belt that is not in good condition or working properly will not provide proper protection and should be replaced as soon as possible. A belt that has been worn during a crash may not provide the same level of protection in a subsequent crash. Have your seat belts inspected by a dealer after any collision.
1Seat Belt Inspection
3 WARNING
Not checking or maintaining seat belts can result in serious injury or death if the seat belts do not work properly when needed.
Check your seat belts regularly and have any problem corrected as soon as possible.
Index
Home
36
Airbags
Airbag System Components
8
3
11 12 9
8
7 10
10
2
5
4 2 6 8 5 13
8 8
QRG
3
TOC
8
8
Index Home
Continued 37
Safe Driving
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components
QRG
The front, front side, and side curtain
d An electronic control unit that continually h Impact sensors that can detect a
airbags are deployed according to the
monitors and records information about
moderate to severe front impact, side
TOC direction and severity of impact. The airbag
the sensors, the airbag activators, the
impact, or if your vehicle is about to
Safe Driving
system includes:
a Two SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) front airbags. The driver's airbag is stored in the center of the steering wheel; the front passenger's airbag is stored in the dashboard. Both are marked SRS AIRBAG.
seat belt tensioners, and driver and front passenger seat belt use when the ignition switch is in ON (w.
e Automatic front seat belt tensioners. The driver's and front passenger's seat belts incorporate sensors that detect whether or not they are fastened.
rollover.
i An indicator on the dashboard that alerts you that the front passenger's front airbag has been turned off.
j Sensors that can detect if a child or small statured adult is in the deployment path of the front passenger's side airbag.
b Two side airbags, one for the driver and one for a front passenger. The airbags are stored in the outer edges of the seat-
f A driver's seat position sensor. If the seat is too far forward, the airbag will inflate with less force.
k An indicator on the instrument panel that alerts you to a possible problem with your
backs. Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.
airbag system or seat belt tensioners.
c Two side curtain airbags, one for each side of the vehicle. The airbags are stored
g Weight sensors in the front passenger's seat. The front passenger's airbag will be turned off if the weight on the seat is 65
l An indicator on the instrument panel that alerts you that the front passenger's side
in the ceiling, above the side windows.
lbs (29 kg) or less (the weight of an infant airbag has been turned off.
The front and rear pillars are marked
or small child).
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG.
m Safing Sensor
Index
Home
38
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components
Important Facts About Your Airbags
Airbags can pose serious hazards. To do their job, airbags must inflate with tremendous force. So, while airbags help save lives, they can cause burns, bruises, and other minor injuries, and sometimes even fatal ones if occupants are not wearing their seat belts properly and sitting correctly.
What you should do: Always wear your seat belt properly, and sit upright and as far back from the steering wheel as possible while allowing full control of the vehicle. A front passenger should move their seat as far back from the dashboard as possible.
1Important Facts About Your Airbags Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags. Together, airbags and seat belts provide the best protection.
When driving, keep hands and arms out of the deployment path of the front airbag by holding each side of the steering wheel. Do not cross an arm over the airbag cover.
Remember, however, that no safety system can prevent all injuries or deaths that can occur in a severe crash, even when seat belts are properly worn and the airbags deploy.
Do not place hard or sharp objects between yourself and a front airbag. Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap, or driving with a pipe or other sharp object in your mouth, can result in injuries if your front airbag inflates.
Do not attach or place objects on the front airbag covers. Objects on the covers marked SRS AIRBAG could interfere with the proper operation of the airbags or be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
Safe Driving
QRG TOC
Index
Home
39
uuAirbagsuTypes of Airbags
QRG Types of Airbags
Your vehicle is equipped with three types of airbags: · Front airbags: Airbags in front of the driver's and front passenger's seats. TOC · Side airbags: Airbags in the driver's and front passenger's seat-backs.
· Side curtain airbags: Airbags above the side windows.
Each is discussed in the following pages.
1Types of Airbags
The airbags can inflate whenever the ignition switch is in ON (w.
Safe Driving
Front Airbags (SRS)
The front SRS airbags inflate in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help protect the head and chest of the driver and/or front passenger.
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbags are designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. Seat belts are the occupant's primary restraint system.
Housing Locations
The front airbags are housed in the center of the steering wheel for the driver, an.d in the dashboard for the front passenger. Both airbags are marked SRS AIRBAG
1Front Airbags (SRS)
Dual-Stage, Multiple-Threshold Front Airbags (SRS) Your vehicle is equipped with dual-stage, multiplethreshold front airbags (SRS). During a frontal crash severe enough to cause one or both front airbags to deploy, the airbags can inflate at different rates, depending on the severity of the crash, whether or not the seat belts are latched, and/ or other factors. Frontal airbags are designed to supplement the seat belts to help reduce the likelihood of head and chest injuries in frontal crashes.
Index
Home
40
Operation
Front airbags are designed to inflate during moderate-to-severe frontal collisions. When the vehicle decelerates suddenly, the sensors send information to the control unit which signals one or both front airbags to inflate.
A frontal collision can be either head-on or angled between two vehicles, or when a vehicle crashes into a stationary object, such as a concrete wall.
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS) QRG TOC
Safe Driving
How the Front Airbags Work
While your seat belt restrains your torso, the front airbag provides supplemental protection for your head and chest.
The front airbags deflate immediately so that they won't interfere with the driver's visibility or the ability to steer or operate other controls.
The total time for inflation and deflation is so fast that most occupants are not aware that the airbags deployed until they see them lying in front of them.
1How the Front Airbags Work
After a front airbag inflates in a crash, you may see what looks like smoke. This is actually powder from the airbag's surface. Although the powder is not harmful, people with respiratory problems may experience some temporary discomfort. If this occurs, get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
Although the driver's and front passenger's airbags normally inflate within a split second of each other, it is possible for only one airbag to deploy. This can happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin, or threshold, that determines whether or not the airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental protection offered by the airbag would be minimal.
Index
Continued
Home
41
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
Safe Driving
QRG TOC
Index Home
42
When front airbags should not deploy Minor frontal crashes: Front airbags were designed to supplement seat belts and help save lives, not to prevent minor scrapes, or even broken bones that might occur during a less than moderate-to-severe frontal crash.
Side impacts: Front airbags can provide protection when a sudden deceleration causes a driver or front passenger to move towards the front of the vehicle. Side airbags and side curtain airbags have been specifically designed to help reduce the severity of injuries that can occur during a moderate-to-severe side impact which can cause the driver or passenger to move towards the side of the vehicle.
Rear impacts: Head restraints and seat belts are your best protection during a rear impact. Front airbags cannot provide any significant protection and are not designed to deploy in such collisions.
Rollovers: Seat belts and, in vehicles equipped with a rollover sensor, side airbags and side curtain airbags offer the best protection in a rollover. Because front airbags could provide little if any protection, they are not designed to deploy during a rollover. When front airbags deploy with little or no visible damage Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy. Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed object that causes a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent. When front airbags may not deploy, even though exterior damage
appears severe Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they had deployed.
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
Advanced Airbags
Your front airbags have advanced features to help reduce the likelihood of airbag
related injuries to smaller occupants.
The driver's advanced front airbag system
Driver's Seat Position Sensor
includes a seat position sensor.
If the seat is too far forward, the airbag inflates with less force, regardless of the
severity of the impact.
Passenger's Seat Weight Sensors
The passenger's advanced front airbag system has weight sensors.
Although Honda recommends against carrying an infant or small child in front, if the sensors detect the weight of a child (up to about 65 lbs or 29 kg), the system will automatically turn off the passenger's front airbag.
1Advanced Airbags
If there is a problem with the driver's seat position sensor, the SRS indicator will come on and the airbag will inflate with full (normal) force, regardless of the driver's seating position.
For both advanced front airbags to work properly:
· Do not spill any liquid on or under the seats. · Do not put any object under the passenger's seat. · Make sure any objects are positioned properly on
the floor. Improperly positioned objects can interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
· All occupants should sit upright and wear their seat
belts properly.
· Do not place any cover over the passenger side
dashboard.
Make sure the floor mat behind the front passenger's seat is hooked to the floor mat anchor. An improperly placed mat can interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
2 Floor Mats P. 429
Safe Driving
QRG TOC
Index
Home
43
Safe Driving
uuAirbagsuSide Airbags
QRG Side Airbags
The side airbags help protect the upper torso of the driver or a front passenger during a moderate-to-severe side impact. TOC
Housing Locations
The side airbags are housed in the outside edge of the driver's and passenger's seatbacks.
Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.
Housing Location
1Side Airbags Do not attach accessories on or near the side airbags. They can interfere with the proper operation of the airbags, or hurt someone if an airbag inflates.
If the impact is on the passenger's side, the airbag may not deploy when there is no passenger in the front passenger seat.
Do not cover or replace the front seat-back covers without consulting a dealer. Improperly replacing or covering front seat-back covers can prevent your side airbags from properly deploying during a side impact.
Operation
Index Home
44
When inflated
When the sensors detect a moderate-tosevere side impact, the control unit signals the side airbag on the impact side to immediately inflate.
Side Airbag
When a side airbag deploys with little or no visible damage Because the airbag system senses sudden acceleration, a strong impact to the side of the vehicle's framework can cause a side airbag to deploy. In such cases, there may be little or no damage, but the side impact sensors detected a severe enough impact to deploy the airbag.
When a side airbag may not deploy, even though visible damage appears severe
It is possible for a side airbag to not deploy during an impact that results in apparently severe damage. This can occur when the point of impact was towards the far front or rear of the vehicle, or when the vehicle's crushable body parts absorbed most of the crash energy. In either case, the side airbag would not have been needed nor provided protection even if it had deployed.
uuAirbagsuSide Airbags QRG TOC
Safe Driving
Continued
Index
Home
45
uuAirbagsuSide Airbags
QRG
Side Airbag Cutoff System
1Side Airbag Cutoff System
Safe Driving
TOC To reduce the likelihood that a front passenger may be injured by an inflating side airbag, the passenger side airbag is automatically turned off when:
· The height sensors detect a child or short-statured adult is seated in the front passenger seat.
Sensor that monitors the passenger's height.
· The position sensor detects that the front passenger is leaning into the deployment path of the side airbag.
When the side airbag cutoff system is activated, the side airbag off indicator comes on.
2 Side Airbag Off Indicator P. 50
Side Airbag Off Indicator
If the side airbag off indicator comes on, have the passenger sit upright. A few seconds after the passenger is sitting properly, the side airbag will automatically be turned on, and the indicator will go off.
Sensor that monitors the passenger's position.
The sensors that monitor the front passenger's height and body position may not work if:
· The seat-back is wet · The passenger is touching a metal or other
electrical conductive object
· A seat cushion is on the seat · The passenger is wearing excessively thick clothing
If the front passenger is a child, stop when it is safe to do so, and have the child sit properly restrained in a rear seat.
Index
Home
46
uuAirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags
Side Curtain Airbags
The side curtain airbags help protect the heads of the driver and passengers in outer seating positions during a moderate-to-severe side impact.
Housing Locations
The side curtain airbags are located in the ceiling above the side windows on both sides of the vehicle.
1Side Curtain Airbags The side curtain airbags are most effective when an occupant is wearing their seat belt properly and sitting upright, well back in their seat.
Do not attach any objects to the side windows or roof pillars as they can interfere with the proper operation of the side curtain airbags.
Safe Driving
QRG TOC
Side Curtain Airbag Storage
Operation
The side curtain airbag is designed to deploy in a moderate-to-severe side impact.
Deployed Side Curtain Airbag
When side curtain airbags deploy in a frontal collision One or both side curtain airbags may inflate in a moderate to severe angled frontal collision. In this case, the side curtain airbags will deploy slightly after the front airbags.
Index
Home
47
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
Safe Driving
QRG Airbag System Indicators
If a problem occurs in the airbag system, the SRS indicator will come on and a message appears on the multi-information display*. TOC
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Indicator
When the ignition switch is turned to ON (w
The indicator comes on for a few seconds, then goes off. This tells you the system is working properly.
1SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Indicator
3 WARNING
Ignoring the SRS indicator can result in serious injury or death if the airbag systems or tensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible if the SRS indicator alerts you to a possible problem.
If the indicator comes on at any other time, or does not come on at all, have the system checked by a dealer as soon as possible. If you don't, your airbags and seat belt tensioners may not work properly when they are needed.
Index
Home
48 * Not available on all models
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
U.S. Canada
When the passenger airbag off indicator comes on
The indicator comes on to alert you that the passenger's front airbag has been turned off. This occurs when the front passenger's weight sensors detect 65 lbs (29 kg) or less, the weight of an infant or small child, on the seat.
Infants and small children should always ride properly restrained in a back seat.
2 Child Safety P. 52
1Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
If the indicator comes on with no front passenger and no objects on the passenger's seat, or with an adult riding there, something may be interfering with the weight sensors. Such as:
· An object hanging on the seat or in the seat-back
pocket.
· A child seat or other object pressing against the
rear of the seat-back.
· A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of
the front passenger's seat.
· The front seat or seat-back is forced back against
an object on the seat or floor behind it.
· An object placed under the front passenger's seat.
Objects placed on the seat can also cause the indicator to come on.
If the front passenger seat is empty, the passenger's front airbag will not deploy and the indicator will not come on.
If none of these conditions exist, have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
The passenger airbag off indicator may come on and goes off repeatedly if the total weight on the seat is near the airbag cutoff threshold.
Safe Driving
QRG TOC
Continued
Index
Home
49
Safe Driving
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators QRG
Side Airbag Off Indicator
TOC When the side airbag off indicator comes on
U.S.
U.S.
Canada Canada
1Side Airbag Off Indicator
When you turn the ignition switch to ON (w, the indicator should come on for a few seconds and then go out. If it doesn't come on, stays on, or comes on while driving without a passenger in the front seat, have the system checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
This indicator comes on if the passenger's side airbag has been turned off because the passenger is too small to be sitting in the front seat, is slouching or not sitting upright, or has leaned into the airbag's deployment path.
Unless the passenger is a smaller statured adult or a child, the indicator should go off when the passenger returns to a proper upright sitting position.
Index
Home
50
uuAirbagsuAirbag Care
Airbag Care
You do not need to, and should not, perform any maintenance on or replace any airbag system components yourself. However, you should have your vehicle inspected by a dealer in the following situations:
When the airbags have deployed If an airbag has inflated, the control unit and other related parts must be replaced. Similarly, once an automatic seat belt tensioner has been activated, it must be replaced.
1Airbag Care
We recommend against the use of salvaged airbag system components, including the airbag, tensioners, sensors, and control unit.
Safe Driving
QRG TOC
When the vehicle has been in a moderate-to-severe collision Even if the airbags did not inflate, have your dealer inspect the following: the driver's seat position sensor, weight sensors in the passenger's seat, front seat belt tensioners, and each seat belt that was worn during the crash.
Do not remove or modify a front seat without consulting a dealer This would likely disable the driver's seat position sensor or the passenger's weight sensors. If it is necessary to remove or modify a front seat to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact a Honda dealer, or for U.S. vehicles, American Honda Automobile Customer Service at 800-999-1009 and for Canadian vehicles, Honda Canada Customer Relations at 888-9-HONDA-9.
Index
Home
51
Child Safety
Safe Driving
QRG TOC
Protecting Child Passengers
Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are either unrestrained or not properly restrained. In fact, vehicle accidents are the number one cause of death of children age 12 and under.
To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries, every state, Canadian province and territory requires that infants and children be properly restrained when they ride in a vehicle.
Children should sit properly restrained in a rear seat. This is because:
· An inflating front or side airbag can injure or kill a child sitting in the front seat.
· A child in the front seat is more likely to interfere with the driver's ability to safely control the vehicle.
· Statistics show that children of all sizes and ages are safer when they are properly restrained in a rear seat.
1Protecting Child Passengers
3 WARNING
Children who are unrestrained or improperly restrained can be seriously injured or killed in a crash.
Any child too small for a seat belt should be properly restrained in a child seat. A larger child should be properly restrained with a seat belt, using a booster seat if necessary.
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that all children age 12 and under be properly restrained in a rear seat. Some states or provinces/ territories have laws restricting where children may ride.
Index
Home
52
uuChild SafetyuProtecting Child Passengers
· Any child who is too small to wear a seat belt correctly must be restrained in an approved child seat that is properly secured to the vehicle using either the lap belt portion of the lap/shoulder belt or the lower anchors of the LATCH system.
· Never hold a child on your lap because it is impossible to protect them in the event of a collision.
1Protecting Child Passengers
3 WARNING
Allowing a child to play with a seat belt or wrap one around their neck can result in serious injury or death.
· Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child. During a crash, the belt would likely press deep into the child and cause serious or fatal injuries.
· Never let two children use the same seat belt. Both children could be very seriously injured in a crash.
· Do not allow children to operate the doors, windows or seat adjustments.
Instruct children not to play with any seat belt and make sure any unused seat belt a child can reach is buckled, fully retracted, and locked.
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.
· Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended, especially in hot weather when the inside of the vehicle can get hot enough to kill them. They could also activate vehicle controls causing it to move unexpectedly.
To remind you of the passenger's front airbag hazards and child safety, your vehicle warning came with a label on the dashboard (U.S. models) and has labels on the front visors. Please read and follow the instructions on these labels.
2 Safety Labels P. 66
Safe Driving
QRG TOC
Index
Home
53
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
QRG Safety of Infants and Small Children
Protecting Infants
1Protecting Infants
TOC An infant must be properly restrained in a rear-facing, reclining child seat until the
3 WARNING
Safe Driving
infant reaches the seat maker's weight or height limit for the seat, and the infant is at least one year old.
Positioning a rear-facing child seat Child seats must be placed and secured in a
Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death during a crash.
rear seating position.
Always place a rear-facing child seat in the
rear seat, not the front.
When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent the driver or a front passenger from moving their seat all the way back, or from locking their seat-back in the desired position.
It can also interfere with proper operation of the passenger's advanced front airbag system.
2 Airbags P. 37
Index
If this occurs, we recommend that you install the child seat directly behind the front passenger's seat, move the seat as far forward as needed, and leave it unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get a smaller rear-facing child seat.
Rear-facing child seats should never be installed in a forward facing position.
Always refer to the child seat manufacturer's instructions before installation.
Home
54
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
QRG
Protecting Smaller Children
1Protecting Smaller Children
If a child is at least one year old and within the weight range indicated by the child
3 WARNING
TOC
Safe Driving
seat manufacturer, the child should be properly restrained in a firmly secured forward-facing child seat.
Forward-facing child seat placement We strongly recommend placing a forward-
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death if the front airbag inflates.
facing child seat in a rear seating position.
If you must place a forward-facing child
seat in front, move the vehicle seat as far
back as possible, and properly restrain the
child.
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can be hazardous, even with advanced front airbags that automatically turn the passenger's front airbag off. A rear seat is the safest place for a child.
Educate yourself about the laws and regulations regarding child seat use where you are driving, and follow the child seat manufacturer's instructions.
Many experts recommend use of a rear-facing seat up to age two, if the child's height and weight are appropriate for a rear-facing seat.
Continued
Index
Home
55
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
QRG TOC
Selecting a Child Seat
Most child seats are LATCH-compatible (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren). Some have a rigid-type connector, while others have a flexible-type connector. Both are equally easy to use. Some existing and previously owned child seats can only be installed using the seat belt. Whichever type you choose, follow the child seat manufacturer's use and care instructions as well as the instructions in this manual. Proper installation is key to maximizing your child's safety.
1Selecting a Child Seat Installation of a LATCH-compatible child seat is simple.
LATCH-compatible child seats have been developed to simplify the installation process and reduce the likelihood of injuries caused by incorrect installation.
In seating positions and vehicles not equipped with LATCH, a LATCH compatible child seat can be installed using the seat belt and a top tether for added security. This is because all child seats are required to be designed so that they can be secured with a lap belt or the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt. In addition, the child seat manufacturer may advise that a seat belt be used to attach a LATCH-compatible seat once a child reaches a specified weight. Please read the child seat owner's manual for proper installation instructions.
Important consideration when selecting a child seat Make sure the child seat meets the following three requirements: · The child seat is the correct type and size for the child.
· The child seat is the correct type for the seating position.
· The child seat is compliant with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
Index
Home
56
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
QRG
Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
A LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed in each of the second row seats, and
TOC
the passenger's side third row seat. A child seat is attached to the lower anchors
with either the rigid or flexible type of connectors.
Second row seat
1. Locate the lower anchors under the marks.
Safe Driving
Marks
Third row seat
Marks
Continued
Index
Home
57
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
QRG TOC
Lower Anchors
Rigid Type
2. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat then attach the child seat to the lower anchors according to the instructions that came with the child seat. u When installing the child seat, make sure that the lower anchors are not obstructed by the seat belt or any other object.
1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
For your child's safety, when using a child seat installed using the LATCH system, make sure that the seat is properly secured to the vehicle. A child seat that is not properly secured will not adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.
Flexible Type
Index
Home
58
Outer position
Anchor
Center position
Anchor
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Tether Strap Hook
Outer position
3. Put the head restraint to its upper-most position, then route the tether strap between the head restraint legs, and secure the tether strap hook onto the anchor.
4. Go to step 6.
QRG TOC
Safe Driving
Tether Strap Hook
Center position
3. Lower the head restraint to its lowest position.
4. Route the tether strap over the head restraint. Make sure the strap is not twisted.
5. Secure the tether strap hook onto the anchor.
All models
6. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the child seat maker.
7. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by rocking it forward and back and side to side; little movement should be felt.
8. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor is activated, and the belt is fully retracted and locked.
Continued
Index
Home
59
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
QRG
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
A child seat that is not properly secured will not
TOC
1. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat.
adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause
2. Route the seat belt through the child seat
injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.
according to the seat maker's instructions,
and insert the latch plate into the buckle.
u Insert the latch plate fully until it clicks.
Safe Driving
Index
Home
60
3. Slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all the way out until it stops. This activates the lockable retractor.
4. Let the seat belt completely wind up into the retractor, then try to pull it out to make sure the retractor is locked. u If you are able to pull the shoulder belt out, the lockable retractor is not activated. Pull the seat belt all the way out, and repeat steps 3 4.
5. Grab the shoulder part of the seat belt near the buckle, and pull up to remove any slack from the lap part of the belt. u When doing this, place your weight on the child seat and push it into the vehicle seat.
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
6. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by rocking it forward and back and side to side; little movement should be felt.
7. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor is activated, and the belt is fully retracted and locked.
1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.
QRG TOC
Safe Driving
Adding Security with a Tether
Anchor Fitting
A tether anchorage point is provided behind each second and third row seating position. A child seat that is installed with a seat belt and comes with a tether can use the tether for additional security.
1Adding Security with a Tether
Since a tether can provide additional security to the lap/shoulder seat belt installation, we recommend using a tether whenever one is available.
Tether Anchorage Points Anchor Fitting
Tether Anchorage Points
Continued
Index
Home
61
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
QRG
Using an outer anchor
TOC
Tether 1. Put the head restraint to its upper-most
Strap
position, then route the tether strap
Hook
through the head restraint legs. Make sure
the strap is not twisted.
Safe Driving
Anchor
2. Secure the tether strap hook onto the anchor.
3. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the child seat manufacturer.
Anchor
Tether Strap Hook
Using the center anchor 1. Lower the head restraint to its lowest
position.
2. Route the tether strap over the head restraint. Make sure the strap is not twisted.
3. Secure the tether strap hook onto the anchor.
4. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the child seat manufacturer.
Index
Home
62
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children
Safety of Larger Children
Protecting Larger Children
The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit, what kind of booster seat to use if one is needed, and important precautions for a child who must sit in front.
Checking Seat Belt Fit
When a child is too big for a child seat, secure the child in a rear seat using the lap/ shoulder seat belt. Have the child sit upright and all the way back, then answer the following questions.
Checklist · Do the child's knees bend comfortably over
the edge of the seat?
1Safety of Larger Children
3 WARNING
Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in front can result in injury or death if the passenger's front airbag inflates.
If a larger child must ride in front, move the vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible, have the child sit up properly and wear the seat belt properly, using a booster seat if needed.
· Does the shoulder belt cross between the child's neck and arm?
· Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as possible, touching the child's thighs?
· Will the child be able to stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If you answer yes to all these questions, the child is ready to wear the lap/shoulder seat belt correctly. If you answer no to any question, the child needs to ride on a booster seat until the seat belt fits properly without a booster seat.
Safe Driving
QRG TOC
Index
Continued
Home
63
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children
QRG
Booster Seats
TOC
If a lap/shoulder seat belt cannot be used properly, position the child in a booster seat in a rear seating position. For the child's safety, check that the child meets the booster seat manufacturer's recommendations.
1Booster Seats
When installing a booster seat, make sure to read the instructions that came with it, and install the seat accordingly. There are high- and low-type booster seats. Choose a booster seat that allows the child to wear the seat belt correctly.
Safe Driving
Some U.S. states and Canadian provinces and territories require children to use a booster seat until they reach a given age or weight (e.g. 6 years or 60 lbs). Be sure to check current laws in the state or province, or territory where you intend to drive.
Protecting Larger Children-Final Checks
Your vehicle has a rear seat where children can be properly restrained. If you ever have to carry a group of children, and a child must ride in front: · Make sure you read and fully understand the instructions and safety information
in this manual.
· Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible.
· Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat.
· Check that the seat belt is properly positioned so that the child is secure in the seat.
Index Home
Monitoring child passengers We strongly recommend that you keep an eye on child passengers. Even older, more mature children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten their seat belts and sit up properly.
64
Exhaust Gas Hazard
Carbon Monoxide Gas
The engine exhaust from this vehicle contains carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless, and highly toxic gas. As long as you properly maintain your vehicle, carbon monoxide gas will not get into the interior.
Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever · The exhaust system is making an unusual noise. · The exhaust system may have been damaged. · The vehicle is raised for an oil change.
1Carbon Monoxide Gas
3 WARNING
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic. Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and even kill you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or activities that expose you to carbon monoxide.
When you operate a vehicle with the tailgate open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into the interior and create a hazardous condition. If you must drive with the tailgate open, open all the windows and set the climate control system as shown below.
1. Select the fresh air mode.
2. Select the mode. 3. Set the fan speed to high. 4. Set the temperature control to a comfortable setting.
An enclosed area such as a garage can quickly fill up with carbon monoxide gas. Do not run the engine with the garage door closed. Even when the garage door is open, drive out of the garage immediately after starting the engine.
Safe Driving
QRG TOC
Adjust the climate control system in the same manner if you sit in your parked vehicle with the engine running.
Index
Home
65
Safety Labels
QRG Label Locations
These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that can cause serious injury or death. Read these labels carefully. TOC If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U.S. dashboard label which may be removed by the owner), contact a dealer for a replacement.
Safe Driving
Sun Visor U.S. models
Canadian models
Sun Visor U.S. models only
Dashboard U.S. models only
Radiator Cap
Doorjambs U.S. models
Canadian models
Index
Home
66
QRG
Instrument Panel
This chapter describes the buttons, indicators, and gauges that are used while driving.
* Not available on all models
Indicators ............................................ 68 Multi-Information Display Warning and Information Messages* .................... 78
Gauges and Displays Gauges.............................................. 80 Information Display*.......................... 81 Multi-Information Display*................. 85
Index
Home
67
Indicators
Instrument Panel
QRG TOC
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
Explanation
U.S. Canada
Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Red)
Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w, then goes off.
Comes on when the parking brake is applied, and goes off when it is released.
Comes on when the brake fluid level is low.
Comes on if there is a problem with the brake system.
The beeper sounds and the indicator comes on if you drive with the parking brake not fully released.
Comes on while driving Make sure the parking brake is released. Check the brake fluid level.
2 What to do when the indicator comes on while driving P. 452
Comes on along with the ABS indicator - Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On P. 452
Low Oil Pressure Indicator
Comes on when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w, and goes off when the engine starts.
Comes on when the engine oil pressure is low.
Comes on while driving Immediately stop in a safe place.
2 If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On P. 450
Index
Home
68 * Not available on all models
Message *
U.S.
Canada
uu Indicators u
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
Explanation
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Comes on when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w, and goes off either when the engine starts or after several seconds if the engine is not started. If "readiness codes" have not been set, it blinks five times before it goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem with the emissions control system.
Blinks when a misfire in the engine's cylinders is detected.
Readiness codes are part of the on board diagnostics for the emissions control systems.
2 Testing of Readiness Codes P. 470
Comes on while driving - Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
Blinks while driving - Stop in a safe place where there are no flammable objects. Stop the engine for 10 minutes or more, and wait for it to cool down. Then, take the vehicle to a dealer.
2 If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks P. 451
Charging System Indicator
Comes on when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w, and goes off when the engine starts.
Comes on when the battery is not charging.
Comes on while driving - Turn off the climate control system and rear defogger in order to reduce electricity consumption.
2 If the Charging System Indicator Comes On P. 450
Shift Lever Position Indicator
Indicates current shift lever position. (d indicator: Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON (w, then goes off. Comes on when you press the (d button while the shift lever is in (D.
2 Shifting P. 346
* Not available on all models
Message *
QRG
TOC
Instrument Panel
-- Index
Home
Continued 69
uu Indicators u
Instrument Panel
QRG TOC
Indicator
Name
Transmission Indicator
Seat Belt Reminder Indicator
Low Fuel Indicator
On/Blinking
Explanation
Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w, then goes off.
Blinks if the transmission system has a problem.
Blinks while driving - Avoid sudden starts and acceleration and have the vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
Comes on and the beeper sounds if you are not wearing a seat belt when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w. If the front passenger is not wearing a seat belt, the indicator comes on a few seconds later.
Blinks while driving if either you or the front passenger has not fastened a seat belt. The beeper sounds and the indicator blinks at regular intervals.
The beeper stops and the indicator goes off when you and the front passenger fasten their seat belts.
Stays on after you or the front passenger has fastened the seat belt - A detection error may have occurred in the sensor. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 Seat Belt Reminder P. 30
Comes on when the fuel reserve is running low (approximately 2.8 U.S. gal./10.8 Liter).
Blinks if there is a problem with the fuel gauge.
Comes on - Refuel your vehicle as soon as possible.
Blinks - Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
Message *
Index
Home
70 * Not available on all models
uu Indicators u
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
Explanation
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) Indicator
Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w, then goes off.
If it comes on at any other time, there is a problem with the ABS.
Stays on constantly - Have the vehicle checked by a dealer. With this indicator on, your vehicle still has normal braking ability but no anti-lock function.
2 ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) P. 362
Supplemental Restraint System Indicator
Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w, then goes off.
Comes on if a problem with any of the following is detected: - Supplemental restraint system - Side airbag system - Side curtain airbag system - Seat belt tensioner
Stays on constantly or does not come on at all - Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
VTM-4® System Indicator *
Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w, then goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem with the VTM-4®.
Blinks when the VTM-4® system is overheated. The system is inactive.
Stays on constantly - Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
Blinks while driving - The VTM-4® fluid temperature is too high. Stop in a safe place, shift to (P, and idle the engine until the indicator goes off. If the indicator does not stop blinking, take your vehicle to a dealer.
2 VTM (Variable Torque Management)-4r System* P. 354
Message * --
Instrument Panel
QRG TOC
Index
* Not available on all models
Home
Continued 71
uu Indicators u
Instrument Panel
QRG TOC
Index
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
Explanation
VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist) System Indicator
Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w, then goes off.
Blinks when VSA® is active. Comes on if there is a problem with
the VSA® system. Comes on if there is a problem with
the hill start assist system.
Stays on constantly - Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability Control), System P. 352
VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist) OFF Indicator
Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w, then goes off.
Comes on when you deactivate VSA®.
2 VSA® On and Off P. 353
Door Open Indicator
Comes on for a few seconds if you turn the ignition switch to ON (w, then goes off.
Comes on if any door, glass hatch, or tailgate is not completely closed.
Goes off when all doors, glass hatch, and tailgate are closed.
Door, Glass Hatch, and Tailgate Open Indicator *
Comes on for a few seconds if you turn the ignition switch to ON (w, then goes off.
Comes on if any door, glass hatch, or tailgate is not completely closed.
Goes off when all doors, glass hatch, and tailgate are closed.
Message * -- --
Home
72 * Not available on all models
uu Indicators u
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
Explanation
Daytime Running Lights Indicator *
Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w, then goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem with the DRL system.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 Daytime Running Lights P. 127
System Message Indicator *
Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w, then goes off.
Comes on along with a beep when a problem is detected. A system message on the multi-information display appears at the same time.
While the indicator is on, press the
/
(information) button to see the message again. Refer to the Indicators information in this chapter when a system message appears on the multi-information display. Take the appropriate action for the message. The multi-information display does not return
to the normal screen unless the warning is
canceled, or the / (information) button is pressed.
Comes on for a few seconds when
A/T Temperature Indicator *
you turn the ignition switch to ON (w, then goes off. Comes on when the transmission
fluid temperature is too high.
Comes on while driving - Stop in a safe place, shift to (P, and idle the engine until the indicator goes off.
Message * --
Instrument Panel
QRG TOC
Index
* Not available on all models
Home
Continued 73
uu Indicators u
QRG
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
Explanation
Message *
Comes on for a few seconds when Stays on constantly or does not come
Models with
you turn the ignition switch to ON
on at all - Have the vehicle checked by a
TOC
information display
(w . Comes on if there is a problem with
dealer. If the vehicle is fitted with a compact spare, get your regular tire
--
TPMS Indicator the TPMS, or when a compact spare repaired or replaced and put back on
tire is temporarily installed.
your vehicle as soon as you can.
Instrument Panel
Models with information display
Low Tire Pressure Indicator
Models with multiinformation display
Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator
Comes on for a few seconds when Comes on while driving - Stop in a safe
you turn the ignition switch to ON
place, check tire pressures, and inflate
(w .
the tire(s) if necessary.
Comes on if the tire pressure of any Models with multi-information display of the tires becomes significantly low. Blinks and remains on - Have the
Models with information display
vehicle checked by a dealer. If the vehicle
Comes on for a while and then goes is fitted with a compact spare, get your
off when a compact spare tire is
regular tire repaired or replaced and put
temporarily installed.
back on your vehicle as soon as you can.
Models with multi-information display
Blinks for about one minute, and then stays on if there is a problem with the TPMS, or when a compact spare tire is temporarily installed.
Index
Home
74 * Not available on all models
uu Indicators u
Indicator
Name
Turn Signal Indicators
High Beam Indicator
On/Blinking
Explanation
The turn signal indicators blink when you operate the turn signal lever.
If you press the hazard warning button, both indicators and all turn signals blink at the same time.
Does not blink or blinks rapidly - A turn signal light bulb has blown. Change the bulb immediately.
2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 404 P. 405 P. 406
Comes on when the high beam
headlights are on.
--
Lights On Indicator
Fog Light Indicator *
Comes on whenever the light switch If you remove the key from the ignition
is on, or in AUTO when the exterior switch while the lights are on, a chime
lights are on.
sounds when the driver's door is opened.
Comes on when the fog lights are on. --
U.S. Canada
Side Airbag Off Indicator
Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w, then goes off.
Comes on when the passenger side airbag system is automatically shut off.
It does not mean there is a problem with your side airbags.
Comes on when nobody is sitting in the passenger seat - Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
Comes on when someone is sitting in the seat - Have the passenger sit properly.
Message * -- -- -- --
Instrument Panel
QRG TOC
Index
* Not available on all models
Home
Continued 75
uu Indicators u
Instrument Panel
QRG TOC
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
Explanation
Immobilizer System Indicator
Comes on briefly when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w, then goes off.
Comes on if the immobilizer system cannot recognize the key information.
Blinks - You cannot start the engine. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0, pull the key out, and then insert the key and turn it to ON (w again.
Repeatedly blinks - The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
Do not attempt to alter this system or add other devices to it. Electrical problems can occur.
Security System Blinks when the security system alarm Alarm Indicator* has been set.
2 Security System Alarm* P. 118
U.S. Canada
Starter System Indicator *
Comes on if there is a problem with the starter system.
As a temporary measure, hold the ignition switch to START (e for up to 15 seconds and start the engine. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
Message * --
--
U.S. Canada
Index
Fuel Economy Indicator
Comes on and stays on while you are driving with good fuel economy.
--
--
Home
76 * Not available on all models
uu Indicators u
Indicator
Name
CRUISE MAIN Indicator
On/Blinking
Comes on when you press the CRUISE button.
CRUISE CONTROL Indicator
Comes on if you have set a speed for cruise control.
Explanation
2 Cruise Control P. 348 2 Cruise Control P. 348
Message * -- --
QRG TOC
Instrument Panel
Washer Level Indicator *
Refill washer fluid.
Comes on when washer fluid is low.
2 Refilling Window Washer Fluid
P. 401
U.S. Canada
Maintenance Minder Indicator *
Power Tailgate Indicator *
Comes on when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w, then goes off.
Comes on when the scheduled maintenance is due soon.
2 Maintenance MinderTM P. 381
Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w .
Comes on if there is a problem with the power tailgate system.
Stays on constantly or does not come on at all - You can still open or close the tailgate manually. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
--
U.S. Canada
* Not available on all models
Index
Home
77
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages*
QRG Multi-Information Display Warning and Information Messages*
The following messages appear only on the multi-information display. Press the with the system message indicator on.
/ (information) button to see the message again
Message
Condition
Explanation
Appears when the fuel fill cap is loose or is not
TOC
installed.
2 Check/Tighten Fuel Cap Message P. 451
Instrument Panel
Appears when the scheduled maintenance is due soon.
Consequently, SERVICE DUE NOW and SERVICE PAST DUE follow.
2 Maintenance Minder Messages on the MultiInformation Display P. 386
Appears when you open the driver's door while the Remove the key from the ignition switch. ignition key is in LOCK (0.
Appears when the engine coolant temperature gets abnormally high.
2 Overheating P. 448
Appears when the daytime running lights are off.
2 Daytime Running Lights P. 127
Index
Home
78 * Not available on all models
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages*
Message
QRG
Condition
Explanation
Appears if there is a problem with the parking sensor Check if the area around the sensor(s) is covered with
system. The beeper sounds.
mud, ice, snow, etc. If the indicator(s) stays on even
after you clean the area, have the system checked by a
dealer.
TOC
Instrument Panel
* Not available on all models
Index
Home
79
Gauges and Displays
QRG Gauges
Gauges include the speedometer, tachometer, fuel gauge, and related indicators. They are displayed when the ignition switch is in ON (w.
Speedometer
TOC Displays your driving speed in mph (U.S.) or km/h (Canada).
Instrument Panel
Tachometer
Shows the number of engine revolutions per minute.
Fuel Gauge
Displays the amount of fuel left in the fuel tank.
Temperature Gauge
Displays the temperature of the engine coolant. Index Home
80
1Fuel Gauge
NOTICE You should refuel when the reading approaches E . Running out of fuel can cause the engine to misfire, damaging the catalytic converter.
The actual amount of remaining fuel may differ from the fuel gauge reading.
1Temperature Gauge
NOTICE Driving with the temperature gauge pointer in the upper zone can cause serious engine damage. Pull safely to the side of the road and allow engine temperature to return to normal.
2 Overheating P. 448
Information Display*
The information display shows the odometer, trip meter, engine oil life and maintenance service item codes, and other gauges.
Switching the Display
Press the (Select/Reset) knob to change the display.
Odometer
uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display* QRG
TOC Range (estimated distance)
Instrument Panel
Outside temperature* Trip meter B
Trip meter A
Engine oil life
Instant fuel economy Average fuel economy
Odometer
Shows the total number of miles or kilometers that your vehicle has accumulated.
* Not available on all models
Continued
Index
Home
81
uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display*
QRG
Trip Meter
Shows the total number of miles or kilometers driven since the last reset. Meters A and B can be used to measure two separate trips.
1Trip Meter
Switch between trip meter A and trip meter B by pressing the knob.
TOC Resetting a trip meter To reset a trip meter, display it, then press and hold the knob. The trip meter is reset to 0.0.
Instrument Panel
Instant Fuel Economy
Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg or l/100 km.
Average Fuel Economy
Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each trip meter in mpg (U.S.) or l/100 km (Canada). The display is updated at set intervals. When a trip meter is reset, the average fuel economy is also reset.
Engine Oil Life
Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance MinderTM.
2 Maintenance MinderTM P. 381
Index Home
Range
Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining fuel. This distance is estimated from the fuel economy of your trips in the past.
82 * Not available on all models
Check Fuel Cap
Appears when the fuel fill cap is loose or is not installed.
2 Check/Tighten Fuel Cap Message P. 451
Tire Pressure Monitor
Shows each tire's pressure.
2 TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) P. 355
uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display* QRG
TOC
Instrument Panel
* Not available on all models
Continued
Index
Home
83
uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display*
Instrument Panel
QRG TOC
Outside Temperature*
Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.) or Celsius (Canada).
Adjusting the outside temperature indicator Adjust the temperature reading up to ±5ºF or ±3ºC if the temperature reading seems incorrect.
Reset Mode Initial Display
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w.
Oil life
2. Press and hold the (Select/Reset) knob for 10 seconds or more. u The information display shows the reset mode initial display.
3. Select outside temperature with the knob.
4. Press and hold the knob for a few seconds to enter the outside temperature setting mode.
Outside Temperature
5. Turn the knob to adjust the temperature.
6. Press and release the knob. u The new outside temperature is now entered.
1Outside Temperature* The temperature sensor is in the front bumper. Road heat and exhaust from another vehicle can affect the temperature reading when your vehicle speed is less than 19 mph (30 km/h).
It may take several minutes for the display to be updated after the temperature reading has stabilized.
1Adjusting the outside temperature indicator Adjust the temperature reading up to ±5ºF or ±3ºC.
Index
Home
84 * Not available on all models
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*
Multi-Information Display*
QRG
Shows the odometer, trip meter, outside temperature indicator, and other gauges. It also displays important messages such as warnings and other helpful information.
Switching the Display
Press the
/ (information) button or the SEL/RESET button to change the display.
TOC
Instrument Panel
Odometer
Trip Computer
/ Button
Trip meter A
SEL/RESET Button
Engine oil life
Trip meter B
* Not available on all models
Tire Pressure Monitor Customize Settings
Index
Home
Continued 85
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display* QRG
Instrument Panel
TOC
/ Button
Trip Computer
Instant fuel economy
Average fuel economy
SEL/RESET Button
Average Speed
Elapsed Time
Range
Index
Odometer
Shows the total number of miles or kilometers that your vehicle has accumulated.
Home
86 * Not available on all models
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*
Trip Meter
Shows the total number of miles or kilometers driven since the last reset. Meters A and B can be used to measure two separate trips.
1Trip Meter
Switch between trip meter A and trip meter B by pressing the SEL/RESET button.
Resetting a trip meter To reset a trip meter, display it, then press and hold the SEL/RESET button. The trip meter is reset to 0.0.
QRG TOC
Instrument Panel
Outside Temperature
Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.) or Celsius (Canada).
Adjusting the outside temperature display Adjust the temperature reading up to ±5°F or ±3°C if the temperature reading seems incorrect.
1Outside Temperature The temperature sensor is in the front bumper. Road heat and exhaust from another vehicle can affect the temperature reading when your vehicle speed is less than 19 mph (30 km/h).
It may take several minutes for the display to be updated after the temperature reading has stabilized.
Use the multi-information display's customized features to correct the temperature.
2 Customized Features P. 90
* Not available on all models
Continued
Index
Home
87
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*
QRG
Trip Computer
Shows the instant fuel economy, average fuel economy, range, elapsed time, and average speed.
TOC Instant Fuel Economy Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg (U.S.) or l/100 km (Canada).
Instrument Panel
Average Fuel Economy Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each trip meter in mpg (U.S.) or l/100 km (Canada). The display is updated at set intervals. When a trip meter is reset, the average fuel economy is also reset.
1Average Fuel Economy
You can change when to reset the average fuel economy.
2 Customized Features P. 90
Range Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining fuel. This distance is estimated from the fuel economy of your trips in the past.
Elapsed Time Shows the time elapsed since the last time Trip A or Trip B was reset.
Average Speed Shows the average speed in mph or km/h since the last time Trip A or Trip B was reset.
1Elapsed Time You can change when to reset the elapsed time. 2 Customized Features P. 90
1Average Speed You can change when to reset the average speed. 2 Customized Features P. 90
Index
Tire Pressure Monitor
Shows each tire's pressure.
2 TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) P. 355
Home
88 * Not available on all models
Engine Oil Life
Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance MinderTM.
2 Maintenance MinderTM P. 381
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display* QRG
TOC
Instrument Panel
* Not available on all models
Continued
Index
Home
89
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*
QRG
Customized Features
Use the multi-information display to customize certain features.
How to customize
TOC Select the CUSTOMIZE SETTINGS by pressing the
/ button while the
ignition switch is in ON (w, and the vehicle is at a complete stop. Press the SEL/
RESET button to change the display to the CHG SETTING.
Instrument Panel
/ Button Changes the customize menu and items.
SEL/RESET Button Enters the selected item.
1Customized Features
To customize other features, press the
/
button.
2 List of customizable options P. 92
2 Example of customization settings P. 94
Customization is possible when you see the driver's ID (DRIVER 1 or DRIVER 2) on the CHG SETTING screen. The driver's ID indicates which remote transmitter you have used to unlock the driver's door. The customized settings are recalled every time you unlock the driver's door with that remote.
When you customize settings: Shift to (P.
Index
Home
90 * Not available on all models
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*
Customization flow
Press the
/ button.
CUSTOMIZE SETTINGS
SEL/RESET
3 SEL/RESET 4
CHG SETTING
3 4
DEFAULT ALL
3 4
EXIT
SEL/RESET
3 4
METER SETUP
3 4
POSITION SETUP
3 4
LIGHTING SETUP
SEL/RESET SEL/RESET SEL/RESET
3
SEL/RESET
4
DOOR/WINDOW SETUP SEL/RESET
3 4
EXIT
LANGUAGE SELECTION ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP. DISPLAY
TRIP A INFO RESET
MEMORY POSITION LINK
INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING TIME HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER AUTO LIGHT SENSITIVITY AUTO DOOR LOCK AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
KEY AND REMOTE UNLOCK MODE KEYLESS LOCK ACKNOWLEDGMENT
SECURITY RELOCK TIMER PTG KEYLESS OPEN MODE*
Instrument Panel
QRG TOC
Index
* Not available on all models
Home
Continued 91
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*
QRG
List of customizable options
Setup Group Customizable Features
Description
Selectable Settings
LANGUAGE SELECTION Changes the displayed language.
ENGLISH*/FRENCH/SPANISH
Instrument Panel
TOC
METER SETUP
ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP. DISPLAY
TRIP A INFO RESET
Adjusts the temperature reading by a few degrees.
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A, average fuel economy A, average speed A, and elapsed time A.
-5°F ~ ±0°F* ~ +5°F (U.S.) -3°C ~ ±0°C* ~ +3°C (Canada)
with REFUEL/ MANUAL ONLY*/IGN OFF
POSITION SETUP
MEMORY POSITION LINK
Changes the driver's seat and the outside mirror positions to a stored setting.
ON*/OFF
LIGHTING SETUP
INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING TIME
HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER
Changes the length of time the interior lights stay on after you close the doors.
Changes the length of time the exterior lights stay on after you close the driver's door.
60 sec/30 sec*/15 sec 60 sec/30 sec/15 sec*/0 sec
AUTO LIGHT SENSITIVITY Changes the timing for the headlights to come on.
MAX/HIGH/MID*/LOW/MIN
*: Default Setting
Index
Home
92 * Not available on all models
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*
QRG
Setup Group Customizable Features
Description
Selectable Settings
AUTO DOOR LOCK
Changes the setting for the automatic locking feature.
SHIFT FROM (P/WITH VEH SPEED*2/OFF
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
Changes the setting for when the doors unlock automatically.
SHIFT TO (P *2/IGN OFF/OFF
TOC
DRIVER DOOR*2/ALL DOORS
Instrument Panel
DOOR/ WINDOW SETUP
KEY AND REMOTE UNLOCK MODE
KEYLESS LOCK ACKNOWLEDGMENT
Sets up either the driver's door or all doors to unlock on the first push of the remote transmitter.
LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash. LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds.
DRIVER DOOR*2/ALL DOOR ON*2/OFF
Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock and
SECURITY RELOCK TIMER the security system to set after you unlock the
90 sec/60 sec/30 sec*2
vehicle without opening any door.
PTG KEYLESS OPEN MODE*1
Changes the keyless setting for when the power tailgate opens.
ANYTIME*2 / WHEN UNLOCKED
DEFAULT ALL
Cancels/Resets all the customized settings as default.
CANCEL*2/SET
*1:Not available on all models *2: Default Setting
* Not available on all models
Index
Home
Continued 93
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*
QRG
Example of customization settings The steps for changing the TRIP A INFO RESET setting to with REFUEL are shown below. The default setting for TRIP A INFO RESET is MANUAL ONLY.
1. Press and release
/ button until
TOC
CUSTOMIZE SETTINGS appears on the
display.
2. Press the SEL/RESET button. u CHG SETTING appears on the display.
Instrument Panel
3. Press the SEL/RESET button to go into the METER SETUP group.
4. Press the SEL/RESET button again. u LANGUAGE SELECTION appears first on the display.
Index
Home
94 * Not available on all models
* Not available on all models
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*
QRG
5. Press the
/ button until TRIP A
INFO RESET appears on the display, then
press the SEL/RESET button.
u The display switches to the setup screen,
where you can select with REFUEL,
MANUAL ONLY, IGN OFF, or EXIT.
TOC
Instrument Panel
6. Press the
/ button and select with
REFUEL, then press the SEL/RESET button.
u The with REFUEL setup screen appears,
then the display returns to the customize
item screen.
7. Press the
/ button until EXIT
appears on the display, then press the SEL/
RESET button.
8. Repeat Step 7 until you return to the normal screen.
Index
Home
95
QRG
Index Home
96
QRG
Controls
This chapter explains how to operate the various controls necessary for driving.
Setting the Clock ................................ 98 Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Key Types and Functions .................... 99 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside .......................................... 101 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside ............................................. 103 Childproof Door Locks ..................... 104 Auto Door Locking/Unlocking .......... 105 Opening and Closing the Tailgate... 110 Security System ................................ 118 Immobilizer System .......................... 118 Security System Alarm*.................... 118 Opening and Closing the Windows..... 120
* Not available on all models
Opening and Closing the Moonroof*...... 123 Operating the Switches Around the
Steering Wheel Ignition Switch................................. 124 Turn Signals ..................................... 125 Light Switches.................................. 125 Fog Lights* ...................................... 127 Daytime Running Lights ................... 127 Wipers and Washers ........................ 128 Brightness Control ........................... 130 Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* Button ........................................... 131 Driving Position Memory System* .... 132 Adjusting the Steering Wheel........... 134
Adjusting the Mirrors....................... 135 Interior Rearview Mirror ................... 135 Power Door Mirrors ......................... 136
Adjusting the Seats .......................... 137 Adjusting the Seat Positions............. 137
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items ................................................ 150 Interior Lights .................................. 150 Interior Convenience Items .............. 152
Climate Control System ................... 165 Using Automatic Climate Control .... 165
Automatic Climate Control Sensors ......170
Index
Home
97
Setting the Clock
Controls
QRG TOC
Clock
Models with audio/information screen
You can adjust the time in the clock display, using the CLOCK button with the ignition switch in ON (w.
1. Press the CLOCK button to access the clock adjustment mode screen.
2. Press to select the item you want to adjust (12/24 hour mode, hour, minute).
3. Rotate to make the adjustment.
4. Press to enter your selection. Repeat steps 2 to 4 to adjust other items.
5. To enter the selection, press and select EXIT, then press .
1Clock These indications are used to show how to operate the selector knob. Rotate to select. Press to enter.
You can also press the SETUP button to access the clock adjustment mode screen. 1. Press the SETUP button. 2. Rotate to select CLOCK ADJUST on the
screen. 3. Press , CLOCK ADJUST appears.
Models with navigation system
The clock is automatically updated through the navigation system, so the time does not need to be adjusted.
Index
Home
98
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Key Types and Functions
This vehicle comes with the following keys:
Master Keys
Use the keys to start and stop the engine, and to lock and unlock all the doors and tailgate. You can also use the remote transmitter to lock and unlock the doors and tailgate.
1Key Types and Functions
All the keys have an immobilizer system. The immobilizer system helps to protect against vehicle theft.
2 Immobilizer System P. 118
The keys contain precision electronics. Adhere to the following advice to prevent damage to the electronics:
· Do not leave the keys in direct sunlight, or in
locations with high temperature or high humidity.
· Do not drop the keys or set heavy objects on them. · Keep the keys away from liquids. · Do not take the keys apart except for replacing the
battery. If the circuits in the keys are damaged, the engine may not start, and the remote transmitter may not work.
If the keys do not work properly, have them inspected by a dealer.
Controls
QRG TOC
Continued
Index
Home
99
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuKey Types and Functions
QRG
Valet Key
Can be used to start and stop the engine, and lock and unlock driver's door.
1Valet Key
When you need to leave a key with a third party, leave the valet key.
TOC
Controls
Key Number Tag
Contains a number that you will need if you purchase a replacement key.
1Key Number Tag Keep the key number tag separate from the key in a safe place outside of your vehicle. If you wish to purchase an additional key, contact a dealer.
If you lose your key and you cannot start the engine, contact a dealer.
Index
Home
100
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Using the Remote Transmitter
Locking the doors Press the lock button.
LED
Unlock Button
Lock Button
Once: u Some exterior lights flash, all the doors and tailgate lock, and the security system sets.
Twice (within five seconds after the first push):
u A beeper sounds and verifies the security system is set.
Unlocking the doors Press the unlock button.
Once: u Some exterior lights flash twice, and the driver's door unlocks.
Twice: u The remaining doors and tailgate unlock.
1Using the Remote Transmitter If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of unlocking the vehicle with the remote transmitter, the doors will automatically relock.
Models with multi-information display
You can change the relock timer setting. 2 Customized Features P. 90
If the interior light switch is in the door activated position, the interior lights come on when you press the unlock button. No doors opened: The lights fade out after 30 seconds. Doors relocked with the remote: The lights go off immediately.
2 Interior Lights P. 150
The remote transmitter uses low-power signals, so the operating range may vary depending on the surroundings.
The remote will not lock the vehicle when a door or the tailgate is open.
If the distance at which it works varies, the battery is probably low. If the LED does not come on when you press a button, the battery is dead.
2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 424
Continued
Models with multi-information display
You can customize the door unlock mode setting. 2 Customized Features P. 90
Controls
QRG TOC
Index Home
101
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
QRG
Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key
Fully insert the key and turn it.
Lock
TOC
Unlock
1Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key When you lock the driver's door with a key, all of the other doors and tailgate lock at the same time. When unlocking, the driver's door unlocks first. Turn the key a second time within a few seconds to unlock the remaining doors and the tailgate.
Models with multi-information display
You can customize the door unlock mode setting. 2 Customized Features P. 90
Controls
Locking a Door Without Using a Key
Locking the driver's door Push the lock tab rearward a or push the master door lock switch in the lock direction b, and close the door.
1Locking a Door Without Using a Key
When you lock the driver's door, all the other doors and tailgate lock at the same time. Make sure you have the key in your hand before locking the door to prevent it from being locked in the vehicle.
Locking the passenger's doors
2
Push the lock tab rearward and close the door.
Index
Lockout prevention system The doors and the tailgate cannot be locked when the key is in the ignition switch, and any door or the tailgate is open.
Home
102
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
Using the Lock Tab
To Lock
Locking a door Pull the lock tab.
To Unlock
Lock Tab
Unlocking a door Push the lock tab in.
1Using the Lock Tab
When you lock/unlock either front door using the master door lock switch, tailgate, glass hatch, and all the other doors lock/unlock at the same time.
QRG
TOC
Controls
Using the Master Door Lock Switch
To Lock
Press the master door lock switch in as shown to lock or unlock all doors and the tailgate.
1Using the Master Door Lock Switch
When you lock/unlock the driver's door using the master door lock switch, all the other doors and the tailgate lock/unlock at the same time.
To Unlock
The front passenger's door also has the master door lock switch.
Master Door Lock Switch
Index
Home
103
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuChildproof Door Locks
QRG Childproof Door Locks
The childproof door locks prevent the rear doors from being opened from the inside regardless of the position of the lock tab.
Setting the Childproof Door Locks
Slide the lever in the rear door to the lock position, and close the door.
1Childproof Door Locks
To open the door from the inside when the childproof door lock is on, put the lock tab in the unlock position, lower the rear window, put your hand out of the window, and pull the outside door handle.
TOC
Unlock
When opening the door
Open the door using the outside door handle.
Controls
Lock
Index
Home
104
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuAuto Door Locking/Unlocking
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
Your vehicle locks all doors and unlocks the driver's door automatically when a certain condition is met.
Auto Door Locking
Drive lock mode All doors and the tailgate lock when the vehicle's speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h).
Auto Door Unlocking
Park unlock mode The driver's door unlocks when the shift lever is moved into (P with the brake pedal depressed.
1Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
Models without multi-information display
You can turn off or change to another auto door locking/unlocking setting using the master door lock switch.
2 Customizing the Auto Door Locking/ Unlocking Setting* P. 106
Models with multi-information display
You can turn off or change to another auto door locking/unlocking setting using the multi-information display.
2 Customized Features P. 90
QRG TOC
Controls
* Not available on all models
Index
Home
105
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuCustomizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting*
QRG Customizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting*
You can customize the auto door locking/unlocking setting to your liking using the master door lock switch.
List of the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Customizable Options
Auto door locking
Mode
Description
Drive Lock Mode*1 TOC Park Lock Mode
All doors and the tailgate lock when the vehicle's speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h). All doors and the tailgate lock when the shift lever is moved out of (P with the brake pedal depressed.
Off
The auto door locking is deactivated all the time.
Controls
Auto door unlocking
Mode
Description
Park Unlock Mode
Driver's door unlocks.*1
All doors and the tailgate unlock.
When the shift lever is moved into (P with the brake pedal depressed.
Ignition Switch Unlock Driver's door unlocks.
Mode
When the ignition switch is moved out of ON (w.
All doors and the tailgate unlock.
Off
The auto door unlocking is deactivated all the time.
*1: Default setting
Index
Home
106 * Not available on all models
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuCustomizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting*
QRG
Customizing Flow for Auto Door Locking Options
Steps
Drive Lock Mode*1
Park Lock Mode
Off
1
Apply the parking brake. Make sure the shift lever is in (P.
2
Turn the ignition switch to ON (w.
3
The driver's door must be closed at this stage.
4
Move the shift lever out of (P with the brake pedal depressed.
Open the driver's door. TOC
-
Controls
Press and hold the front of the master door lock switch on the driver's door for more than five seconds. Release the switch after you hear a click twice.
Press and hold the front of the master
5
door lock switch on the driver's door for more than five seconds. Release the switch
after you hear one click.
6
Turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (q within 20 seconds.
7
Move the shift lever to (P.
Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0
8
within 20 seconds.
u Customization is completed.
*1: Default setting
Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 within 20 seconds.
u Customization is completed.
-
-
Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 within 20 seconds.
u Customization is completed.
Index Home
Continued 107
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuCustomizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting*
QRG
Customizing Flow for Auto Door Unlocking Options
Ignition Switch Unlock Mode
Park Unlock Mode
Steps To unlock driver's
To unlock all doors
To unlock driver's
To unlock all doors
Off
door
and the tailgate
door*1
and the tailgate
1 TOC 2
Apply the parking brake. Make sure the shift lever is in (P. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w.
Controls
3 The driver's door must be closed at this stage.
Open the driver's door.
4
Move the shift lever out of (P with the brake pedal depressed.
-
Press and hold the rear of the master door lock switch on the driver's door for more than five seconds. You will hear a click twice.
5
6 Release the switch.
Index *1: Default setting
Home
108
Keep pressing the switch for another five seconds to hear one more click.
Release the switch.
Keep pressing the switch for another five seconds to hear one more click.
Release the switch.
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuCustomizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting*
Ignition Switch Unlock Mode
Park Unlock Mode
Steps To unlock driver's door
To unlock all doors and the tailgate
To unlock driver's door*1
To unlock all doors and the tailgate
Off
Turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (q within 20
7
seconds.
-
u Customization is completed.
8
Move the shift lever to (P.
-
Turn the ignition switch to
9
Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 within 20 seconds. u Customization is completed.
Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 within 20 seconds.
u Customization is completed.
LOCK (0 within 20 seconds.
u Customization is
completed.
*1: Default setting
Controls
QRG TOC
Index
Home
109
Opening and Closing the Tailgate
QRG Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate
Always make sure individuals and objects are clear of the tailgate before opening or 1Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate
closing it.
Models with power tailgate
Opening the tailgate · Open the tailgate all the way.
u If it is not fully opened, the tailgate may come down accidentally by its own weight.
3 WARNING
Closing a power tailgate while anyone is in the path of the tailgate can cause serious injury.
Controls
TOC · Be careful when it is windy. The wind may cause the tailgate to close.
Closing the tailgate Keep the tailgate closed while driving to:
u Avoid possible damage. u Prevent exhaust gas from leaking into the vehicle.
2 Carbon Monoxide Gas P. 65
Make sure everyone is clear before closing the tailgate.
Be careful not to hit your head on the tailgate or to put your hands between the tailgate and the cargo area when closing the tailgate.
When operating the power tailgate, make sure there is enough space around your vehicle. People near the tailgate may be seriously hurt if the tailgate hits or closes on their heads. Be especially cautious if children are around.
When you are storing or picking up luggage from the cargo area while the engine is idling, do not stand in front of the exhaust pipe. You may get burned.
Index
Do not allow any passenger in the cargo space. They may get hurt during hard braking, a sudden acceleration, or a crash.
Home
110
uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Tailgate Using the Tailgate Release Button
Opening/Closing the Tailgate Using
QRG
the Tailgate Release Button
When all the doors are unlocked, the tailgate is unlocked. Press the tailgate release button and lift open the tailgate.
Tailgate
Release
Button
TOC
Controls
To manually close the tailgate, grab the inner handle, pull the tailgate down, and push it closed from outside.
Inner Handle
Index
Home
111
uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate*
QRG Opening/Closing the Power Tailgate*
The power tailgate can be operated by pressing the power tailgate button on the remote transmitter, pressing the power tailgate button on the driver's door, or pressing the button on the tailgate.
The power tailgate can be opened when: · The tailgate and glass hatch are fully closed.
1Opening/Closing the Power Tailgate*
The power tailgate may not open or close under the following conditions:
· The vehicle is parked on a steep hill. · The vehicle is swayed in a strong wind. · The tailgate or the roof is covered with snow or ice.
Controls
· The shift lever is in (P. TOC · The key is not in the ignition switch when using the remote transmitter.
· You have changed the PTG KEYLESS OPEN MODE setting to WHEN UNLOCKED, you need to unlock the tailgate before you press the tailgate button to open it.
2 Customized Features P. 90
The power tailgate can be closed when: · The tailgate is fully open.
· The key is not in the ignition switch when using the remote transmitter.
If you close the power tailgate when all the doors are locked, the power tailgate locks automatically.
If you replace the battery or the power tailgate fuse while the tailgate is open, the power tailgate may be disabled. The power tailgate resumes once you manually close the tailgate.
Installing aftermarket components other than genuine Honda accessories on the power tailgate may prevent it from fully opening or closing.
Make sure the power tailgate is fully open before you get your luggage in and out.
Make sure the power tailgate is fully closed before you start the vehicle.
Index
Home
112 * Not available on all models
uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate*
Remote Transmitter
Power Tailgate Button
Press the power tailgate button for more than one second to operate.
To reverse direction while the power tailgate is in operation, press the button again. The beeper sounds three times and the tailgate reverses direction.
Customizing when to open the tailgate ANYTIME: The power tailgate unlocks and opens at the same time. This is the default setting.
WHEN UNLOCKED: The tailgate opens when all doors are unlocked.
Models with multi-information display 2 Customized Features P. 90
Models without multi-information display
To change the setting, do the following: 1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w. 3. Press and hold the power tailgate button in the driver' s door until you
hear a beep. 4. Turn the ignition switch to OFF (0.
u When ANYTIME is set, you hear one long beep. u When WHEN UNLOCKED is set, you hear three short beeps.
1Opening/Closing the Power Tailgate* If the power tailgate meets resistance while opening or closing, the auto reverse feature reverses the direction. Three beeps sound.
The auto reverse function stops sensing when the tailgate is almost closed to make sure that it fully closes.
Do not touch the sensors located on both sides of the tailgate. The power tailgate does not close if you touch either sensor when you are trying to close the tailgate.
Be careful not to scratch the sensors with a sharp object. If scratched, they can be damaged, and the power tailgate closing feature malfunctions.
* Not available on all models
Continued
Controls
QRG TOC
Index Home
113
uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate*
QRG
Power Tailgate Button
Power Tailgate Button
To open or close the power tailgate, press the tailgate button in the driver's door for about one second. The beeper sounds and some exterior lights flash.
To reverse direction while the power tailgate is
TOC
in operation, press the button again. The
beeper sounds three times and the tailgate
reverses direction.
Controls
Power Tailgate Close Button
Power Tailgate Close Button
Press the button on the tailgate to close the power tailgate. If you press the button again while the power tailgate is closing, it stops and reverses direction.
1Power Tailgate Close Button
If you push the power tailgate close button while the tailgate is automatically opening or closing, the power tailgate operation stops. Use caution if the tailgate stops in the middle of either operation. It may suddenly swing up or down.
Index
Home
114
* Not available on all models
uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate*
Auto-Closer
If you manually close the power tailgate, it latches automatically.
1Auto-Closer The auto-closer feature does not activate if you push the tailgate release button while the power tailgate is closing.
Do not put any force on the tailgate while the power tailgate is latching.
Keep your hands away from the tailgate when you manually close the tailgate and let it latch automatically. It is dangerous to put your hands around the tailgate as it starts to latch itself.
Power Tailgate Fail-safe Mode
The power tailgate fail-safe mode detects if there is an extra load on the tailgate (for example, it is covered with snow). If an extra load is detected, the tailgate opens completely then lowers to the close position.
1Power Tailgate Fail-safe Mode If you try to manually close the power tailgate immediately after it fully opens, the power tailgate fail-safe mode may activate.
Once the power tailgate fail-safe mode activates, wait until the power tailgate fully closes. Keep away from the power tailgate when it is in motion.
If the power tailgate fail-safe mode constantly activates, consult at a dealer.
Controls
QRG TOC
Index
Home
115
uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Glass Hatch
QRG Opening/Closing the Glass Hatch
The glass hatch can be operated by pressing the glass hatch release button* on the remote transmitter, pressing the glass hatch release button * on the driver's door, or pressing the button on the tailgate.
1Opening/Closing the Glass Hatch
The rear wiper does not operate with the glass hatch open.
Opening the glass hatch
· Open the glass hatch all the way. u If it is not fully opened, the glass hatch may come down accidentally by its own weight.
TOC · Be careful when it is windy. The wind may cause the glass hatch to close.
Controls
Closing the glass hatch · To close the glass hatch, lower it and press on the handle until it latches.
· Keep the glass hatch closed while driving to: u Avoid possible damage. u Prevent exhaust gas from leaking into the vehicle.
2 Carbon Monoxide Gas P. 65
Index
Home
116 * Not available on all models
uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Glass Hatch
QRG
Remote Transmitter*
Press the glass hatch release button for more than one second to operate.
Glass Hatch Release Button
TOC
Controls
Glass Hatch Release Button*
To open the glass hatch, press the glass hatch release button in the driver' s door or press the button on the tailgate for about one second.
u The beeper sounds and some exterior lights flash.
Glass Hatch Release Button
* Not available on all models
Index
Home
117
Security System
QRG Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system prevents a key that has not been pre-registered from starting the engine. Each key contains electronic transmitters that use electronic signals to verify the key.
Pay attention to the following when inserting the key into the ignition switch: · Do not allow objects that emit strong radio waves near the ignition switch.
· Make sure the key is not covered by or touching a metal object. TOC · Do not bring a key from another vehicle's immobilizer system near the
ignition switch.
1Immobilizer System
NOTICE Leaving the ignition key in the vehicle can result in theft or accidental movement of the vehicle. Always take the ignition key with you whenever you leave the vehicle unattended.
Do not alter the system or add other devices to it. Doing so may damage the system and make your vehicle inoperable.
Controls
Security System Alarm*
The security system alarm activates when the doors, tailgate, glass hatch, or hood is opened without the key, or remote transmitter.
1Security System Alarm*
The security alarm continues for a maximum of two minutes until the security system alarm deactivates.
When the security system alarm activates The horn sounds intermittently, and all the exterior lights flash.
To deactivate the security system alarm Unlock the vehicle using the key or remote transmitter. The system, along with the horn and flashing lights, is deactivated.
Index
Home
118 * Not available on all models
uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm*
Setting the security system alarm The security system alarm automatically sets when the following conditions have been met: · The ignition switch is in LOCK (0, and the key has been removed from the
ignition switch. · The hood and tailgate are closed. · All doors, the tailgate, and the glass hatch are locked with the key or the
remote transmitter.
When the security system alarm sets The security system alarm indicator in the instrument panel blinks. When the blinking interval changes after about 15 seconds, the security system alarm is set.
To cancel the security system alarm The security system alarm is canceled when the vehicle is unlocked using the key or remote transmitter. The security system alarm indicator goes off at the same time.
1Security System Alarm* Do not set the security system alarm when someone is in the vehicle or a window is open. The system can accidentally activate when:
· Unlocking the door with the lock tab or the master
door lock switch.
If the battery goes dead after you have set the security system alarm, the security alarm may go off once the battery is recharged or replaced. If this occurs, deactivate the security system alarm by unlocking a door using the key or remote transmitter.
Do not attempt to alter this system or add another device to it.
Controls
QRG TOC
Panic Mode
PANIC Button
The PANIC button on the remote transmitter
If you press the PANIC button for approximately one second, the following will occur for about 30 seconds:
· The horn sounds.
· Some exterior lights flash.
Canceling panic mode Press any button on the remote transmitter, or turn the ignition switch to ON (w.
* Not available on all models
Index
Home
119
Opening and Closing the Windows
Controls
QRG TOC
Index Home
Opening/Closing the Power Windows
The power windows can be opened and closed when the ignition switch is in ON (w, using the switches on the doors. The driver side switches can be used to open and close all of the windows.
The power window lock button on the driver side must be switched off (not pushed in, indicator off) to open and close the windows from anywhere other than the driver's seat.
When the power window lock button is pushed in, the indicator comes on and you can only operate the driver's window. Turn the power window lock button on when children are in the vehicle.
Opening/Closing Windows with Auto-Open/Close Function
ON
OFF Power Window Lock Button
Automatic operation To open: Push the switch down firmly. To close: Pull the switch up firmly.
Driver's Window Switch
Indicator
Front Passenger's Window Switch
The window opens or closes completely. To stop the window at any time, push or pull the switch briefly.
Manual operation To open: Push the switch down lightly.
To close: Pull the switch up lightly.
Release the switch when the window reaches the desired position.
1Opening/Closing the Power Windows
3 WARNING
Closing a power window on someone's hands or fingers can cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are away from the windows before closing them.
The power windows can be operated for up to 10 minutes after you turn the ignition switch off. Opening either front door cancels this function.
Auto Reverse If a power window senses resistance when closing automatically, it will stop closing and reverse direction.
The driver's window auto reverse function is disabled when you continuously pull up the switch.
The auto reverse function stops sensing when the window is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes.
120
uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows
QRG
Opening/Closing Windows without Auto-Open/Close Function
Close Open
To open: Push the switch down. To close: Pull the switch up.
Release the switch when the window reaches the desired position.
TOC
Controls
Opening the Windows and Moonroof* with the Remote
Transmitter
To open: Press the unlock button twice within 10 seconds and hold it down for the second time. If the windows stop midway, repeat the procedure.
Unlock Button
* Not available on all models
Continued
Index
Home
121
uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows
QRG
Opening/Closing the Windows and Moonroof* with the Key
To open: Unlock the driver's door with the key. Within 10 seconds of returning the key to the central position, turn the key in the unlock direction and hold it there.
Close TOC
Open
To close: Lock the driver's door with the key. Within 10 seconds of returning the key to the central position, turn the key in the lock direction and hold it there.
Controls
Release the key to stop the windows/ moonroof at the desired position. If you want further adjustment, repeat the same operation.
Index
Home
122 * Not available on all models
Opening and Closing the Moonroof*
Opening/Closing the Moonroof
You can only operate the moonroof when the ignition switch is in ON (w. Use the
switch in the front of the ceiling to open and close the moonroof. Automatic operation
Open
To open: Pull the switch back firmly, then release.
Tilt Close
To close: Push the switch forward firmly, then release.
The moonroof will automatically open or close all the way. To stop the moonroof midway, touch the switch briefly.
Manual operation To open: Pull the switch back, and hold it until the desired position is reached.
To close: Push the switch forward, and hold it until the desired position is reached.
Tilting the moonroof up To tilt: Push on the center of the moonroof switch.
To close: Push the switch forward firmly, then release.
1Opening/Closing the Moonroof
3 WARNING
Opening or closing the moonroof on someone's hands or fingers can cause serious injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of the moonroof before opening or closing it.
NOTICE Opening the moonroof in below freezing temperature or when it is covered with snow or ice can damage the moonroof panel or motor.
The power moonroof can be operated for up to 10 minutes after you turn the ignition switch off. Opening either front door cancels this function.
When resistance is detected, the auto reverse function causes the moonroof to change directions, then stop. Auto reverse stops sensing when the moonroof is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes. Make sure that all objects, including fingers, are clear of the moonroof. You can use the remote transmitter or the key to operate the moonroof.
2 Opening the Windows and Moonroof* with the Remote Transmitter P. 121
2 Opening/Closing the Windows and Moonroof* with the Key P. 122
* Not available on all models
Controls
QRG TOC
Index Home
123
Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel
Controls
QRG Ignition Switch
TOC
(0 LOCK: Insert and remove the key in this position.
(q ACCESSORY: Operate the audio system and other accessories in this position.
(w ON: This is the position when driving.
(e START: This position is for starting the engine. The switch returns to ON (w when you let go of the key.
1Ignition Switch
You cannot take the key out unless the shift lever is in (P.
If you open the driver's door when the key is in LOCK (0 or ACCESSORY (q, a warning buzzer will sound to remind you to take the key out. When this happens, the following messages appear on the multi-information display*:
· In LOCK (0: REMOVE KEY · In ACCESSORY (q: REMOVE KEY The buzzer will
stop when you take the key out. If the key won't turn from LOCK (0 to ACCESSORY (q, turn the key while moving the steering wheel left and right. The steering wheel will unlock, allowing the key to turn.
Index
Home
124 * Not available on all models
Turn Signals
Right Turn
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluTurn Signals
QRG The turn signals can be used when the ignition switch is in ON (w.
Left Turn
TOC
Controls
Light Switches Manual Operation
High Beams
Flashing the high beams Low Beams Turns on parking, side marker, tail, and rear license plate lights Turns on headlights, parking, side marker, tail, and rear license plate lights
Rotating the light switch turns the lights on and off, regardless of the position of the ignition switch.
High beams Push the lever forward until you hear a click.
Low beams When in high beams, pull the lever back to return to low beams.
Flashing the high beams Pull the lever back, and release it.
1Light Switches If you remove the key from the ignition switch while the lights are on, a chime sounds when the driver's door is opened.
Do not leave the lights on when the engine is off because it will cause the battery to discharge.
Continued
Index
Home
125
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches
QRG
Automatic Lighting Control
Automatic lighting control can be used when the ignition switch is in ON (w.
1Automatic Lighting Control
We recommend that you turn on the lights manually when driving at night, in a dense fog, or in dark areas such as long tunnels or parking facilities.
When you turn the light switch to AUTO, the The light sensor is in the location shown below.
headlights and other exterior lights will switch Do not cover this light sensor with anything;
on and off automatically depending on the
otherwise, the automatic lighting system may not
TOC
ambient brightness.
work properly.
u You can change the auto light sensitivity
setting.
Light Sensor
2 Customized Features P. 90
Controls
Automatic Lighting Off Feature
The headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights turn off within 15 seconds after you remove the key and close the driver's door.
u You can change the headlight auto off timer setting.
2 Customized Features P. 90
If you turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 with the headlight switch on, but do not open the door, the lights turn off after 10 minutes (three minutes, if the switch is in the AUTO position).
Index
The lights turn on again when you unlock or open the driver's door. If you unlock the door, but do not open it within 15 seconds, the lights go off. If you open the driver's door, you will hear a lights on reminder chime.
Home
126
Adjust the auto light sensitivity as follows:
Setting
MAX HIGH MID LOW MIN
The exterior lights come on when the ambient light is at
Bright
Dark
Fog Lights*
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluFog Lights*
When the low beam headlights are on, turn the fog light switch on to use the fog lights.
1Fog Lights*
When the fog lights are on, the indicator in the instrument panel will be on.
QRG
Fog Light Switch
Daytime Running Lights
The high beam headlights come on slightly dimmer than normal when the following conditions have been met: · The ignition switch is in ON (w. · The headlight switch is off, or in . · The parking brake is released. The lights remain on even if you set the parking brake. Turning off the ignition switch will turn off the daytime running lights. The high beam headlights return to the original brightness once the headlight switch is turned on.
* Not available on all models
Controls
TOC
Index Home
127
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers
QRG Wipers and Washers Front Wiper/Washer
2
TOC
3
Pull to use
washer.
4
5
Intermittent Time Adjustment Ring
Controls
MIST
2 OFF
3 INT: Low speed with intermittent 4 LO: Low speed wipe
5 HI: High speed wipe
The windshield wipers and washers can be used when the ignition switch is in ON (w.
MIST The wipers run at high speed until you release the lever.
Wiper switch (OFF, INT, LO, HI) Change the wiper switch setting according to the amount of rain.
Adjusting the delay Turn the adjustment ring to adjust the wiper delay.
Long delay
Short delay
1Wipers and Washers
NOTICE Do not use the wipers when the windshield is dry. The windshield will get scratched, or the rubber blades will get damaged.
NOTICE In cold weather, the blades may freeze to the windshield, becoming stuck. Operating the wipers in this condition may damage the wipers. Use the defroster to warm the windshield, then turn the wipers on.
Turn the washers off if no washer fluid comes out. The pump may get damaged.
If the vehicle speeds up while the wipers are operating intermittently, the length of the wipe interval shortens. When the vehicle starts moving, the wipers make a single sweep. When the vehicle speeds up, the wiper operation's shortest delay setting ( ) and the LO setting become the same.
Index
Home
128
Washer Sprays while you pull the lever toward you. When you release the lever, the wipers make two or three more sweeps before stopping.
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers
Rear Wiper/Washer
4 2
3
4
INT: Intermittent 2 ON: Continuous wipe 3 OFF 4 Washer
The rear wiper and washer can be used when the ignition switch is in ON (w.
Wiper switch (OFF, INT, ON) Change the wiper switch setting according to the amount of rain.
Washer ( ) Sprays while you rotate the switch to this position. Hold it to activate the wiper and to spray the washer. Once released, it stops operating after a few more sweeps.
1Wipers and Washers If the wiper stops operating due to any obstacle such as the build-up of snow, park the vehicle in a safe place.
Rotate the wiper switch to OFF, and turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (q or LOCK (0, then remove the obstacle.
The wiper motor is equipped with a breaker that may stop motor operation temporarily to prevent an overload. Wiper operation will return to normal within a few minutes, once the circuit has returned to normal.
Controls
QRG TOC
Operating in reverse When you shift the transmission to (R with the front wiper activated, the rear wiper operates automatically as follows even if its switch is off.
Front Wiper Position
Rear Wiper Operation
INT (Intermittent)
Intermittent
LO (Low speed wipe) HI (High speed wipe)
Continuous
Index
Home
129
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluBrightness Control
Controls
QRG Brightness Control
Control Knob
TOC On multi-information display
When the ignition switch is in ON (w, you can use the brightness control knob to adjust instrument panel brightness. Brighten: Turn the knob to the right.
Dim: Turn the knob to the left.
You will hear a beep when the brightness reaches minimum or maximum. The information display*/multi-information display* will return to its original state several seconds after you adjust the brightness.
Brightness level indicator The brightness level is shown on the information display*/multi-information display* while you are adjusting it.
1Brightness Control
Instrument panel brightness varies, depending on whether the exterior lights are on or off. The instrument panel dims to reduce glare when they are on.
Pressing the (Select/Reset) knob or the
/
(information) button* switches the display.
If you turn the knob to the right until the brightness display is up to max, the beeper sounds. This cancels the reduced instrument panel brightness when the exterior lights are on.
On information display
Index
Home
130 * Not available on all models
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluRear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* Button
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* Button
Press the rear defogger and heated door mirror button to defog the rear window and mirrors when the ignition switch is in ON (w.
The rear defogger and heated door mirrors automatically switch off after 15 minutes.
1Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* Button
NOTICE When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be careful not to damage the heating wires. It is critical to wipe the window from side to side along the defogger heating wires.
This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off when the window has been defogged. Also, do not use the system for a long period when the engine is idling. This may weaken the battery, making it difficult to start the engine.
QRG TOC
Controls
* Not available on all models
Index
Home
131
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System*
QRG Driving Position Memory System*
You can store two driver's seat and door mirror positions with the driving position memory system.
When you unlock and open the driver's door with a remote transmitter, the seat and door mirrors adjust automatically to one of the two preset positions.
1Driving Position Memory System*
Using the multi-information display, you can disable the automatic seat adjustment function.
2 Customized Features P. 90
The multi-information display shows you which remote transmitter you used to unlock the vehicle when you enter. TOC · Driver 1 transmitter is linked to memory button 1.
The customize setting is also stored by the Driver 1 and 2 transmitters. What setting is recalled next time depends on which transmitter you use to unlock and open the driver's door.
· Driver 2 transmitter is linked to memory button 2.
Driver 1
Driver 2
Controls
Index
Home
132 * Not available on all models
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System*
Storing a Position in Memory
Memory Button 1 Memory Button 2
SET Button
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w. Adjust the driver's seat and the door mirrors to the desired position.
2. Press the SET button. u You will hear a beep, and the memory button indicator light will blink.
3. Press and hold memory button (1 or (2 within five seconds of pressing the SET button. u Once the seat and the door mirror positions have been memorized, the indicator light on the button you pressed stays on.
1Storing a Position in Memory
After you press the SET button, the storing operation will be canceled when:
· You do not press the memory button within five
seconds.
· You readjust the seat position before the double-
beep.
· You readjust the door mirrors. · You turn the ignition switch to any position except
ON (w.
Recalling the Stored Position
Memory Button 1
1. Move the shift lever to (P. 2. Apply the parking brake.
Memory Button 2
3. Press a memory button ((1 or (2). u You will hear a beep, and the indicator light will blink.
SET Button
The seat and the door mirrors will automatically move to the memorized positions. When they have finished moving, you will hear a beep, and the indicator light stays on.
1Recalling the Stored Position
The seat and the door mirrors will stop moving if you:
· Press the SET button, or a memory button ((1 or
(2 ).
· Adjust the seat position. · Adjust the door mirrors. · Shift into any position except (P.
* Not available on all models
Controls
QRG TOC
Index Home
133
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAdjusting the Steering Wheel
QRG Adjusting the Steering Wheel
The steering wheel height and distance from your body can be adjusted so that you can comfortably grip the steering wheel in an appropriate driving posture.
1. Push the steering wheel adjustment lever down. u The steering wheel adjustment lever is under the steering column.
1Adjusting the Steering Wheel
3 WARNING
Adjusting the steering wheel position while driving may cause you to lose control of the vehicle and be seriously injured in a crash.
2. Move the steering wheel up or down, and Adjust the steering wheel only when the
TOC
in or out.
vehicle is stopped.
Lever
u Make sure you can see the instrument panel gauges and indicators.
Make any steering wheel adjustments before you
Controls
3. Pull the steering wheel adjustment lever up start driving.
to lock the steering wheel in position.
u After adjusting the position, make sure
you have securely locked the steering
wheel in place by trying to move it up,
down, in, and out.
Index
Home
134
Adjusting the Mirrors
Interior Rearview Mirror
QRG
Adjust the angle of the rearview mirror when you are sitting in the correct driving position.
1Adjusting the Mirrors
Keep the inside and outside mirrors clean and adjusted for best visibility.
Rearview Mirror with Day and Night Positions*
Adjust the mirrors before you start driving.
Tab
Flip the tab to switch the position.
Up
The night position will help to reduce the glare
2 Adjusting the Seat Positions P. 137
from headlights behind you when driving
after dark.
TOC
Controls
Daytime Position
Down Night Position
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror*
When driving after dark, the automatic dimming rearview mirror always reduces the glare from headlights behind you.
1Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror*
The auto dimming function cancels when the shift position is in (R.
Sensor * Not available on all models
Index
Home
135
uuAdjusting the MirrorsuPower Door Mirrors
QRG Power Door Mirrors
Selector
Adjustment
Switch
Switch
TOC
You can adjust the door mirrors when the ignition switch is in ON (w.
Mirror position adjustment L/R selector switch: Select the left or right mirror. After adjusting the mirror, return the switch to the center position.
Mirror position adjustment switch: Press the switch left, right, up, or down to move the mirror.
Controls
Reverse Tilt Door Mirror*
Selector Switch
If activated, either side door mirror automatically tilts downward when you put the shift lever in (R; this improves close-in visibility on the selected side of the vehicle when reversing. The mirror automatically returns to its original position when you shift out of (R.
To activate this feature, turn the ignition switch to ON (w and slide the selector switch to the left or right side.
Index
Home
136 * Not available on all models
Adjusting the Seats
Adjusting the Seat Positions
Allow sufficient space.
Move back.
Adjust the driver's seat as far back as possible while allowing you to maintain full control of the vehicle. You should be able to sit upright, well back in the seat and be able to adequately press the pedals without leaning forward, and grip the steering wheel comfortably. The passenger's seat should be adjusted in a similar manner, so that it is as far back from the front airbag in the dashboard as possible.
1Adjusting the Seats
3 WARNING
Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious injury or death if the front airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the front airbags as possible while maintaining control of the vehicle.
Adjusting the front power seat(s)*
Horizontal Position Adjustment
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that drivers allow at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the steering wheel and the chest.
Always make seat adjustments before driving.
Controls
QRG TOC
Height Adjustment (Driver's seat only)
* Not available on all models
Lumbar Support Adjustment (Driver's seat only) Seat-back Angle Adjustment Driver's seat is shown.
Continued
Index
Home
137
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
QRG
Adjusting the front manual seat(s)*
Height Adjustment (Driver side only) Pull up or push down the lever to raise or lower the seat.
TOC
1Adjusting the front manual seat(s)*
Once a seat is adjusted correctly, rock it back and forth to make sure it is locked in position.
Controls
Horizontal Position Adjustment Pull up on the bar to move the seat, then release the bar.
Driver's seat is shown.
Seat-back Angle Adjustment Pull up the lever to change the angle.
Index
Home
138 * Not available on all models
Adjusting the second row seats
Horizontal Position Adjustment Pull up on the bar to move the seat, then release the bar.
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
1Adjusting the second row seats
Once a seat is adjusted correctly, rock it back and forth to make sure it is locked in position.
QRG
TOC
Controls
Continued
Index
Home
139
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
Controls
QRG TOC
Adjusting the Seat-Backs
Adjust the driver's seat-back to a comfortable, upright position, leaving ample space between your chest and the airbag cover in the center of the steering wheel.
The front seat passenger should also adjust their seat-back to a comfortable, upright position.
Reclining a seat-back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the occupant's chest reduces the protective capability of the belt. It also increases the chance of sliding under the belt in a crash and being seriously injured. The farther a seat-back is reclined, the greater the risk of injury.
1Adjusting the Seat-Backs
3 WARNING
Reclining the seat-back too far can result in serious injury or death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an upright position, and sit well back in the seat.
Do not put a cushion, or other object, between the seat-back and your back.
Doing so may interfere with proper seat belt or airbag operation.
If you cannot get far enough away from the steering wheel and still reach the controls, we recommend that you investigate whether some type of adaptive equipment may help.
Index
Home
140
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
QRG
Adjusting the Head Restraints
1Adjusting the Head Restraints
Position head in the center of the head restraint.
Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints
3 WARNING
in all seating positions.
Improperly positioning head restraints
Head restraints are most effective for protection against whiplash and other rear-
reduces their effectiveness and increases the likelihood of serious injury in a crash.
impact crash injuries when the center of the
Make sure head restraints are in place and
back of the occupant's head rests against the positioned properly before driving.
TOC
center of the restraint. The tops of the
occupant's ears should be level with the
center height of the restraint.
Controls
Continued
Index
Home
141
Controls
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions QRG
Adjusting the front, second row outer, and third row outer head restraint positions To raise the head restraint: Pull it upward. To lower the head restraint: Push it down while pressing the release button.
TOC
Index Home
142
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
QRG
Changing the Second Row/Third Row Center Seat Head
Restraint Positions
A passenger sitting in the second row/third
row center seating position should adjust
the height of their head restraint to an
appropriate position before the vehicle
begins moving.
To raise the head restraint:
TOC
Pull it upward.
Controls
To lower the head restraint: Push it down while pressing the release button.
Long side
Third row center seat
Push short side of the cap and pry up on long side of the cap. Push the release buttons sideways, and push the restraint down.
Short side
Continued
Index
Home
143
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
QRG
Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints
1Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints
Head restraints can be removed for cleaning or repair.
3 WARNING
To remove a head restraint: Pull the restraint up as far as it will go. Then push the release button, and pull the restraint up and out.
Failure to reinstall, or correctly reinstall, the head restraints can result in severe injury during a crash.
TOC To reinstall a head restraint: Insert the legs back in place, then adjust the head restraint to an appropriate height while pressing the release button. Pull up on the restraint to make sure it is locked in position.
Always replace the head restraints before driving.
Controls
Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and head restraints, and put on their seat belts, it is very important that they continue to sit upright, well back in their seats, with their feet on the floor, until the vehicle is safely parked and the engine is off.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury during a crash. For example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased.
1Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
3 WARNING
Sitting improperly or out of position can result in serious injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in the seat, with your feet on the floor.
Index
In addition, an occupant who is out of position in the front seat can be seriously or fatally injured in a crash by striking interior parts of the vehicle or being struck by an inflating front airbag.
Home
144
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
Active Head Restraints
The driver's and front passenger's seats have active head restraints. In a rear impact, an occupant properly secured by a seat belt will be pushed against the seat-back and the head restraint will move forward. This reduces the distance between the restraint and the occupant's head, which helps reduce the likelihood of whiplash and injuries to the neck and upper spine.
1Active Head Restraints
In order for the active head restraints to operate properly:
· Do not hang any items on the head restraints, or
from the restraint legs.
· Do not place any objects between an occupant and
the seat-back.
· Install each restraint in its proper location.
After a collision, the activated restraint should return to its normal position. If the restraint does not return to its normal position, or in the event of a severe collision, have the vehicle inspected by a dealer.
QRG TOC
Controls
Index
Home
145
uuAdjusting the SeatsuRear Seats
Controls
QRG TOC
Rear Seats
Folding Down the Second Row Seats
The second row seats can fold down separately to allow for additional storage space.
To fold down the seat 1. Store the center seat belt first. Insert the latch plate into the slot on the side of the
anchor buckle. 2. Retract the seat belt into the holder on the ceiling.
2 Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor P. 34
3. Lower the center head restraint to its lowest position. Put the armrest back into the seat-back. 4. Pull the release lever.
1Folding Down the Second Row Seats Make sure all items in the cargo area or items extending to the rear seats are properly secured. Loose items can fly forward if you have to brake hard.
Remove any items from the rear seat cushion and floor before you fold down the rear seat.
The front seat(s) must be far enough forward so they do not interfere with the second seats as they fold down.
Index
Home
146
To return the seat to the original position
Pull the seat-back up in the upright position.
1To return the seat to the original position
Make sure the seat-back, head restraints and seat cushion are securely latched back into place before driving.
uuAdjusting the SeatsuRear Seats
Folding Down the Third Row Seats
The third row seats can fold down separately to allow for additional storage space.
To fold down the seat 1. Store the center seat belt first. Insert the latch plate into the slot on the side of the
anchor buckle. 2. Retract the seat belt into the holder on the ceiling and side panel.
2 Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor P. 34
3. Lower the center head restraint to its lowest position. Put the armrest back into the seat-back. 4. Pull the release lever.
1Folding Down the Third Row Seats Make sure all items in the cargo area or items extending to the rear seats are properly secured. Loose items can fly forward if you have to brake hard.
Remove any items from the rear seat cushion and floor before you fold down the rear seat.
When you fold down one side of the rear seats and use the non-recessed part of the cargo area, make sure to secure the cargo. Loose items can fly forward and cause injury if you have to brake hard.
The second seat(s) must be far enough forward so they do not interfere with the third seats as they fold down.
Controls
QRG TOC
To return the seat to the original position
Pull the seat-back up in the upright position.
1To return the seat to the original position
Make sure the seat-back, head restraints and seat cushion are securely latched back into place before driving.
Continued
Index
Home
147
uuAdjusting the SeatsuRear Seats
QRG
Third Row Seat Access
Pull up on the seat-back lever.
Slide the whole seat forward.
TOC Lever
1Third Row Seat Access
When you enter the third row seat, be careful not to trip over the second row seat belt. If necessary, move the seat forward after tilting the seat-back forward.
Controls
Index
Home
148
Armrest Using the Front Seat Armrest
The console lid can be used as an armrest.
Using the Second Row Seat Armrest
Pull down the armrest in the center seat-back.
uuAdjusting the SeatsuArmrest QRG
TOC
Controls
Index
Home
149
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items
Controls
QRG TOC
Interior Lights Interior Light Switches
Front ON
Door Activated Position
OFF
Cargo Area ON
OFF Door Activated Position
ON The interior lights come on regardless of whether the doors are open or closed.
Door activated The interior lights come on in the following situations: · When any of the doors are opened.
· You unlock the driver's door.
· You remove the key from the ignition switch.
Only the cargo area light comes on when the tailgate is opened.
OFF The interior lights remain off regardless of whether the doors are open or closed.
1Interior Light Switches
In the door activated position, the interior lights fade out and go off about 30 seconds after the doors are closed. The lights go off after 30 seconds in the following situations:
· When you unlock the driver's door but do not open
it.
· When you remove the key from the ignition switch
but do not open a door.
The interior lights go off immediately in the following situations:
· When you lock the driver's door. · When you close the driver's door with the key in
the ignition switch.
· When you turn the ignition switch to ON (w.
If you leave any of the doors open without the key in the ignition switch, the interior lights go off after about 15 minutes.
Models with multi-information display
You can change the interior lights dimming time. 2 Customized Features P. 90
Index
Home
150
Map Lights
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Lights
Front The map lights can be turned on and off by pressing the lenses.
1Map Lights
When the front interior light switch is in the door activated position and any door is open, the map light will not go off when you press the lens.
QRG
Controls
TOC
Second and third row The map lights can be turned on and off by pressing the lenses when the front interior light switch is in the door activated position.
Index
Home
151
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
QRG Interior Convenience Items Glove Box
Pull the handle to open the glove box. You can lock the glove box with the master key.
To Lock Glove Box TOC
1Glove Box
3 WARNING
An open glove box can cause serious injury to your passenger in a crash, even if the passenger is wearing the seat belt.
Always keep the glove box closed while driving.
Controls
Console Compartment
Pull the handle to open the console compartment.
Index
Home
152
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items QRG
Slide the lid using the release knob to open or close the console compartment.
TOC
Under-floor Storage Area
Hook the strap to the seat back to use it.
Controls
Continued
Index
Home
153
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
QRG
Storage Compartment
Pull the lever and lift the lid to open the compartment.
TOC
Controls
Beverage Holders
Front seat beverage holders Are located in the console between the front seats.
1Beverage Holders
NOTICE Spilled liquids can damage the upholstery, carpeting, and electrical components in the interior.
Be careful when you are using the beverage holders. Hot liquid can scald you.
Index
Home
154
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
QRG
Second row seat beverage holders Fold the armrest down to use the rear seat beverage holders.
TOC
Third row seat beverage holders
Controls
Continued
Index
Home
155
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
QRG TOC
Accessory Power Sockets
The accessory power sockets can be used when the ignition switch is in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w.
Accessory power socket (instrument panel)
Open the cover to use it.
1Accessory Power Sockets
NOTICE Do not insert an automotive type cigarette lighter element. This can overheat the power socket.
The accessory power socket is designed to supply power for 12 volt DC accessories that are rated 120 watts or less (10 amps).
To prevent battery drain, only use the power socket with the engine running.
Controls
Accessory power socket (console compartment)
Open the console lid and the cover to use it.
When each socket is being used simultaneously, the combined power rating of the accessories should not exceed 120 watts (10 amps).
Index
Home
156
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
QRG
Accessory power socket (back of the console compartment)
Open the cover to use it.
TOC
Accessory power socket (cargo area) Open the cover to use it.
Controls
Continued
Index
Home
157
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
QRG TOC
AC Power Outlet*
The AC power outlet can be used when the engine is running.
Open the cover to use it. Plug in the appliance slightly, turn it 90° clockwise, then push it all the way.
1AC Power Outlet*
NOTICE Do not use the AC power outlet for electric appliances that require high initial peak wattage, such as cathode-ray tube type televisions, refrigerators, electric pumps, etc. It is not suitable for devices that process precise data, such as medical equipment, and that require an extremely stable power supply, such as microcomputer-controlled electric blankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.
Controls
The AC power outlet is designed to supply power for up to 115 volt appliances that are rated 150 watts or less.
Index
Home
158 * Not available on all models
Coat Hooks
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
There are coat hooks near the third row seats.
1Coat Hooks
The coat hooks are not designed for large or heavy items.
QRG
Cargo Net*
* Not available on all models
TOC
Controls
Use the cargo net to store small and light items.
1Cargo Net*
3 WARNING
Do not use this cargo net if the third row seats are folded down.
Objects placed on the cargo net could be thrown forward during a crash or sudden stop and hurt someone.
NOTICE To prevent damage, do not place more than 22 lbs (10 kg) on this cargo net. Make sure to use the cargo net securely hooked.
Index
Continued
Home
159
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
QRG
Cargo Hooks
Use the floor cargo hooks to secure luggage in the cargo area.
1Cargo Hooks
NOTICE Do not hang a large object or an object. Hanging heavy or large objects may damage the hooks.
TOC
Hooks
Controls
Grocery Hook
There is a hook on the side of the cargo area.
Index
Home
160
Hook
Sunglasses Holder
Push
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
To open the sunglasses holder, push and release the indent. To close, push it again until it latches.
1Sunglasses Holder
Keep the holder closed while driving except when accessing stored items.
QRG
You can store eyeglasses and other small items in this holder.
TOC
Controls
Conversation mirror* The sunglasses holder comes with a mirror. Open the sunglasses holder fully, then push it back to the first detent.
You can use the mirror to view the rear seats.
* Not available on all models
Continued
Index
Home
161
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls
QRG
Seat Heaters*
TOC
The ignition switch must be in ON (w to use the seat heaters. The HI setting heats the seats faster than the LO setting.
1Seat Heaters*
3 WARNING
Heat induced burns are possible when using seat heaters.
There is no heater in the passenger's seatback due to the side airbag cutoff system.
The appropriate indicator will be on while the seat heater is on. Each time you press the switch, the mode changes to HI, LO and OFF.
Persons with a diminished ability to sense temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes, lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or with sensitive skin should not use seat heaters.
Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.
In the LO setting, the heater runs continuously and does not automatically turn off.
Index
Home
162 * Not available on all models
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
QRG
Second row seat heaters*
The outer second row seat cushions and seat-
backs are equipped with seat heaters. Turning
the switch on the driver side warms the outer
seat behind the driver's seat. The passenger
side switch warms the outer seat behind the
front passenger seat.
u Press the right side of the switch, HI, to
rapidly heat up the seat.
TOC
Controls
When a comfortable temperature is
reached, select LO to keep the seat
warm.
* Not available on all models
Continued
Index
Home
163
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
QRG
Integrated Sunshades*
Hooks
Pull the tab and roll up the sunshade all the way. Use the hooks to hang it.
1Integrated Sunshades*
Use the sunshades only when the windows are fully closed. Using the shade while a window is open can unhook and blow off the shade, hitting and hurting anyone sitting near the window.
TOC Tab
Controls
Index
Home
164 * Not available on all models
Climate Control System
Using Automatic Climate Control
The automatic climate control system maintains the interior temperature you select. The system also selects the proper mix of heated or cooled air that will raise or lower the interior temperature to your preference as quickly as possible.
Dashboard vents Dashboard and Floor vents floor vents
AUTO Button
Floor and defroster vents
(Recirculation) Button
1Using Automatic Climate Control
If any buttons are pressed while using the climate control system in AUTO, the function of the button that was pressed will take priority. The AUTO indicator will go off, but functions unrelated to the button that was pressed will be controlled automatically.
To prevent cold air from blowing in from outside, the fan may not start immediately when the AUTO button is pressed.
Driver's Side Temperature Control Dial
Passenger's Side Temperature Control Dial
A/C (Air Conditioning) Button
/ (Fan Control) Bar
Use the system when the engine is running. 1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the interior temperature using the driver's side or passenger's side control dial.
3. Press the
button to cancel.
If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down more rapidly by partially opening the windows, turning the system on AUTO, and setting the temperature to low. Change the fresh mode to recirculation mode until the temperature cools down.
When you set the temperature to the lower or upper limit, Lo or Hi is displayed.
Pressing the
button switches the climate
control system between on and off. When turned on,
the system returns to your last selection.
Switching between the recirculation and fresh air modes Press the button and switch the mode depending on environmental conditions. Recirculation Mode (indicator on): Recirculates air from the vehicle's interior through the system. Fresh Air Mode (indicator off): Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system in fresh air mode in normal situations.
Continued
Controls
QRG TOC
Index Home
165
uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control
QRG TOC
Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
Pressing the button turns the air conditioning system on and automatically switches the system to fresh air mode.
Pressing the button again to turn off, the system returns to the previous settings.
1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows For your safety, make sure you have a clear view through all the windows before driving.
Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower limit.
When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the windshield may fog up.
If the side windows fog up, adjust the vents so that the air hits the side windows.
Controls
To rapidly defrost the windows 1. Press the
2. Press the
button. button.
1To rapidly defrost the windows After defrosting the windows, switch over to fresh air mode.
If you keep the system in recirculation mode, the windows may fog up from humidity. This impedes visibility.
Index
Home
166
uuClimate Control SystemuSynchronized Mode
Synchronized Mode
1Synchronized Mode When you press the button, the system changes to synchronized mode.
When the system is in tri-zone mode, the driver side temperature, the passenger side temperature, and the rear passenger compartment (if it is on) can be set separately.
You can set the temperature synchronously for the driver side, the passenger side, and the rear passenger compartment in synchronized mode.
1. Press the SYNC button. u The system will switch to synchronized mode.
2. Adjust the temperature using driver's side temperature control dial.
Press the SYNC button to return to dual mode.
Controls
QRG TOC
Index
Home
167
uuClimate Control SystemuRear Climate Control System
QRG Rear Climate Control System Using the Rear Climate Control System From the Front Panel 1Rear Climate Control System
AUTO LOCK appears on the rear control panel while the rear lock is on.
If the rear lock is on while in SYNC mode, the rear control panel is disabled. AUTO LOCK SYNC appears on the rear control panel.
TOC
Rear Temperature Control Button
Rear Temperature Control Button
Controls
Index Home
Use the system when the engine is running. 1. Press the REARLOCK button.
u LOCK appears on the front control panel. The rear system changes to AUTO mode.
2. The system automatically adjusts the fan speed and airflow levels to maintain the set rear temperature. u Change the temperature if necessary.
3. To turn off the rear climate control system, press and hold the REARLOCK button for a few seconds.
168
uuClimate Control SystemuRear Climate Control System
QRG
Using the Rear Climate Control System From the Rear Panel
1Using the Rear Climate Control System From the Rear Panel
When the REARLOCK button on the front control panel is off, the temperature of the rear passenger compartment can be controlled independently.
AUTO Button
Fan Control Bar TOC
Controls
Rear Temperature Control Bar
OFF Button MODE Button
Rear floor vents
Rear ceiling vents and floor vents
Rear ceiling vents
Use the system when the engine is running. 1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the interior temperature using the rear temperature control bar.
3. To turn off the rear climate control system, press OFF button repeatedly until the system shuts off.
Index
Home
169
uuClimate Control SystemuAutomatic Climate Control Sensors
QRG Automatic Climate Control Sensors
Sunlight Sensor
The automatic climate control system is equipped with a sunlight sensor, an interior temperature and humidity sensor. Do not cover or spill any liquid on them.
TOC
Temperature and Humidity Sensor
Controls
Index
Home
170
QRG
Features
This chapter describes how to operate technology features.
Audio System About Your Audio System................ 172 USB Adapter Cable .......................... 173 Auxiliary Input Jack .......................... 173 Audio System Theft Protection ......... 174
Models without navigation system
Audio System Basic Operation ........ 175 Audio/Information Screen* .............. 176 Audio Remote Controls.................... 184 Adjusting the Sound ........................ 185 Playing the AM/FM Radio ................. 186 Playing the XM® Radio* ................... 190 Playing a CD .................................... 193
* Not available on all models
Playing an iPod®............................... 203 Playing a USB Flash Drive ................. 207 Playing Bluetooth® Audio................. 211
Models with navigation system
Audio System Basic Operation ........ 216 Audio Remote Controls.................... 217 Adjusting the Sound ........................ 218 Playing the AM/FM Radio................. 219 Playing the XM® Radio ..................... 223 Playing a CD .................................... 226 Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio .... 230 Playing an iPod®............................... 240
Rear Entertainment System* ........... 251
Audio Error Messages ...................... 266 General Information on the Audio
System ............................................. 272 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver*.. 276
Models without navigation system
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® Using HFL ........................................ 278 HFL Menus ...................................... 280
Models with navigation system
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® Using HFL ........................................ 301 HFL Menus ...................................... 303
Compass* .......................................... 320
Index
Home
171
Audio System
QRG About Your Audio System
Models with navigation system
See the Navigation System Manual for operation of the voice commands.
The audio system features AM/FM radio and the XM® Radio* service. It can also play audio CDs, WMA/MP3/AAC files, iPod®, iPhone®, USB flash drives, and Bluetooth® devices.
1About Your Audio System
XM® Radio is available on a subscription basis only. For more information on XM® Radio, contact a dealer.
2 General Information on the Audio System P. 272
You can operate the audio system from the buttons and switches on the panel, or the remote controls on the steering wheel.
XM® Radio is available in the United States and Canada, except Hawaii, Alaska, and Puerto Rico.
XM® is a registered trademark of Sirius XM Radio, Inc.
Features
TOC Remote Control
iPod®
USB Flash Drive
Video CDs, DVDs, and 3-inch (8-cm) mini CDs are not supported.
iPod® and iPhone® are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc.
State or local laws may prohibit the operation of handheld electronic devices while operating a vehicle.
Index
Home
172 * Not available on all models
uuAudio SystemuUSB Adapter Cable
USB Adapter Cable
1. Unclip the USB connector and loosen the adapter cable.
2. Install the iPod® dock connector or the USB flash drive to the USB connector.
Auxiliary Input Jack
Use the jack to connect standard audio devices. 1. Open the AUX cover.
2. Connect a standard audio device to the input jack using a 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) stereo miniplug. u The audio system automatically switches to the AUX mode.
1USB Adapter Cable
· Do not leave the iPod® or USB flash drive in the
vehicle. Direct sunlight and high temperatures may damage it.
· Do not use an extension cable with the USB
adapter cable.
· Do not connect the iPod® or USB flash drive using a
hub.
· Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard
disk drive, as the device or your files may be damaged.
· We recommend backing up your data before using
the device in your vehicle.
· Displayed messages may vary depending on the
device model and software version.
If the audio system does not recognize the iPod®, try reconnecting it a few times or reboot the device. To reboot, follow the manufacturer's instructions provided with the iPod® or visit www.apple.com/ ipod.
1Auxiliary Input Jack
To switch the mode, press any of the audio mode buttons. You can return to the AUX mode by pressing the AUX button.
You cannot use the auxiliary input jack if you replace the audio system.
State or local laws may limit the circumstances in which you can launch or control your attached audio device.
Features
QRG
TOC
Index Home
173
uuAudio SystemuAudio System Theft Protection
QRG Audio System Theft Protection
Models without navigation system
The audio system is disabled when it is disconnected from the power source, such as when the battery is disconnected or goes dead.
1Audio System Theft Protection
We recommend that you write down the serial number in this owner's manual.
Reactivating the audio system 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w, and turn on the audio system.
u If you turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (q, you will be requested to enter the audio security code. See step 3.
Except LX models
2. Press and hold the power button again for more than two seconds.
TOC
u The audio system is reactivated when the system's control unit recognizes that
the system is in your vehicle.
If the control unit fails to recognize, ENTER CODE appears on the audio/
information screen.
Features
3. Enter the audio security code using the preset buttons. If you enter an incorrect digit, continue to the last digit, then try again. If you do not enter the code correctly after 10 tries, leave the system for one hour before trying again, or visit a dealer to have the system reset.
You can find out about your serial number and security code from a dealer.
U.S. models
You can register the security code at Owner Link (owners.honda.com.), and find information on how to retrieve the serial number and obtain the code at radio-navicode.honda.com.
Models with navigation system
See the Navigation System Manual for details.
Index
Home
174
Audio System Basic Operation
Models without navigation system
To use the audio system function, the ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w.
SETUP Use the selector knob or SETUP button to Button access some audio functions.
1Audio System Basic Operation These indications are used to show how to operate the selector knob. Rotate to select. Press to enter.
QRG
Press to switch between the normal and extended display for some functions.
RETURN Button
Selector Knob
Selector knob: Rotate left or right to scroll through the available choices. Press to set your selection.
SETUP button: Press to select any mode such as the Auto Select, Sound Settings, Play Mode, Resume/Pause, or compass.
RETURN button: Press to go back to the previous display.
button: Press to change the audio/ information screen brightness. The brightness can be set differently for the day time and night time.
Press once for the daytime mode. Press twice for the nighttime mode. Adjust the brightness using .
Features
TOC
Index Home
175
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen*
QRG Audio/Information Screen*
Displays audio status, trip computer and wallpaper, and allows you to go to various setup options.
Switching the Display
Press DISPLAY button. Rotate and select the mode from the four display modes. Press .
1Switching the Display These indications are used to show how to operate the selector knob. Rotate to select. Press to enter.
TOC
Features
DISPLAY Button
Index
Home
176 * Not available on all models
Selector Knob
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen*
Audio Display
Shows the current audio information.
2 Audio System Basic Operation P. 175
Trip Computer
Shows the instant fuel economy, average fuel economy, distance (trip meter), average speed, elapsed time, and range.
2 Instant Fuel Economy P. 82 2 Trip Meter P. 82 2 Range P. 82
Average speed Shows the average speed in mph (U.S.) or km/h (Canada).
Elapsed time Shows the time during one drive cycle.
1Trip Computer
You can reset the trip computer. 2 Trip Computer P. 88
Wallpaper
Shows a clock screen or an image you import.
2 Wallpaper Setup P. 179
Minimum Display
Minimizes the display by only showing the compass, audio status, and clock on the upper part of the display.
* Not available on all models
Continued
Features
QRG
TOC
Index Home
177
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen*
QRG
Setting Options
1. Press SETUP button.
2. Rotate and select the setup option you want to change. Press .
Features
TOC
DVD Setup*
2 DVD setup from the front panel P. 254
Phone Setup
2 Phone Setup P. 283 2 To Create Phone Name/PIN P. 310 2 Automatic Answering P. 289 2 Automatic Transferring P. 289 2 To Clear the System P. 312 2 Speed Dial P. 313
Index
Home
178 * Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen*
Wallpaper Setup
You can change, store, delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.
Models with navigation system
See the navigation system manual for how to change the wallpaper.
Importing pictures from USB You can import up to five images, one at a time, for wallpaper from USB flash drive. Select Import picture from USB from setup menu and properly connect a USB flash drive to store an image.
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the adapter cable.
2 USB Adapter Cable P. 173
1Wallpaper Setup
· When importing wallpaper files, the image must be
in the USB flash drive's root directory. Images in a folder cannot be imported.
· The file format of the image that can be imported
is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).
· The maximum image size is 1,024 x 768 pixels.
Smaller images are displayed in the middle of the screen with the extra area appearing in black.
2. Press the SETUP button.
3. Rotate to select Wallpaper Setup, then press .
4. Rotate to select Import picture from USB, then press .
If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures, No Files will appear.
5. Rotate to select a desired picture, then press . u Loading Picture will appear on the display.
Features
QRG TOC
* Not available on all models
Continued
Index
Home
179
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen*
QRG 6. The preview of the imported data is displayed.
7. Rotate to select OK, then press . u The imported list number and the confirmation message will appear. Then the display will return to the import wallpaper list.
Features
Choose wallpaper TOC 1. Rotate to select Choose Wallpaper on the wallpaper setup menu, then
press . u The screen will change to the wallpaper list.
2. Rotate to select desired wallpaper and press .
3. Your selection will be indicated by the filled in circle. u You can also select Default Wallpaper (Honda logo) or Clock on the list.
Index
Delete wallpaper 1. Rotate to select Delete Picture from mem on the wallpaper setup menu,
then press . u The screen will change to the delete wallpaper list.
2. Rotate to select wallpaper that you want to delete and press . u The confirmation message will appear.
3. Rotate to select Yes, then press to delete completely.
Home
180 * Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen*
QRG
Trip Computer Reset
You can reset all data on the trip computer. 1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Rotate to select Trip Computer Reset, then press .
3. Rotate to Trip A or Trip B, then press . u The confirmation message will appear.
4. Rotate to select Yes, then press to reset completely.
TOC
Features
Continued
Index
Home
181
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen*
QRG
Display Setup
Brightness/Contrast
If you select Brightness or Contrast, adjust the setting by rotating and pressing .
Features
TOC
Menu Color
If you select Menu Color, rotate to setting you want, then press .
Index
Home
182
* Not available on all models
Language Selection
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen*
QRG
1. Rotate to select Language Selection, then press .
2. Rotate to select the language, then press .
TOC
Features
* Not available on all models
Index
Home
183
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio Remote Controls
QRG Audio Remote Controls
Allows you to operate the audio system while driving.
MODE Button
MODE Button
Cycles through the audio modes as follows: FM1FM2AMXM1 *XM2 *CD CD- LAUX
VOL (Volume) Button
CH (Channel) Button
TOC VOL Button Press 3 : Increases the volume. Press 4 : Decreases the volume.
Features
Index Home
CH Button · When listening to the radio
Press (+: Selects the next preset radio station. Press (-: Selects the previous preset radio station. Press and hold (+: Selects the next strong station. Press and hold (-: Selects the previous strong station.
· When listening to a CD, CD Library, iPod® or USB flash drive. Press (+: Skips to the next song. Press (-: Goes back to the beginning of the current or previous song.
· When listening to a CD or CD Library. Press and hold (+: Skips to the next folder/album. Press and hold (-: Goes back to the previous folder/album.
184 * Not available on all models
1Audio Remote Controls The CD mode appears only when a CD is loaded.
When in AUX mode, the following are operable from the remote controls:
· iPod®/USB flash drive connected to the USB
adapter cable
· Bluetooth® Audio (with some phones only)
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound
Adjusting the Sound
QRG
SETUP Button
Press the SETUP button, and rotate to select Sound Settings, then press . Rotate
to scroll through the following choices:
1Adjusting the Sound The SVC has four modes: OFF, LOW, MID, and HIGH.
SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As you slow down, audio volume decreases.
RETURN Button Selector Knob
TOC
Features
Speed-sensitive Volume Compensation
Index
Home
185
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the AM/FM Radio
QRG Playing the AM/FM Radio
Models without rear entertainment system
AM/FM Button
TOC
Press to select a band.
Features
Index
Home
186
TITLE Button Press to switch the RDS name on and off.
SKIP Bar Press and hold to search up and down the selected band for a station with a strong signal.
SCAN Button Press to sample each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds. To turn off scan, press the button again.
RETURN Button Press to go back to the previous display.
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
Preset Buttons (1-6) To store a station: 1. Tune to the selected station. 2. Pick a preset button and hold it
until you hear a beep. To listen to a stored station, select a band, then press the preset button.
CATEGORY Bar (FOLDER Bar) Press either side to display and select an RDS category. SETUP Button Press to display menu items.
Selector Knob Press and turn to tune the radio frequency.
Models with rear entertainment system
AM/FM Button Press to select a band.
TITLE Button Press to switch the RDS name on and off. SKIP Bar Press and hold to search up and down the selected band for a station with a strong signal. SCAN Button Press to sample each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds. To turn off scan, press the button again. RETURN Button Press to go back to the previous display.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the AM/FM Radio QRG
Features
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob
TOC
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
Preset Buttons (1-6) To store a station: 1. Tune to the selected station. 2. Pick a preset button and hold it
until you hear a beep.
To listen to a stored station, select a band, then press the preset button.
CATEGORY Bar
Press either side to display and select an RDS category.
SETUP Button Press to display menu items.
Selector Knob Press and turn to tune the radio frequency.
Index Home
Continued 187
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the AM/FM Radio
QRG TOC
Auto Select
Use the auto select feature to scan both bands and store the strongest station in each preset.
1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Rotate to select Auto Select, then press .
3. Select ON, then press .
To turn off auto select, select OFF, then press . This restores the presets you originally set.
1Playing the AM/FM Radio The ST indicator appears on the display indicating stereo FM broadcasts. Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.
Switching the Audio Mode Press the MODE button on the steering wheel.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 184
You can store six AM stations and twelve FM stations into the preset button memory. FM1 and FM2 let you store six stations each.
Auto Select function scans and stores up to six AM stations and twelve FM stations with a strong signal into the preset button memory.
Features
If you do not like the stations auto select has stored, you can manually store your preferred frequencies.
Index
Home
188
Features
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the AM/FM Radio
QRG
Radio Data System (RDS)
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS capable FM station. RDS INFO ON Press the TITLE button while listening to an RDS capable station. RDS INFO ON appears, and the station name is displayed. To find an RDS station from your selected program category
1. Press the FOLDER bar or the CATEGORY bar to display and select an RDS category. TOC
2. Use SKIP or SCAN to select an RDS station.
Index Home
189
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the XM® Radio*
QRG Playing the XM® Radio*
Models without rear entertainment system
SCAN Button
Press to sample all channels (in the
channel mode), or channels within
TOC
a category (in the category mode).
Features
Each sampling continues for a few seconds. Press SCAN again to
cancel scanning and continue listening to the channel.
(XM®) Button Press to select XM® radio.
TITLE Button
Press and release to cycle the display between the name, title, and category.
Index Home
SKIP Bar Press to skip to the previous or next channel.
RETURN Button Press to go back to the previous display.
190 * Not available on all models
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
Preset Buttons (1-6) To store a channel: 1. Select the channel. 2. Pick a preset button and hold it
until you hear a beep. To listen to a stored channel, select XM, then press the preset button.
CATEGORY Bar Press either side to display and select an XM® Radio category.
SETUP Button Press to display menu items.
Selector Knob Turn to select channel.
Models with rear entertainment system
(XM®) Button Press to select XM® radio. TITLE Button Press and release to cycle the display between the name, title, and category.
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume. SKIP Bar Press to skip to the previous or next channel. RETURN Button Press to go back to the previous display.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the XM® Radio* QRG
SCAN Button Press to sample all channels (in the channel mode), or channels within a category (in the category mode). Each sampling continues for a few seconds. Press SCAN again to cancel scanning and continue listening to the channel.
Preset Buttons (1-6) To store a channel: 1. Select the channel. 2. Pick a preset button and hold it
until you hear a beep. To listen to a stored channel, select XM, then press the preset button.
CATEGORY Bar Press either side to display and select an XM® Radio category.
SETUP Button Press to display menu items.
Selector Knob Turn to select channel.
Features
TOC
Index Home
Continued 191
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the XM® Radio*
QRG
To Play the XM® Radio
1. Press the
button to select the XM® radio band (XM1 or XM2).
2. Press and hold the TITLE button to switch between the channel mode and category mode.
If you press the SETUP button, rotate to select XM Mode, and press . You can select channel mode or category mode by turning and pressing the selector knob.
3. Select a channel using the TUNE ( ), SKIP, CATEGORY, SCAN, or preset buttons.
TOC
Features
To Select a Channel from a List
1. Press to display a channel list.
2. Rotate to select a channel, then press .
1Playing the XM® Radio* In the channel mode, all available channels are selectable. In the category mode, you can select a channel within a category (Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.).
You can store twelve XM® stations in the preset buttons. XM1 and XM2 let you store six stations each.
There may be instances when XM® Radio does not broadcast all the data fields (artist name, title). This does not indicate a problem with your audio system.
Channel list is shown.
Index Home
192 * Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
Playing a CD
QRG
Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs and CD-RWs in either MP3, WMA, or AAC format. With the CD loaded, press the CD button.
Models without rear entertainment system
SCAN Button You will get a 10-second sampling of each song. Press to sample all tracks on the
CD (all files in the current folder in MP3, WMA, or AAC). Press two times to sample the first file in each of the main folders (MP3, WMA, or AAC). To turn off scan, press and hold the button.
TITLE Button Press to display the text data on a CD (if it was recorded with text data).
SKIP Bar Press or to change tracks (files in MP3, WMA or AAC). Press and hold to move rapidly within a track/file.
RETURN Button Press to go back to the previous display.
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
TOC
Features
CD Button Press to play a CD
CD Slot Insert a CD about halfway into the CD slot.
CATEGORY Bar (FOLDER Bar) Press (+ to skip to the next folder, and (- to skip to the beginning of the previous folder in MP3, WMA or AAC.
(CD Eject) Button Press to eject a CD.
Selector Knob Turn to change tracks/files. Turn to select an item, then press to set your selection. SETUP Button Press to display menu items.
Index Home
Continued 193
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
QRG
Models with rear entertainment system
Features
TOC
Index Home
194
CD Button Press to play a CD
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
TITLE Button Press to display the text data on a CD (if it was recorded with text data).
SKIP Bar Press or to change tracks (files in MP3, WMA or AAC). Press and hold to move rapidly within a track/ file. RETURN Button Press to go back to the previous display.
SCAN Button You will get a 10-second sampling of each song. Press to sample all tracks on the CD
(all files in the current folder in MP3, WMA, or AAC). Press two times to sample the first file in each of the main folders (MP3, WMA, or AAC). To turn off scan, press and hold the button.
CD Slot Insert a CD about halfway into the CD slot.
(CD Eject) Button Press to eject a CD.
CATEGORY Bar Press (+ to skip to the next folder, and (- to skip to the beginning of the previous folder in MP3, WMA or AAC.
Selector Knob Turn to change tracks/files. Turn to select an item, then press to set your selection.
SETUP Button Press to display menu items.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
How to Select a File from a Folder with the Selector Knob
(MP3/WMA/AAC)
1. Press to switch the display to a folder list.
1Playing a CD
NOTICE Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can cause the CD to jam in the unit.
WMA files protected by digital rights management (DRM) cannot be played. The audio system displays UNSUPPORTED, then skips to the next file.
Folder Selection
2. Rotate to select a folder.
Text data appears on the display under the following circumstances:
· When you select a new folder, file, or track. · When you change the audio mode to CD. · When you insert a CD.
If you eject the CD but do not remove it from the slot, the system reloads the CD automatically after several seconds.
Features
QRG TOC
Track Selection
3. Press to change the display to a list of files in that folder.
4. Rotate to select a file, then press .
Continued
Index
Home
195
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
Features
QRG TOC
How to Select a Play Mode
You can select repeat, random, and scan modes when playing a track or file. 1. Press the SETUP button.
Play Mode Items
2. Rotate to select Play Mode, then press .
3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .
1How to Select a Play Mode
Press the RETURN button to go back to the previous display, and press the SETUP button to cancel this setting mode.
Play Mode Menu Items Normal Play Repeat One Track: Repeats the current track/file(s). Repeat One Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Repeats all files in the current folder. Random in Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Plays all files in the current folder in random order. Random in Disc: Plays all tracks/files in random order. Scan Tracks: Samples all tracks on the CD. (MP3/WMA/AAC): Samples all files in the current folder. Scan Folders (MP3/WMA/AAC): Samples the first file in each folder.
To turn off a play mode 1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Rotate Index
3. Rotate
to select Play Mode, then press . to select Normal Play, then press .
Home
196
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying CD Library
Playing CD Library
QRG
The songs on music CDs can be recorded to the flash memory. You can then play the songs directly from your vehicle's audio system.
Models without rear entertainment system
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
SCAN Button You will get a 10-second sampling of each song. Press to sample all tracks on the album list. Press two times to sample the first
track in each album list. To turn off scan, press and hold the
button.
TITLE Button Press to display the text data on the album list (if it was recorded with text data or data was found from Gracenote®).
SKIP Bar Press or to change tracks. Press and hold to move rapidly within a track.
RETURN Button Press to go back to the previous display.
CDL Button
Press to play tracks from CD Library. The previously selected track will be
TOC
played.
Features
Selector Knob
Press to display the album list.
Turn to change tracks/albums. Turn to select an item, then press to set your selection.
(CD Eject) Button Press to eject a CD.
CD Slot Insert a CD about halfway into the CD slot.
CATEGORY Bar (FOLDER Bar)
Press (+ to skip to the next album, and (- to skip to the beginning of the previous album.
Index
SETUP Button Press to display menu items.
Home
Continued 197
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying CD Library
QRG
Models with rear entertainment system
Features
TOC
Index Home
198
CDL Button Press to play tracks from CD Library. The previously selected track will be played.
TITLE Button Press to display the text data on the album list (if it was recorded with text data or data was found from Gracenote®). VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
SKIP Bar Press or to change tracks. Press and hold to move rapidly within a track.
RETURN Button Press to go back to the previous display.
SCAN Button You will get a 10-second sampling of each song. Press to sample all tracks on the album list. Press two times to sample the
first track in each album list. To turn off scan, press and hold
the button.
CD Slot Insert a CD about halfway into the CD slot.
(CD Eject) Button Press to eject a CD.
CATEGORY Bar Press (+ to skip to the next album, and (- to skip to the beginning of the previous album.
Selector Knob Press to display the album list. Turn to change tracks/albums. Turn to select an item, then press to set your selection. SETUP Button Press to display menu items.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying CD Library
Recording a Music CD to CD Library
If the CD is played in the audio unit for the first time 1. A prompt appears and asks if you want the currently playing CD to be recorded to the flash memory.
1Playing CD Library You can store up to 18 albums.
The system supports the recording function from the standard CD-DA only.
2 Recommended CDs P. 273
Recording Icon
Album Number
2. Rotate to select YES. Press to start recording. u The display changes to the album list.
3. Rotate to select one of the album numbers you want the currently playing CD to be stored, then press .
4. The display indicates, with an icon, that the CD is being recorded. u The icon disappears when the recording is finished.
The system does not support the CD-DA with copy protection.
Gracenote® searches for the title information for the CD you have recorded to the flash memory. If the information is found, song titles are displayed.
While recording a CD:
· If you turn off the ignition switch, you need to
record the CD from the beginning next time you turn on the ignition switch.
· If you eject the CD, and reload it again, you can
start recording from where it was left off.
Current Recording Track Number
Forward/rewind, repeat, random and scan function are not available during recording. You can listen to tracks from other album lists while recording.
There is no compensation offered in the case of unsuccessful recording of audio data or the loss of audio data due to any cause whatsoever.
Features
QRG TOC Index
Continued
Home
199
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying CD Library
QRG
Deactivating the prompt display
If you do not want the prompt to appear on the display for the first time you
play a CD:
Select this option.
1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Rotate to select CD Library Setup, then press .
3. Rotate to select Prompt to Record CD,
then press . u To activate the prompt display again,
TOC
follow the same procedure.
Features
Recording a CD Manually
Select this option.
1. Insert a CD you want to record to the flash memory, and press the SETUP button.
2. Rotate to select CD Library Setup, then press .
3. Rotate to select Record CD Now, then press . u The display changes to the album list.
Index Home
4. Rotate to select one of the album numbers you want the currently playing CD to be stored, then press . u If you select an album number that has already had another CD, the system asks if you want to replace this album with the album currently in the slot. Select Yes to replace, and No to return.
200
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying CD Library
Selecting a Play Mode for CD Library
You can select repeat, random, and scan modes when playing CD Library. 1. Press the SETUP button.
1Selecting a Play Mode for CD Library
Press the RETURN button to go back to the previous display, and press the SETUP button to cancel this setting mode.
2. Rotate to select Play Mode, then press .
3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .
Play Mode Menu Items Normal Play Repeat One Track: Repeats the current track. Repeat Album: Repeats all tracks in the current album. Scan Tracks: Samples all tracks on the CD. Scan Albums: Samples the first track in each album. Random in Albums: Plays all tracks in the current album in random order. Random All: Plays all tracks in the current album list in random order.
Features
QRG TOC
To turn off a play mode 1. Press the SETUP button. 2. Rotate to select Play Mode, then press . 3. Rotate to select Normal Play, then press .
Continued
Index
Home
201
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying CD Library
QRG
Other CD Library Setup Menu
1. Press the SETUP button. 2. Rotate to select CD Library Setup,
then press .
1Other CD Library Setup Menu
CD Library setup menu items Delete Library Album: Delete albums in CD Library. Rotate to select an album you want to delete and select Yes.
Album Info DB Version: Displays the current album's database version information.
Update Album Info DB: 2 To update Gracenote® Album Info P. 202
TOC 3. Rotate to select a menu item, then press .
Features
Index Home
To update Gracenote® Album Info 1. Insert the update disc into the disc slot that includes the update. 2. Press the SETUP button. 3. Rotate to select CD Library Setup. 4. Rotate to select Update Album Info DB, then press . 5. Rotate to select Yes. Press to start updating.
202
1To update Gracenote® Album Info
To acquire updated files: Consult a dealer US: Visit www.honda.com. Canada: Visit www.honda.ca. Once you perform an update, any information you edited before will be overwritten or erased.
2 Gracenote® End User License Agreement P. 476
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®
Playing an iPod®
QRG
Connect the iPod® using your dock connector to the USB adapter cable, then press the USB/AUX button.
2 USB Adapter Cable P. 173
Models without rear entertainment system
USB Indicator Appears when an iPod® is connected.
Album Art
TOC
Features
SKIP Bar Press or to change songs. Press and hold to move rapidly within a song.
RETURN Button Press to go back to the previous display.
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
USB/AUX Button Press to select iPod® (if connected).
Selector Knob Turn to select a song, file, menu item, or play mode. Press to set your selection.
SETUP Button Press to display menu items.
Index Home
Continued 203
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®
QRG
Models with rear entertainment system
TOC
Features
Index
Home
204
SKIP Bar Press or to change songs. Press and hold to move rapidly within a song.
RETURN Button Press to go back to the previous display.
USB Indicator Appears when an iPod® is connected.
Album Art
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
USB/AUX Button Press to select iPod® (if connected).
Selector Knob Turn to select a song, file, menu item, or play mode. Press to set your selection. SETUP Button Press to display menu items.
How to Select a File from the iPod® Menu
1. Press to display the iPod® menu.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®
1Playing an iPod® Available operating functions vary on models or versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicle's audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod®/USB Flash Drive P. 268
QRG
TOC
iPod® Menu
2. Rotate to select a menu.
Features
3. Press to display the items on that menu. 4. Rotate to select an item, then press .
Continued
Index
Home
205
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®
QRG
How to Select a Play Mode
You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a file. 1. Press the SETUP button.
TOC
Play Mode
Items
2. Rotate to select Play Mode, then press .
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items Normal Play Repeat One Track: Repeats the current track. Shuffle All: Plays all available files in a selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres, or composers) in random order. Shuffle Repeat: Repeats the shuffle all feature. Shuffle Albums: Plays all available albums in a selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres, or composers) in random order. Shuffle Album Repeat: Repeats the shuffle album feature.
Features
3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .
To turn off a play mode 1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Rotate Index 3. Rotate
to select Play Mode, then press . to select Normal Play, then press .
Home
206
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Playing a USB Flash Drive
QRG
Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3, WMA or AAC*1 format.
Connect your USB flash drive to the USB adapter cable, then press the USB/AUX button.
2 USB Adapter Cable P. 173
Models without rear entertainment system
USB Indicator
Appears when a USB flash drive is connected.
TOC
Features
SKIP Bar Press or to change files. Press and hold to move rapidly within a file.
RETURN Button Press to go back to the previous display.
*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes ® are playable on this unit.
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
USB/AUX Button Press to select USB flash drive (if connected).
Selector Knob Turn to select a file, then press to set your selection.
SETUP Button Press to display menu items.
Index
Home
Continued 207
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
QRG
Models with rear entertainment system
TOC
Features
Index
Home
208
SKIP Bar Press or to change files. Press and hold to move rapidly within a file.
RETURN Button Press to go back to the previous display.
USB Indicator Appears when a USB flash drive is connected.
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
USB/AUX Button Press to select USB flash drive (if connected).
Selector Knob Turn to select a file, then press to set your selection. SETUP Button Press to display menu items.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
How to Select a File from a Folder with the Selector Knob
1. Press to switch the display to a folder list.
1Playing a USB Flash Drive
Use the recommended USB flash drives. 2 General Information on the Audio System P. 272
Files in WMA format protected by digital rights management (DRM) are not played. The audio system displays UNPLAYABLE FILE, and then skips to the next file.
Folder Selection
2. Rotate to select a folder.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod®/USB Flash Drive P. 268
QRG TOC
Features
Track Selection
3. Press to change the display to a list of files in that folder.
4. Rotate to select a file, then press .
Continued
Index
Home
209
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
QRG
How to Select a Play Mode
You can select repeat and random modes when playing a file(s). 1. Press the SETUP button.
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items Normal Play Repeat One Track: Repeats the current file. Random All: Plays all files in random order. Random Repeat: Repeats the random all feature.
Features
TOC
Play Mode
Items
2. Rotate to select Play Mode, then press .
3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .
To turn off a play mode 1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Rotate Index 3. Rotate
to select Play Mode, then press . to select Normal Play, then press .
Home
210
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
Playing Bluetooth® Audio
QRG
Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth®-compatible phone.
This function is available when the phone is paired and linked to the vehicle's Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 305
Models without rear entertainment system
Bluetooth Indicator Appears when your phone is connected to HFL.
TOC
Features
SKIP Bar Press or
to change files.
RETURN Button Press to go back to the previous display.
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
USB/AUX Button Press to select Bluetooth® Audio.
Selector Knob
Turn to change files. Turn to select an item, then press to set your selection.
SETUP Button Press to display menu items.
Index Home
Continued 211
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
QRG
Models with rear entertainment system
TOC
Features
SKIP Bar Press or
to change files.
Index
Home
212
RETURN Button Press to go back to the previous display.
Bluetooth Indicator Appears when your phone is connected to HFL.
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume. USB/AUX Button Press to select Bluetooth® Audio.
Selector Knob Turn to change files. Turn to select an item, then press to set your selection.
SETUP Button Press to display menu items.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
1. Make sure that your phone is paired and linked to HFL. 2. Press the USB/AUX button.
If the phone is not recognized, another HFL-compatible phone, which is not compatible for Bluetooth® Audio, may be already linked.
To pause or resume a file 1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Rotate to select Resume/Pause, then press .
Each time you press , the setting switches between Pause and Resume.
1Playing Bluetooth® Audio Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming audio capabilities are compatible with the system. For a list of compatible phones:
· U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
1-888-528-7876.
· Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call
1-888-528-7876.
In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data device functions while driving.
If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system, there will be a delay before the system begins to play.
1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files To play the audio files, you may need to operate your phone. If so, follow the phone maker's operating instructions.
The pause function may not be available on some phones.
If any audio device is connected to the auxiliary input jack, you may need to press the USB/AUX button repeatedly to select the Bluetooth® Audio system.
Switching to another mode pauses the music playing from your phone.
Features
QRG TOC Index
Continued
Home
213
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
QRG
How to Select a Play Mode
You can select repeat and random modes when playing a file(s). 1. Press the SETUP button. 2. Rotate to select Play Mode, then press .
1How to Select a Play Mode PlayMode Menu Items Normal Play Repeat One Track: Repeats the current file. Random All: Plays all files in random order.
TOC 3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .
Features
To turn off a play mode 1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Rotate Index 3. Rotate
to select Play Mode, then press . to select Normal Play, then press .
Home
214
Switching to HFL
Button
Button
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
Press the (pick-up) button on the steering wheel to receive a call when Bluetooth® Audio is playing.
2 Playing Bluetooth® Audio P. 211
1Switching to HFL
If you receive a call while Bluetooth® Audio is in the pause mode, it will resume play after ending the call.
QRG
Press the (hang-up) button to end the call and return to Bluetooth® Audio.
TOC
Features
Index
Home
215
Audio System Basic Operation
Features
QRG TOC
Models with navigation system
To use the audio system function, the ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w.
Use the interface dial or AUDIO button to access some audio functions.
AUDIO Button Interface Dial
Press to switch between the normal and extended display for some functions.
Interface dial: Rotate left or right to scroll through the available choices. Move the interface dial and press to set your selection.
AUDIO button: Press to display the audio system on the navigation screen.
1Audio System Basic Operation These indications are used to show how to operate the interface dial. Rotate to select. Press to enter. Move up to select.
Move down to select. Move left to select. Move right to select.
Press the MODE, (+, (-, 3 or 4 button on the steering wheel to change any audio setting.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 217
Index
Home
216
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio Remote Controls
Audio Remote Controls
Allows you to operate the audio system while driving. MODE Button MODE Button Cycles through the audio modes as follows: FM1FM2AMXM1XM2CD HDDAUX
VOL (Volume) Button
CH (Channel) Button
VOL Button Press 3 : Increases the volume. Press 4 : Decreases the volume.
CH Button · When listening to the radio
Press (+: Selects the next preset radio station. Press (-: Selects the previous preset radio station. Press and hold (+: Selects the next strong station. Press and hold (-: Selects the previous strong station.
· When listening to a CD, HDD, iPod® or USB flash drive Press (+: Skips to the next song. Press (-: Goes back to the beginning of the current or previous song.
· When listening to a CD or HDD Press and hold (+: Skips to the next folder/album. Press and hold (-: Goes back to the previous folder/album.
1Audio Remote Controls The CD mode appears only when a CD is loaded.
When in AUX mode, the following are operable from the remote controls:
· iPod®/USB flash drive connected to the USB
adapter cable
· Bluetooth® Audio (with some phones only)
Features
QRG
TOC
Index Home
217
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound
QRG Adjusting the Sound
AUDIO Button
Press the AUDIO button, and move to select AUDIO MENU. Rotate to select Sound Setup, then press . Rotate to scroll through the following choices:
Interface Dial TOC
1Adjusting the Sound The SVC has four modes: OFF, LOW, MID, and HIGH. SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As you slow down, audio volume decreases.
Dolby PL II signal processing creates multi-channel surround sound from 2-channel stereo audio sources. Dolby ProLogic II is available only in DISC (CD-DA, MP3, WMA, AAC), XMr Radio, AUX (USB, iPodr, AUX, Bluetoothr Audio), and HDD modes.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, ProLogic, MLP Lossless, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Features
Index
Home
218 * Not available on all models
Center *
Dolby ProLogic II* Speed-sensitive Volume Compensation
Playing the AM/FM Radio
Models without rear entertainment system
FM Button AM Button Press to select a band.
TITLE Button Press to switch the RDS name on and off.
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume. SKIP Bar Press to search up and down the selected band for a station with a strong signal. AUDIO Button Press to display the audio system on the navigation screen.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the AM/FM Radio QRG
Preset Buttons (1-6)
TOC
Features
To store a station:
1. Tune to the selected station.
2. Pick a preset button and hold it
until you hear a beep.
To listen to a stored station, select a band, then press the preset button.
TUNE Knob Turn to tune the radio frequency.
CATEGORY Bar Press either side to display and select an RDS category.
SCAN Button Press to sample each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds. To turn off scan, press the button again.
Index Home
Continued 219
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the AM/FM Radio
QRG
Models with rear entertainment system
Features
TOC
Index Home
220
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
AM/FM Button Press to select a band.
TITLE Button Press to switch the RDS name on and off.
SKIP Bar Press and hold to search up and down the selected band for a station with a strong signal.
SCAN Button Press to sample each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds. To turn off scan, press the button again.
AUDIO Button Press to display the audio system on the navigation screen.
Preset Buttons (1-6) To store a station: 1. Tune to the selected station. 2. Pick a preset button and hold it
until you hear a beep. To listen to a stored station, select a band, then press the preset button.
TUNE Knob Turn to tune the radio frequency.
CATEGORY Bar Press either side to display and select an RDS category.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the AM/FM Radio
Auto Select
Use the auto select feature to scan both bands and store the strongest station in each preset.
1. Press the AUDIO button.
2. Move to select AUDIO MENU.
3. Rotate to select A.SEL, then press .
4. Rotate to select ON, then press .
To turn off auto select, rotate to select OFF, then press . This restores the presets you originally set.
1Playing the AM/FM Radio The ST indicator appears on the display indicating stereo FM broadcasts. Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.
Switching the Audio Mode Press the MODE button on the steering wheel.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 217
You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into the preset button memory. FM1 and FM2 let you store 6 stations each.
Auto Select function scans and stores up to six AM stations and twelve FM stations with a strong signal into the preset button memory.
If you do not like the stations auto select has stored, you can manually store your preferred frequencies.
Features
QRG TOC
Continued
Index
Home
221
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the AM/FM Radio
QRG
Radio Data System (RDS)
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.
To find an RDS station from your selected program category
RDS Category
1. Press the AUDIO button.
2. Move to select AUDIO MENU.
3. Rotate to select RDS Search, then press .
TOC
4. Move or to select a search method
(Seek up, Seek down, Scan).
5. Rotate to select a category. Press .
Features
Radio text display
1. Press the AUDIO button.
2. Move to select AUDIO MENU. 3. Rotate to select Read Radio Text, then
press .
Index
Home
222
Playing the XM® Radio
Models without rear entertainment system
TITLE Button Press and release to cycle the display between the name, title, and category.
(XM®) Button Press to select XM® Radio, and to select the XM1 or XM2 band. VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume. SKIP Bar Press or to the previous or next channel. AUDIO Button Press to display the audio system on the navigation screen.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the XM® Radio QRG
Preset Buttons (1-6)
To store a channel:
TOC
Features
1. Tune to the selected channel.
2. Pick a preset button and hold it
until you hear a beep.
To listen to a stored channel, select XM, then press the preset button.
TUNE Knob Turn to tune a station.
CATEGORY Bar Press either side to display and select an XMr Radio category.
SCAN Button Press to sample all channels (in the channel mode), or channels within a category (in the category mode). Each sampling continues for a few seconds. Press SCAN again to cancel scanning and continue listening to the channel.
Index Home
Continued 223
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the XM® Radio
QRG
Models with rear entertainment system
Features
TOC
Index Home
224
TITLE Button Press and release to cycle the display between the name, title, and category.
(XM®) Button Press to select XM® radio, and to select the XM1 or XM2 band.
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
SKIP Bar Press to skip to the previous or next channel.
AUDIO Button Press to display the audio system on the navigation screen.
Preset Buttons (1-6) To store a channel: 1. Select the channel. 2. Pick a preset button and hold it
until you hear a beep. To listen to a stored channel, select XM, then press the preset button.
TUNE Knob Turn to tune a station.
CATEGORY Bar Press either side to display and select an XM® Radio category.
SCAN Button Press to sample all channels (in the channel mode), or channels within a category (in the category mode). Each sampling continues for a few seconds. Press SCAN again to cancel scanning and continue listening to the channel.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the XM® Radio
To Play the XM® Radio
1. Press the
button.
2. Press the AUDIO button, move to select AUDIO MENU.
3. Rotate to select Mode. Press .
4. Rotate to select CH (channel mode) or CAT (category mode). Press .
5. Select a channel using the TUNE ( ), SKIP, CATEGORY, SCAN, or Preset buttons.
1Playing the XM® Radio In the channel mode, all available channels are selectable. In the category mode, you can select a channel within a category (Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.).
You can store 12 XM® stations in the preset buttons. XM1 and XM2 let you store 6 stations each.
There may be instances when XM® Radio does not broadcast all the data fields (artist name, title). This does not indicate a problem with your audio system.
To Select a Channel from a List
1. Press the AUDIO button, move to select AUDIO MENU.
2. Rotate to select Channel List. Then press .
3. Rotate to select a channel, then press .
Features
QRG TOC
Index
Home
225
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
QRG Playing a CD
Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs and CD-RWs in either MP3 or WMA format. With the CD loaded, press the CD button.
Models without rear entertainment system
Features
TOC
Index Home
226
CD Button Press to play a CD.
TITLE Button Press to display the text data on a CD (if it was recorded with text data).
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume. SKIP Bar Press or to change tracks (files in MP3, WMA, or AAC). Press and hold to move rapidly within a track/file. AUDIO Button Press to display the audio system on the navigation screen.
CD Slot Insert a CD about halfway into the CD slot.
(CD Eject) Button Press to eject a CD.
SCAN Button You will get a 10-second sampling of each song. Press to sample all tracks on the CD (all files
in the current folder in MP3, WMA, or AAC). Press two times to sample the first file in
each of the main folders (MP3, WMA, or AAC). To turn off scan, press and hold the button.
CATEGORY Bar Press (+ to skip to the next folder, and (- to skip to the beginning of the previous folder in MP3, WMA or AAC.
Models with rear entertainment system
CD Button Press to play a CD TITLE Button Press to display the text data on a CD (if it was recorded with text data). VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume. SKIP Bar Press or to change tracks (files in MP3, WMA or AAC). Press and hold to move rapidly within a track/ file. AUDIO Button Press to display the audio system on the navigation screen.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD QRG
TOC
Features
CD Slot Insert a CD about halfway into the CD slot.
(CD Eject) Button Press to eject a CD.
CATEGORY Bar Press (+ to skip to the next folder, and (- to skip to the beginning of the previous folder in MP3, WMA or AAC.
SCAN Button You will get a 10-second sampling of each song. Press to sample all tracks on the CD (all files in
the current folder in MP3, WMA, or AAC). Press two times to sample the first file in each
of the main folders (MP3, WMA, or AAC). To turn off scan, press and hold the button.
Index Home
Continued 227
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
QRG TOC
How to Select a File from a Folder with the Interface Dial
(MP3/WMA/AAC)
1. Press the AUDIO button, move to select FOLDER LIST.
2. Rotate to select a folder.
3. Press to change the display to a list of files in that folder.
4. Rotate to select a file, then press .
1Playing a CD
NOTICE Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can cause the CD to jam in the unit.
WMA files protected by digital rights management (DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays UNSUPPORTED, then skips to the next file.
Text data appears on the display under the following circumstances:
· When you select a new folder, file, or track. · When you change the audio mode to CD. · When you insert a CD.
Features
If you eject the CD but do not remove it from the slot, the system reloads the CD automatically after several seconds.
Index
Home
228
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
How to Select a Play Mode
You can select repeat, random, and scan modes when playing a track or file. 1. Press the AUDIO button, move to select AUDIO MENU. 2. Rotate to select Repeat, Random, or Scan, then press . 3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .
To turn off a play mode 1. Press the AUDIO button, move to select AUDIO MENU.
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items OFF TRACK REPEAT: Repeats the current track/file. FOLDER REPEAT (MP3/WMA/AAC): Repeats all files in the current folder. FOLDER RANDOM (MP3/WMA/AAC): Plays all files in the current folder in random order. TRACK RANDOM: Plays all tracks/files in random order. TRACK SCAN: Samples all track/file(s). FOLDER SCAN (MP3/WMA/AAC): Samples the first file in each folder.
QRG TOC
Features
2. Rotate to select Repeat, Random, or Scan, then press .
3. Rotate to select OFF, then press .
Index
Home
229
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio
QRG Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio
The songs on music CDs can be recorded to the built-in HDD. You can then play the songs directly from your vehicle's audio system.
Models without rear entertainment system
Features
TOC VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
Index
Home
230
SKIP Bar Press or to change tracks. Press and hold to move rapidly within a track.
AUDIO Button Press to display the audio system on the navigation screen.
HDD Button Press to play tracks stored on the HDD.
(CD Eject) Button Press to eject a CD. CD Slot Insert a CD about halfway into the CD slot.
CATEGORY Bar Press (+ to skip to the next track list, and (- to skip to the beginning of the previous track list.
Models with rear entertainment system
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio QRG
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
SKIP Bar Press or to change tracks. Press and hold to move rapidly within a track.
AUDIO Button Press to display the audio system on the navigation screen.
Features
TOC
HDD Button Press to play tracks stored on the HDD.
(CD Eject) Button Press to eject a CD.
CD Slot Insert a CD about halfway into the CD slot.
CATEGORY Bar
Press (+ to skip to the next track list, and (- to skip to the beginning of the previous track list.
Index Home
Continued 231
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio
QRG
Recording a Music CD to HDD
If the CD is played in the audio unit for the first time Album Number Recording Icon The songs on music CDs are automatically
recorded to HDD by factory default. u The recording icon appears while the CD is being recorded.
1Recording a Music CD to HDD You can store up to 9999 tracks.
The system supports the recording function from the standard CD-DA only.
2 Recommended CDs P. 273
The system does not support the CD-DA with copy protection.
TOC
Current Recording Track Number
Gracenote® searches for the title information for the CD you have recorded to the HDD. If the information is found, song titles are displayed.
Features
Stopping recording 1. Move to select AUDIO MENU.
2. Rotate to select Cancel Rec to HDD, then press .
If you turn off the ignition switch while recording a CD, there may be pauses between songs when you playback from the HDD.
Forward/rewind, repeat, random and scan functions are not available during recording. You can listen to tracks from other album lists while recording.
There is no compensation offered in the case of unsuccessful recording of audio data or the loss of audio data due to any cause whatsoever.
Index
Home
232
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio
QRG
How to Select a Play Mode for HDD
You can select repeat, random, and scan modes when playing HDD. 1. Press the AUDIO button, move AUDIO MENU.
to select
2. Rotate to select Repeat, Random, or Scan, then press .
1How to Select a Play Mode for HDD
Play Mode Menu Items OFF TRACK REPEAT: Repeats the current track. TRACK SCAN: Samples all tracks on the HDD. TRACK RANDOM: Plays all tracks on the HDD in random order.
3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .
TOC
Features
To turn off a play mode 1. Press the AUDIO button, move to select AUDIO MENU.
2. Rotate 3. Rotate
to select Repeat, Random, or Scan, then press . to select OFF, then press .
Continued
Index
Home
233
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio
QRG
HDD Setup
TOC
Recording a CD Manually 1. Press the AUDIO button, move
AUDIO MENU.
to select
2. Rotate to select HDD Setup, then press .
1HDD Setup
HDD Setup menu items CD Recording:
2 Recording a CD Manually P. 200
Gracenote Info. Update: 2 To update Gracenote® Album Info P. 202
3. Rotate to select CD Recording, then press .
4. Rotate to select MANUAL, then press .
5. Move to select RETURN.
Features
Index
Home
234
6. Rotate to select Rec to HDD. Press . u To cancel recording, rotate to select Cancel Rec to HDD. Press .
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio
To update Gracenote® Album Info 1. Insert the update disc into the disc slot that includes the update.
2. Press the AUDIO button, move to select AUDIO MENU.
3. Rotate to select HDD Setup.
4. Rotate 5. Rotate
to select Gracenote Info. Update, then press . to select USB or DISC update source media, then press .
6. Rotate to select Yes. Press to start updating.
7. Rotate to select OK, on the confirmation screen. Press .
1To update Gracenote® Album Info
To acquire updated files: Consult a dealer US: Visit www.honda.com. Canada: Visit www.honda.ca.
Once you perform an update, any information you edited before will be overwritten or erased.
2 Gracenote® End User License Agreement P. 476
QRG TOC
Features
Continued
Index
Home
235
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio
QRG
Searching for Music
Search for music recorded to HDD using six different methods. 1. Press the AUDIO button, move MUSIC SEARCH.
to select
1Searching for Music Albums, Artists, and Tracks display lists in alphabetical order. Ripped Date displays albums in chronological order.
You can also search for music on the HDD through voice commands using SBV.
RANDOM ALL TRACKS
Move to select RANDOM ALL TRACKS to shuffle
the playback of all tracks that have been recorded to
TOC
HDD.
Features
2. Rotate to select an item. Press . u Move or to select alphabetical tabs on some screens. u The first track begins playing.
Index
Home
236
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio
Adding a Track to a User Playlist
Add a track from any playlist to one of the six user playlists. 1. Press the AUDIO button, move AUDIO MENU.
to select
2. Rotate to select Add to Playlist, then press .
3. Rotate to select a playlist. Press . u The track is added to the end of the playlist.
1Adding a Track to a User Playlist The maximum number of songs in each of the six user playlists is 999. Adding new songs overwrites the oldest songs.
Adding a track from a user playlist into the same user playlist will cause the track to appear twice in the playlist.
QRG TOC
Features
Editing a Playlist
Change the playlist name, track title, artist name, genre, and track order of the current playlist. You can also delete tracks, playlists, and albums.
1. Press the AUDIO button, move to select AUDIO MENU.
2. Rotate to select Edit Music Info., then press .
3. Rotate to select an item. Press .
1Editing a Playlist Deleting an album (original playlist) also deletes the album tracks you have stored in any user playlists.
Deleting a user playlist or deleting all tracks from a user playlist does not remove the playlist folder. The folder retains the playlist name and artist information.
Index
Continued
Home
237
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio
QRG The following items are available, depending on the type of playlist:
· Edit Artist Name: Enter a new artist name. Move to select OK when finished. Then, select whether to apply the new artist name to the album (playlist) and all tracks, the current track only, all tracks, or the album (playlist) only.
· Edit Playlist Name (user playlists): Enter a new playlist name. Move to select OK when finished.
· Edit Album Name (original playlists): Enter a new album name. Move to select OK when finished.
TOC · Edit Track Name: Enter a new track name. Move to select OK when finished.
Features
· Edit Genre: Select a new genre. Then select the original playlist to apply the genre.
· Edit Track Order (user playlists): Select the track to move, and then select
the new location. Repeat to move more than one track. Move to select OK when finished.
· Delete Playlist: Deletes the user playlist. Rotate to select Yes at the confirmation prompt to delete the playlist.
· Delete Album: Deletes the original playlist. Rotate to select Yes at the confirmation prompt to delete the album.
· Delete Track: Deletes the current track. Rotate to select Yes at the
Index
confirmation prompt to delete the current track.
Home
238
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio
QRG
Displaying Music Information
Display the music information (album name, artist name, genre) for an album (original playlist).
u Gracenoter searches for the information of the currently selected album (original playlist).
1Displaying Music Information
The maximum number of original playlists is 999 with a maximum of 99 songs in each playlist. Each album CD counts as an original playlist.
1. Press the AUDIO button, move to select AUDIO MENU.
2. Rotate to select Add to Get Music
Info., then press .
TOC
Features
3. Rotate to select an album. Press . u The information is displayed.
Index
Home
239
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®
QRG Playing an iPod®
Connect the iPod® using your dock connector to the USB adapter cable, then press the USB/AUX button.
2 USB Adapter Cable P. 173
Models without rear entertainment system
TOC
Features
Index
Home
240
SKIP Bar Press or to change songs. Press and hold to move rapidly within a song.
AUDIO Button Press to display the audio system on the navigation screen.
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Button Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
USB/AUX Button Press to select iPod® (if connected).
Models with rear entertainment system
SKIP Bar Press or to change songs. Press and hold to move rapidly within a song. AUDIO Button Press to display the audio system on the navigation screen.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod® QRG
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system on
TOC
and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
Features
USB/AUX Button Press to select iPod® (if connected).
Index
Home
Continued 241
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®
QRG
How to Select a File from the iPod® Menu
1. Press the AUDIO button, move MUSIC SEARCH.
2. Rotate to select a menu.
to select
1Playing an iPod® Available operating functions vary on models or versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicle's audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio display.
2 iPod®/USB Flash Drive P. 268
iPod® Menu TOC
3. Press to display the items on that menu. 4. Rotate to select an item, then press .
Features
Index
Home
242
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®
How to Select a Play Mode
You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a file.
1. Press the AUDIO button, move AUDIO MENU.
to select
2. Rotate to select Repeat or Shuffle, then press .
3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items OFF Shuffle: Plays all available files in a selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres, or composers) in random order. Shuffle Albums: Plays all available albums in a selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres, or composers) in random order. Repeat: Repeats the current track.
Play Mode Items
To turn off a play mode
1. Press the AUDIO button, move AUDIO MENU.
to select
2. Rotate to select Repeat or Shuffle, then press .
3. Rotate to select OFF, then press .
Features
QRG TOC
Index
Home
243
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
QRG Playing a USB Flash Drive
Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3, WMA or AAC*1 format. Connect your USB flash drive to the USB adapter cable, then press the USB/AUX button.
2 USB Adapter Cable P. 173
Models without rear entertainment system
TOC
Features
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
Index
SKIP Bar Press or to change files. Press and hold to move rapidly within a song.
AUDIO Button Press to display the audio system on the navigation screen.
Home *1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes ® are playable on this unit.
244
USB/AUX Button
Press to select USB flash drive (if connected).
Models with rear entertainment system
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
SKIP Bar Press or to change files. Press and hold to move rapidly within a song. AUDIO Button Press to display the audio system on the navigation screen.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive QRG
USB/AUX Button
Press to select USB flash drive (if
TOC
connected).
Features
Index
Home
Continued 245
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
QRG TOC
How to Select a File from a Folder with the Selector Knob
1. Press the AUDIO button, move to select FOLDER LIST.
2. Rotate to select a folder.
3. Press to change the display to a list of files in that folder.
4. Rotate to select a file, then press .
1Playing a USB Flash Drive Use the recommended USB flash drives. 2 General Information on the Audio System P. 272
Files in WMA format protected by digital rights management (DRM) are not played.
The audio system displays UNPLAYABLE FILE, and then skips to the next file.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio display.
2 iPod®/USB Flash Drive P. 268
Features
RANDOM ALL TRACKS
Move to select RANDOM ALL TRACKS to shuffle the playback of all tracks on the USB flash drive.
Index
Home
246
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
How to Select a Play Mode
You can select repeat, random, and scan modes when playing a file.
Play Mode Items
1. Press the AUDIO button, move AUDIO MENU.
to select
2. Rotate to select Repeat, Random, or Scan, then press .
3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .
To turn off a play mode
1. Press the AUDIO button, move AUDIO MENU.
to select
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items OFF TRACK REPEAT: Repeats the current file. FOLDER REPEAT: Repeats all files in the current folder. FOLDER RANDOM: Plays all files in the current folder in random order. TRACK RANDOM: Plays all files in random order. TRACK SCAN: Samples all files in the current folder. FOLDER SCAN (MP3/WMA/AAC): Samples the first file in each folder.
QRG TOC
Features
2. Rotate to select Repeat, Random, or Scan, then press .
3. Rotate to select OFF, then press .
Index
Home
247
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
QRG Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth®-compatible phone.
This function is available when the phone is paired and linked to the vehicle's Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 305
Models without rear entertainment system
Features
TOC VOL/ (Volume/ Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
USB/AUX Button
Press to select Bluetooth® Audio.
1Playing Bluetooth® Audio Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming audio capabilities are compatible with the system. For a list of compatible phones:
· U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
1-888-528-7876.
· Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call
1-888-528-7876.
In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data device functions while driving.
If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system, there will be a delay before the system begins to play.
SKIP Bar
Press or files.
to change
Index
Home
248
AUDIO Button
Press to display the audio system on the navigation screen.
Models with rear entertainment system
VOL/ (Volume/ Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
AUDIO Button Press to display the audio system on the navigation screen.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio QRG
USB/AUX Button
Press to select
Bluetooth® Audio.
TOC
Features
SKIP Bar
Press or to change files.
Continued
Index
Home
249
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
QRG
To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
1. Make sure that your phone is paired and linked to HFL.
2. Press the USB/AUX button.
If the phone is not recognized, another HFLcompatible phone, which is not compatible for Bluetooth® Audio, may be already linked.
1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files To play the audio files, you may need to operate your phone. If so, follow the phone maker's operating instructions.
The pause function may not be available on some phones.
If any audio device is connected to the auxiliary input jack, you may need to press the USB/AUX button repeatedly to select the Bluetooth® Audio system.
Features
TOC
To pause or resume a file
1. Press the AUDIO button, move to select AUDIO MENU.
Switching to another mode pauses the music playing from your phone.
2. Rotate to select Resume/Pause, then press .
Each time you press , the setting switches between Pause and Resume.
Switching to HFL
Press the (pick-up) button on the steering wheel to receive a call when Bluetooth® Audio is playing.
2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 301
1Switching to HFL
If you receive a call while Bluetooth® Audio is in the pause mode, it will resume play after ending the call.
Index
Home
250
Button
Button
Press the (hang-up) button to end the call and return to Bluetooth® Audio.
Rear Entertainment System*
QRG
Allows the rear passengers to enjoy a different entertainment source, such as DVD, CD, CD Library*, HDD*, and radio, than the front passengers.
Wireless Headphones
The rear seat passengers can listen to audio from the rear entertainment system by a wireless headphone that comes with your vehicle.
1Rear Entertainment System*
NOTICE This vehicle's overhead mounted video display, if so equipped, includes mercury-containing components. Upon removal, please reuse, recycle, or dispose of as hazardous waste.
To turn on the switch: Pivot the left earpiece outward.
To adjust the volume: Turn the dial at the
bottom of the right earpiece.
TOC
Features
* Not available on all models
Auxiliary Input Jacks
The system also allows for auxiliary inputs from standard video games. The jacks are on the back of the center console compartment. V = Video jack L = Left audio jack R = Right audio jack
Continued
1Wireless Headphones Your vehicle comes with two wireless headphones.
Wear the headphone correctly with the earpiece marked with L goes to your left ear and R goes to your right ear.
Wearing the headphone backward may affect the audio reception.
Index
Home
251
uuRear Entertainment System*uOperating the System
QRG
Overhead Screen
Press the OPEN button and pull down the screen to the first or second detent until it latches.
Overhead Screen TOC
1 Overhead Screen
NOTICE This vehicle's overhead mounted video display, if so equipped, includes mercury-containing components. Upon removal, please reuse, recycle, or dispose of as hazardous waste.
You can use the rear control panel as a remote. Press the RELEASE button to detach it.
Features
Operating the System
To operate the system, turn the ignition switch to ON (w or ACCESSORY (q. Press
the
button to turn on the system (indicator on).
button on the front panel
When you press the
button (indicator
on), the beeper sounds twice, and the front
display changes to what is displayed on the
rear overhead screen.
1 Operating the System
If you do not operate the system from the front panel for more than 20 seconds, the indicator in the button goes off, and the front display returns to what has previously been displayed.
Index
REAR POWER Button
REAR SOURCE Button
The audio from the front speakers switches to the audio played in the rear.
Home
252 * Not available on all models
uuRear Entertainment System*uOperating the System
QRG
System Controls and Menus for DVD
3, 4, , and ENT Buttons
Use 3, 4, , or to highlight a menu item, and press the ENT Button to make a selection.
(Power) Button Press to turn on the system. DVD Button Press to watch a DVD.
SKIP Buttons Press or
to change chapters.
(Play/Pause) Button Press to pause or play a DVD.
(Light) Button Press to illuminate the buttons and bars for a few seconds. Fast-forward Button Press and hold to fast forward to chapters.
CANCEL Button
Press to go back to the previous display or operation.
Rewind Button Press and hold to reverse to chapters.
SETUP Button The following options appear when you play a DVD and press the SETUP button:
MENU Button
The following options appear when you
play a DVD and press the MENU button:
Top Menu
Menu Play Mode
Search NumInput
Audio Subtitle Angle Title Chapter
TITLE/SCROLL Button
Press to display the status of the DVD that is currently playing.
Repeat
Disp Adjust
Brightness
( P. 259)
Contrast
Black Level
Tint
Color
Aspect Ratio
Normal
( P. 259)
Wide
Zoom
Full
PERSONAL SURROUND ( P. 259)
Language ( P. 259)
* Not available on all models
Continued
Features
TOC
Index Home
253
uuRear Entertainment System*uOperating the System
QRG
Playing a DVD · Insert a DVD into the lower slot of the front audio unit.
u The system automatically starts the DVD.
· To fast forward, press and hold the the bar on the front panel.
(SKIP) bar, and to reverse, press and hold
1Playing a DVD DVD is available for the rear seat passenger only.
If you have turned off the Auto Play feature, press the (play) button on the front panel or remote.
· To go to the next chapter, press the bar, and to go to the beginning of the current chapter, press the bar on the front panel. Quickly press the bar twice to go to the previous chapter.
Models without navigation system
TOC DVD setup from the front panel
Features
Press the
button on the front panel
while a DVD is playing and display REAR
MENU in front. Rotate to select DVD
Setup, then press .
Setting up Audio: 1. Rotate to select Audio, then press .
2. Rotate to select a language for audio that is available on the DVD, then press .
Index Home
Setting up Subtitle: 1. Rotate to select Subtitle, then press .
2. Rotate to select a subtitle language that is available on the DVD.
254 * Not available on all models
uuRear Entertainment System*uOperating the System
QRG Auto Play On: 1. Rotate to select Auto Play On, then press .
2. The check mark disappears, and the auto play feature turns off. u With this feature off, the DVD does not automatically start playing when the disc is inserted. Press button to play.
Title/Chapter Search: 1. Rotate to select Title Search or Chapter Search, then press .
2. Rotate to select a title or chapter number, then press .
Models with navigation system
Press the
button on the front panel
TOC
while a DVD is playing. Rotate to select DVD Setup, then press .
Features
Title/Chapter Search: 1. Rotate to select Title Search or Chapter Search, then press .
2. Rotate to select a title or chapter number, then press .
Setting up Audio: 1. Rotate to select Audio, then press .
2. Rotate to select a language for audio that is available on the DVD, then press .
* Not available on all models
Continued
Index
Home
255
uuRear Entertainment System*uOperating the System
QRG Setting up Subtitle: 1. Rotate to select Subtitle, then press .
2. Rotate to select a subtitle language that is available on the DVD.
Setting up Repeat: 1. Rotate to select Repeat, then press .
2. Rotate to select the icon in the center to repeat the current chapter, the icon on the right to repeat the current title, or OFF to turn off repeat.
Auto Play: TOC 1. Rotate to select Auto Play, then press .
2. Rotate to select OFF or ON, then press . u With this feature off, the DVD does not automatically start playing when the disc is inserted. Press button to play.
Features
TITLE/SCROLL button on the remote Press the TITLE/SCROLL button while the DVD is playing to see the current status of title, chapter, elapsed time, angle, subtitle, audio, and sound characteristics.
1TITLE/SCROLL button on the remote Press the TITLE/SCROLL button again to return.
Index
Home
256 * Not available on all models
uuRear Entertainment System*uOperating the System
QRG
MENU button on the remote Press the MENU button while the DVD is playing to see the available options. Use the and buttons to highlight the option and then press the ENT button.
Top Menu: The top page of the DVD's title menu appears. The title menu also appears when you press the MENU button while the DVD is in the slot not playing. Press the CANCEL or MENU button to return.
Menu: The DVD's title menu appears.
Play Mode: You can change the following three settings:
Audio - Select a language for audio that is available on the DVD. The sound characteristics (Dolby Digital, LPCM, MPEG Audio, etc) of that audio is also displayed.
Subtitle - Select a subtitle that is available on the DVD.
Angle - Select a view angle that is available on the DVD. If the DVD currently playing does not carry multiple angles, only one option Angle 1 comes on. Press the CANCEL or MENU button to return.
* Not available on all models
Continued
Features
TOC
Index Home
257
uuRear Entertainment System*uOperating the System
QRG Search: You can search for a DVD segment from the following methods. Title Search - Select the title you want to play. Chapter Search - Select the chapter you want to play.
NumInput: Enter a two digit number, if issued to the DVD, to find the segment you want to start to play.
1. Select NumInput to go to the number input screen.
2. Use the 3, 4, , and buttons to input numbers.
TOC
u If you want to delete a number, select DEL.
3. The cursor automatically goes to ENT after you input two digits. Press the ENT button to enter.
Features
Repeat: Highlight this option and press the ENT button to change the repeat mode from chapter repeat and title repeat, to repeat off.
Index
Home
258 * Not available on all models
uuRear Entertainment System*uOperating the System
QRG
SETUP button on the remote
1SETUP button on the remote
Press the SETUP button while the DVD is playing to see the available options. Use the
Some DVD formats do not allow for some of the setting adjustments.
and buttons to highlight the option and
then press ENT.
Disp Adjust: You can adjust the overhead screen's Brightness, Contrast, Black Level, Tint, and Color. To return to the default display setting, select Reset. After you make all the adjustments, the screen goes back to the top SETUP screen, or press the CANCEL button to return.
Aspect Ratio: You can select the screen mode with a different aspect ratio from Normal, Wide, Zoom, and Full. After you select the mode, it takes about one second to return to the play mode with the selected ratio.
PERSONAL SURROUND: You can select the sound effect mode that fits the DVD's audio source from Music, Cinema, and Voice. Select Off to turn this feature off.
Language: You can select the display language from English, French, and Spanish.
* Not available on all models
Continued
Features
TOC
Index Home
259
uuRear Entertainment System*uOperating the System
QRG
When the DVD is not playing
Initial Settings Press the SETUP button to configure the initial Language, Dynamic Range, and Angle Mark settings before playing a DVD.
1SETUP button on the remote
Initial Settings: The prior language varies by disc. You may not be able to configure your selected language setting.
Language Settings: Select the language for the DVD's displayed menus (Menu Language), the DVD's audio (Audio Language), and the DVD's subtitle (Subtitle Language).
1. Select the language setting.
2. Select the language from English, French, Spanish, Arabic, German, Italian,
TOC
Dutch, Chinese, Korean, Thai, Japanese, and other.
Features
3. If you select other, you need to enter the four digit language code to configure the language that is not listed. Select Yes to go to the number input screen. u To return to the Language Settings screen, select No.
4. Press the ENT button each time you input a digit. u If you want to delete a number, select DEL.
5. The cursor automatically goes to ENT after you input four digits. Press the ENT button to command.
Dynamic Range: This feature reduces the difference between the loud and quiet sound levels. Select ON or OFF.
Index Home
Angle Mark: You can select whether to display the angle mark appearing in the upper right corner of the screen when you change the view angle while the DVD is playing. Select ON or OFF.
260 * Not available on all models
uuRear Entertainment System*uOperating the System
System Controls and Menus for Audio
3,4, , and ENT Buttons
(Power) Button
Use 3, 4, , or to highlight a
Press to turn on the system.
menu item, and press the ENT Button
to make a selection.
AM/FM Button
Press to listen to AM or FM radio.
XM Button
Press to listen to XM radio.
CD/HDD Button* Press to listen to a CD or hard disc drive.
CD/CDL Button* Press to listen to a CD or CD library.
SKIP Buttons
2 Audio System Basic Operation P. 175
(Play/Pause) Button
Press to pause a playing CD.
P. 216
QRG TOC
Features
CANCEL Button Press to go back to the previous display or operation.
* Not available on all models
Fast-forward Button Press and hold to fast-forward the track.
(Light) Button Press to illuminate the buttons and bars for a few seconds.
Rewind Button Press and hold to reverse the track. AUX Button Press to use a USB, iPod, auxiliary video (rear), or auxiliary audio (front).
SETUP Button 2 SETUP button on the remote P. 259
SCROLL Button Press to switch search mode on XM radio, and scroll titles on CD.
MENU Button Press to display audio menu for AM/FM radio, XM radio, or CD on the overhead screen.
Index Home
Continued 261
uuRear Entertainment System*uOperating the System
QRG
Playing AM/FM radio in the rear Press the AM/FM button. When you press the MENU button while the radio is playing, the audio menu appears on the overhead screen. The available functions are the same as those of the front audio system. The SKIP button on the control panel works the same as the SKIP bar on the front panel for AM/FM radio operation.
2 Playing the AM/FM Radio P. 186
1System Controls and Menus for Audio
If you press the
button on the front panel, you
can operate the rear entertainment system from the
front display.
2
button on the front panel P. 252
Playing XM radio in the rear Press the XM button. When you press the MENU button while the radio is playing, the audio menu TOC appears on the overhead screen. The available functions are the same as those of the front audio system. The SKIP button on the control panel works the same as the SKIP bar on the front panel for XM radio operation.
2 Playing the XM® Radio* P. 190
Features
To change the mode between category and channel, press and hold the TITLE/SCROLL button for five seconds.
Index
Home
262 * Not available on all models
uuRear Entertainment System*uOperating the System
Playing a CD, CD Library*, and Hard disc drive* Press the CD/CDL or CD/HDD button. The available options appear on the overhead screen are Repeat, Random, and Scan. These functions are the same as those of the front audio system.
2 Playing a CD P. 193 2 Playing CD Library P. 197 2 Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio P. 230
To scroll your audio data title, press the TITLE/SCROLL button.
Playing iPod® and a USB flash drive Press the AUX button. The available options appear on the overhead screen are Repeat, Random, and Scan. These functions are the same as those of the front audio system.
2 Playing an iPod® P. 203 2 Playing a USB Flash Drive P. 207
1System Controls and Menus for Audio
You can also insert an audio CD compatible with the system, or recorded in MP3/WMA/AAC formats into the lower slot and play. The front passengers can listen to the same CD, or select another audio source.
2 Playable Discs P. 265 2 Audio Sources for Front and Rear Seats
P. 264
Features
QRG TOC
To scroll your audio data title, press the TITLE/SCROLL button.
* Not available on all models
Index
Home
263
uuRear Entertainment System*uAudio Sources for Front and Rear Seats
QRG Audio Sources for Front and Rear Seats
The table shows the possible audio source combinations of the front audio system and rear entertainment system's simultaneous use.
Front AM/FM XM
Rear
Radio Radio
CD
CD Library
HDD
DVD*1
USB iPod®
AM/FM Radio
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
XM Radio Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
CD
Yes
Yes
Yes*2
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
TOC
CD Library Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Features
HDD
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
DVD
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
USB iPod® Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
*1: The front seat passengers are only able to hear the DVD's sound from the front speakers.
*2:There are two cases. Two different CDs can be played, one for the front seats, and the other for rear seats if the upper and lower slots are used. If only one slot is used, the front and rear seats canthe share the same audio source.
1Audio Sources for Front and Rear Seats
Yes:These audio sources are simultaneously playable. No: These audio sources are not simultaneously playable.
Index
Home
264 * Not available on all models
Playable Discs
uuRear Entertainment System*uPlayable Discs
The discs that come with these labels can be played in your vehicle's rear entertainment system.
Also look for the region code of 1 or ALL on the package or jacket on the disc.
DVD-ROMs are not playable in this unit.
1Playable Discs This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights.
Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent's: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS and DTS Digital Surround are registered trademarks and the DTS logos and Symbol are trademarks of DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic, MLP Lossless and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Features
QRG TOC
Index
Home
265
Audio Error Messages
QRG CD Player
If a disc error occurs, you may see the following error messages.
Models without navigation system
Error Message
Cause
Solution
UNSUPPORTED FILE
Track/file format not supported
Current track/file will be skipped. The next supported track/file plays automatically.
CHECK DISC
Disc error
Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed.
2 Protecting CDs P. 274
TOC
Features
Index
Home
266
uuAudio Error MessagesuCD Player
Models with navigation system
QRG
Error Message
Cause
Solution
BAD DISC PLEASE CHECK OWNERS MANUAL BAD DISC PLEASE CHECK OWNERS MANUAL PUSH EJECT MECH ERROR
CHECK DISC
CHECK DISC LOAD
Servo error
Mechanical error
Mechanical error Focus error Disc violates copyright Disc not supported Load error
Press the (eject) button and remove the disc, and check that the error message is cleared.
Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed, and insert the disc again.
2 Recommended CDs P. 273
If the error message reappears, press the button, and pull out the disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new disc plays, there is a problem with TOC the first disc.
If the error message repeats, or the disc cannot be removed, contact a dealer. Do not try to force the disc out of the player.
Features
UNSUPPORTED
Track format not supported
Current track will be skipped. The next supported track plays automatically.
HEAT ERROR
High temperature
Turn the audio system off and allow the player to cool down until the error message is cleared.
Index
Home
267
uuAudio Error MessagesuiPod®/USB Flash Drive
QRG iPod®/USB Flash Drive
If an error occurs while playing an iPod® or USB flash drive, you may see the following error messages. If you cannot clear the error error message, contact a dealer.
Models without navigation system
Error Message
Solution
USB ERROR
Appears when there is a problem with the USB adapter unit. Check if the device is compatible with the USB adapter unit.
BAD USB DEVICE PLEASE Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect the device. Then turn the audio system CHECK OWNERS MANUAL off, and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.
Features
TOC NO SONG UNSUPPORTED VER
Appears when the iPod® is empty. Check that compatible files are stored on the device.
Appears when an unsupported iPod® is connected. If it appears when a supported iPod® is connected, update the iPod® software to the newer version.
Retry Connection
Appears when the system does not acknowledge the iPod®. Reconnect the iPod®.
UNPLAYABLE FILE
Appears when the files in the USB flash drive are DRM or an unsupported format. This error message appears for about 3 seconds, then plays the next song.
No Song
Appears when the USB flash drive is empty or there are no MP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flash drive. Check that compatible files are stored on the device.
UNSUPPORTED
Appears when an unsupported device is connected. If it appears when a supported device is connected, reconnect the device.
Index
Home
268
uuAudio Error MessagesuiPodr
iPodr
Models with navigation system
QRG
Error Message
Cause
Solution
UNSUPPORTED
Appears when an unsupported iPodr is connected.
Update the iPodr software to the latest version.
CONNECT RETRY
Appears when the iPodr cannot be authenticated.
Reconnect the iPodr.
NO SONG
Appears when there are no tracks in the iPodr.
Store tracks in the iPodr.
TOC
Features
Index
Home
269
uuAudio Error MessagesuUSB Flash Drive
QRG USB Flash Drive
Models with navigation system
Error Message
Cause
Solution
FILE ERROR
The system cannot read the track(s).
Check the tracks in the USB flash drive. There is a possibility that the tracks have been damaged.
UNSUPPORTED
Appears when an unsupported If it appears when a supported device is connected, reconnect the
device is connected.
device.
Features
UNPLAYABLE FILE TOC
NO SONG
Appears when the tracks in the USB flash drive are DRM or an unsupported format.
This error message appears for about 3 seconds, then plays the next song.
Appears when the USB flash drive is empty or there are no tracks in MP3, WMA, or AAC format in the drive.
Save tracks in MP3, WMA, or AAC format in the USB flash drive.
BAD USB DEVICE PLEASE CHECK OWNER'S MANUAL
Appears when the overcurrent protection feature of the system stops supplying power to USB because an incompatible device is connected.
Disconnect the device. Turn the audio system off, and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.
ERROR
Appears when the Internal USB ROM error occurs.
Try a different USB flash drive.
Index
Home
270
Models with rear entertainment system
DVD Player Error Messages
Error Message CHECK DISC
Cause FOCUS Error
Mech Error
Mechanical Error
CHECK REGION UNSUPPORTED FILE
Invalid region code DVD format not supported
uuAudio Error MessagesuDVD Player Error Messages
QRG
Solution Press the disc eject button, and remove the disc. Check for an error indication. Insert the disc again. If the code does not disappear or the disc cannot removed, consult a dealer. The disc is not playable in this unit. Eject the disc, and insert a disc compatible with this system.
TOC
Features
Index
Home
271
General Information on the Audio System
QRG XM® Radio Service*
Subscribing to XM® Radio
1. You need your radio ID ready before registering for subscription. To see the ID on the display: Turn the selector knob until 0 appears.
2. Have your radio ID and credit card number ready, and either call or visit the XM® website to subscribe.
1Subscribing to XM® Radio
Contact Information for XM® Radio: US: XM® Radio at www.siriusxm.com or 1-800-852-9696 Canada: XM® Canada at www.xmradio.ca, or 1-877-209-0079
Features
TOC Index
Receiving XM® Radio
Press the
(XM®) button and stay in this mode for about 30 minutes until the
service is activated. Make sure your vehicle is in an open area with good reception.
XM® Radio Display Messages
LOADING: XM® is loading the audio or program information. Ch Off Air: The channel is not currently broadcasting.
Ch Unauthorized: The encryption code is being updated. Channels 0 and 1 still work normally.
NO SIGNAL: The signal is too weak in the current location.
Ch Unavailable: No such channel exists, the channel is not part of your subscription, or the artist or title information is unavailable. CHECK ANTENNA: There is a problem with the XM® antenna. Contact a dealer.
1Receiving XM® Radio
The XM® satellites are in orbit over the equator, therefore, objects south of the vehicle may cause satellite reception interruptions. Satellite signals are more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and mountains the farther north you travel from the equator.
You may experience reception problems under the following circumstances:
· In a location with an obstruction to the south of
your vehicle.
· In tunnels · On the lower level of a multi-tiered road · Large items carried on the roof rack
Home
272 * Not available on all models
Recommended CDs
· Use only high-quality CD-R or CD-RW discs labeled for audio use. · Use only CD-R or CD-RW discs on which the recordings are closed. · Play only standard round-shaped CDs.
The CD packages or jackets should have one of these marks.
uuGeneral Information on the Audio System uRecommended CDs
1Recommended CDs
A Dual-disc cannot play on this audio unit. If recorded under certain conditions, a CD-R or CD-RW may not play either.
QRG
CDs with MP3, WMA or AAC files
TOC
Features
· Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.
· Some versions of MP3, WMA or AAC formats may be unsupported.
Continued
Index
Home
273
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuRecommended CDs
QRG
Protecting CDs Follow these precautions when handling or storing CDs: · Store a CD in its case when it is not being played.
· When wiping a CD, use a soft clean cloth from the center to the outside edge.
· Handle a CD by its edge. Never touch either surface.
· Never insert foreign objects into the CD player.
· Keep CDs out of direct sunlight and extreme heat.
· Do not place stabilizer rings or labels on the CD. TOC · Avoid fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip pens on the CD.
1Protecting CDs
NOTICE Do not insert a damaged CD. It may be stuck inside and damage the audio unit.
Examples: Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and
excessively thick CDs
Bubbled/ Wrinkled
With Label/ Sticker
Using Printer Label Kit
Sealed With Plastic Ring
Damaged CDs
Poor quality CDs
Features
Chipped/ Cracked Small CDs
Warped
3-inch (8-cm) CD
Burrs
Index
Home
274
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuCompatible iPod® and USB Flash Drives
Compatible iPod® and USB Flash Drives
iPod® Model Compatibility
Model iPod classic ® 80GB/160GB
iPod classic ® 120GB iPod classic ® 160GB (launch in 2009)
iPod ® (5th generation) iPod nano ® iPod touch ®
1iPod® Model Compatibility
This system may not work with all software versions of these devices.
QRG
USB Flash Drives
· Use a recommended USB flash drive of 256 MB or higher. · Some digital audio players may not be compatible. · Some USB flash drives (e.g., a device with security lockout) may not work. · Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display. · Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC formats may be unsupported.
1USB Flash Drives
TOC
Files on the USB flash drive are played in their stored order. This order may be different from the order displayed on your PC or device.
Features
Index
Home
275
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver*
QRG
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver can be programmed to operate up to three remote controlled devices around your home, such as garage doors, lighting, or home security systems.
1HomeLink® Universal Transceiver*
HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls., Inc.
Important Safety Precautions
Refer to the safety information that comes with your garage door opener to test that the safety features are functioning properly. If you do not have the safety information, contact the manufacturer.
Before programming HomeLink to operate a garage door opener, confirm that the opener has an external entrapment protection system, such as an "electronic eye," or other safety and reverse stop features. If it does not, HomeLink may not be able to operate it.
Before programming HomeLink, make sure that people and objects are out of the TOC way of the garage or gate to prevent potential injury or damage.
When programming a garage door opener, park just outside the garage door's path.
Features
Training HomeLink
Red Indicator
Index
If you have not trained any of the buttons in HomeLink before, you should erase any previously learned codes. To do this:
· Press and hold the two outside buttons for about 20 seconds, until the red indicator blinks. Release the buttons, and proceed to step 1.
· If you are training the second or third button, go directly to step 1.
Home
276 * Not available on all models
uuHomeLink® Universal Transceiver*uTraining HomeLink
Training a Button
1. Position the remote transmitter you wish to link 1 to 3 inches (3 - 8 cm) from the HomeLink button you want to program.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button and the button on the remote transmitter. Does the HomeLink indicator (LED) blink after 10 secs?
YES
NO
NO
3. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button for about a sec. Does the device (garage door opener) work?
a. Press and hold the remote and the HomeLink button at the same time. Then, while continuing to YES hold the HomeLink button, press and release the button on the remote every 2 secs. Does the LED blink within 20 secs?
YES
Training Complete
NO
4. Press and hold the HomeLink button again.
HomeLink LED HomeLink indicator blinks for 2 secs,
is on.
then remains on.
5. Press and hold the HomeLink button again. The remote-controlled device should operate. Training Complete
a. The remote has a rolling code. Press the "learn" button on the remote-controlled device (e.g. garage door opener).
b. Within 30 secs, press and hold the programmed HomeLink button for 2 secs.
1 Training a Button
Retraining a Button If you want to retrain a programmed button for a new device, you do not have to erase all button memory. You can replace the existing memory code using this procedure.
QRG
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the HomeLink indicator begins to blink.
Standard transmitter Indicator remains on
for about 25 secs.
Rolling code transmitter Indicator blinks rapidly for two secs, then remains on for about 23 secs.
TOC
Features
2. Continue to hold the HomeLink button and follow steps 1 - 3 under "Training a Button."
Erasing Codes To erase all the codes, press and hold the two outside buttons until the HomeLink indicator begins to blink (about 10 to 20 secs). You should erase all codes before selling the vehicle.
If you have any problems, see the device's instructions, visit www.homelink.com, or call HomeLink at (800) 355-3515.
Index
Home
277
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
QRG
Models without navigation system
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using your vehicle's audio system, without handling your cell phone.
Using HFL
HFL Buttons
1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing procedures, and special feature capabilities:
· U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
1-888-528-7876.
· Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call
1-888-528-7876.
Features
TOC Talk Button
Pick-up Button
Volume up
Microphone
Volume down
Hang-up Button Back Button
PHONE Button
Selector Knob
Index
(Pick-up) button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen or to answer an incoming call.
(Hang-up) button: Press to end a call. (Talk) button: Press to call a number with a stored voice tag.
(Back) button: Press to cancel a command. PHONE button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen. Selector knob: Rotate to select an item on the screen, then press .
Home
Voice control tips
· Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the
windows, as noise coming from them may interfere with the microphone.
· Press and release the button when you want to
call a number using a stored voice tag. Speak clearly and naturally after a beep.
· If the microphone picks up voices other than yours,
the command may be misinterpreted.
· To change the volume level, use the audio system's
volume knob or the remote audio controls on the steering wheel.
State or local laws may prohibit the operation of handheld electronic devices while operating a vehicle.
278
HFL Status Display
Bluetooth Indicator Comes on when your phone is connected to HFL. Roam Status Signal Strength
HFL Mode
The display shows call status and phone information.
Call Name
Battery Level Status
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL
1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® Bluetooth® Wireless Technology The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of such marks by Honda Motors Co., Ltd., is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
HFL Limitations An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio system when it is playing. It will resume when the call is ended.
1HFL Status Display The information that appears on the display varies between phone models.
You can change the system language to English, French, or Spanish.
2 Customized Features P. 90
Features
QRG TOC
Index
Home
279
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
QRG HFL Menus
The ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w to use HFL. PHONE or
PHONE
Speed Dial Display your speed dial entry lists. (up to 20 entries per paired phone)
1HFL Menus
To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetoothcompatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle is parked.
Features
TOC Index
Call History*1
All Calls Received Calls
Display the last 20 incoming, outgoing, or missed calls.
Display the last 20 incoming calls.
Dialed Calls Display the last 20 outgoing calls.
Phonebook*1
Missed Calls Display the last 20 missed calls.
Alphabet Search All Listings
Display the menu for an alphabetical search in the paired phone's phonebook.
Display the paired phone's phonebook.
Dial
Enter a phone number to dial.
Home
280
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus QRG
Redial
Redial the last number dialed in the phone's history.
Phone Setup
Connection
Add a New Phone Pair a phone to the system. TOC
Connect
Connect a phone to the system.
Features
Disconnect Delete
Disconnect a paired phone from the system.
Delete a previously paired phone.
Bluetooth PIN
Create a Bluetooth PIN number for a paired phone.
Index
Home
Continued 281
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus QRG
Features
TOC
Index Home
282
Edit Speed Dial
Store Speed Dial Delete Speed Dial
Select a number from the Call History, phonebook, or manual entry to store as a speed dial number.
Delete a previously stored speed dial number.
Store Voice Tag
Create a voice tag for a speed dial number.
Delete Voice Tag
Delete a voice tag for a speed dial number.
Security Code
Create a security code number for a paired phone.
Auto Answer Auto Transfer System Clear
Set incoming calls to be automatically answered.
Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you enter the vehicle.
Clear the system of all paired phones, phonebook entries, speed dials, and security codes.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
QRG
Phone Setup
To pair a cell phone (when there is no phone paired to the system) 1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
1Phone Setup
Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to HFL before you can make and receive hands-free calls.
2. Rotate to select Yes, then press .
3. Make sure your phone is in search or discoverable mode, then press . u HFL automatically searches for a Bluetooth device.
Phone Pairing Tips:
· You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is
moving.
· Up to six phones can be paired.
· Your phone's battery may drain faster when it is
paired to HFL.
· If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found
by the system within three minutes, the system will
TOC
time out and returns to idle.
Features
4. When your phone appears on the list, select it by pressing . u If your phone doesn't appear, select Phone Not Found? and search for Bluetooth devices using your phone. From your phone, select HandsFreeLink.
5. HFL gives you a four-digit pairing code to input on your phone. When your phone prompts you, input the four-digit pairing code.
6. You will receive a notification on the screen if pairing is successful.
Continued
Index
Home
283
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
QRG
To pair a cell phone (when a phone has already been paired to the system) 1. Press the PHONE button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press . 3. Rotate to select Connection, then press .
TOC 4. Rotate to select Add New Phone, then press .
Features
Index
Home
284
5. Rotate to select Empty (Add New), then press .
6. Make sure your phone is in search or discoverable mode, then press . u HFL automatically searches for a Bluetooth device.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus QRG
7. When your phone appears on the list, select it by pressing . u If your phone doesn't appear, select Phone Not Found? and search for Bluetooth devices using your phone. From your phone, select HandsFreeLink.
8. HFL gives you a four-digit pairing code to input on your phone. When your phone prompts you, input the four-digit pairing code.
9. You will receive a notification on the screen if pairing is successful.
Continued
Features
TOC
Index Home
285
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
QRG
To change the Bluetooth PIN setting
1. Press the PHONE button or the button. u Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .
2. Rotate to select Connection, then press .
3. Rotate to select Bluetooth PIN, then press .
1To change the Bluetooth PIN setting The default pairing code is 0000 until you change the setting.
To create your own, select Fixed, and delete the current code, then enter a new one.
For a randomly generated pairing code each time you pair a phone, select Random.
TOC
4. Rotate to select Fixed PIN or Random PIN, then press .
Features
Index
Home
286
5. If you select Fixed PIN, enter a new Bluetooth PIN. u Rotate to select, then press . Rotate to select , then press to delete.
To delete a paired phone
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select Connection, then Delete.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus QRG
3. Rotate to select a phone you want to
TOC
Features
delete, then press .
u The Bluetooth icon indicates the
currently linked phone.
4. You will receive a confirmation message on the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press . u You will receive a notification on the screen if it is successful.
Continued
Index
Home
287
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
QRG
To Create a Security Code
You can protect each of the six cell phones with a security PIN. 1. Press the PHONE button or the
button.
1To Create a Security Code
In the phone is already security code protected, you need to enter the current security code before clearing the code or creating a new one.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select Security Code.
3. Select a phone you want to add a security
code to.
TOC
u Rotate to select a phone you want to
add a security code to, then press .
Features
4. Enter a new four-digit number. u Rotate to select, then press . Rotate to select , then press to delete.
Index
Home
288
If the phone name you selected is security code protected the speed dial list becomes
.
Speed Dial List When Security Code-Protected
Automatic Answering
You can choose when the HFL system automatically answers incoming calls. 1. Press the PHONE button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select Auto Answer. 3. Rotate to select a mode you want, then press .
Automatic Transferring
If you get into the vehicle while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically transferred to HFL.
1. Press the PHONE button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press . u Repeat the procedure to select Auto
Transfer. 3. Press to select On or Off.
u The check box is checked when Auto Transfer On is selected. Select Auto Transfer On again to turn it off.
Continued
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus QRG
TOC
Index Home
289
Features
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
QRG
To Clear the System
Security codes, paired phones, all stored voice tags, all speed dial entries, and all imported phonebook data are erased.
1. Press the PHONE button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press . u Repeat the procedure to select System
Clear.
TOC
3. You will receive a notification message on the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press .
Features
Index
Home
290
4. You will receive a confirmation message on the screen.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook and call history are automatically imported to HFL.
1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When you select a person from the list in the cellular phonebook, you can see up to three category icons. The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored for that name.
Pref Home Mobile Work Pager
Fax Car Message Other Voice
If a name has four or more numbers, appears instead of category icons.
On some phones, it may not be possible to import the category icons to HFL.
The phonebook is updated after every connection. Call history is updated after every connection or call.
Features
QRG TOC
Continued
Index
Home
291
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
QRG
Speed Dial
Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone. To store a speed dial number: 1. Press the PHONE button or the
button.
Features
TOC
Index Home
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select Edit Speed Dial, then Store Speed Dial.
3. Rotate to select No Entry, then press .
4. Rotate to select a place to choose a number from, then press . By Phonebook: u Select a number from the linked cell phone's imported phonebook. By Call History: u Select a number from the call history. By Manual Entry: u Input the number manually.
5. When the speed dial is successfully stored, you are asked to create a voice tag for the number. Rotate to select Yes or No, then press .
6. Using the button, follow the prompts to say the name for the speed dial entry.
292
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
To add a voice tag to a stored speed dial number 1. Press the PHONE button or the
button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select Edit Speed Dial.
1Speed Dial
Avoid using duplicate voice tags. Avoid using "home" as a voice tag. It is easier for HFL to recognize a longer name. For example, use "John Smith" instead of "John."
QRG
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
4. Rotate to select Store Voice Tag, then
press .
5. Using the button, follow the prompts to
TOC
complete the voice tag.
Features
Continued
Index
Home
293
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
QRG
To delete a voice tag
TOC
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select Edit Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
4. Rotate to select Delete Voice Tag, then press .
5. You will receive a confirmation message on the screen.
Features
Index
To delete a speed dial number 1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select Edit Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
4. Rotate to select Delete Speed Dial, then press .
5. You will receive a confirmation message on the screen.
Home
294
Making a Call
You can make calls by inputting any phone number, or by using the imported phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or redial.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
1Making a Call Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by voice from any screen. Press the button and follow the prompts.
The maximum range between your phone and vehicles is 30 feet (10 meters).
Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of the person you are calling through the audio speakers.
QRG TOC
Features
Continued
Index
Home
295
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
QRG
To make a call using the imported phonebook When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook are automatically imported to HFL.
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phonebook, then press .
3. The phonebook is stored alphabetically. Rotate to select the initial, then press .
TOC
4. Rotate to select a name, then press .
5. Rotate to select a number, then press .
u Dialing starts automatically.
Features
Index
Home
296
To make a call using a phone number 1. Press the PHONE button or the
button.
2. Rotate to select Dial, then press .
3. Rotate to select a number, then press .
4. Rotate to select , then press . u Dialing starts automatically.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus QRG
To make a call using redial
1To make a call using redial
TOC
1. Press the PHONE button or the button. Press and hold the button to redial the last
Features
2. Rotate to select Redial, then press .
number dialed in your phone's history.
u Dialing starts automatically.
Continued
Index
Home
297
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
QRG TOC
To make a call using the call history Call history is stored by All Calls, Dialed Calls, Received Calls, and Missed Calls.
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Call History, then press . ,
3. Rotate to select All Calls, Dialed Calls Received Calls, or Missed Calls, then press .
1To make a call using the call history The call history displays the last 20 dialed, received, or missed calls. (Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.)
Some phones do not support All Calls.
4. Rotate to select a number, then press . u Dialing starts automatically.
To make a call using a speed dial entry 1. Press the PHONE button or the
button.
2. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press .
3. Rotate to select a number, then press . u Dialing starts automatically.
1To make a call using a speed dial entry On the Phone screen, the first six speed dials on the list can be directly selected by pressing the corresponding audio preset buttons (1-6).
Select Select another speed dial to view another paired phone's speed dial list. You can make a call from that list using the currently connected phone.
Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by voice from any screen. Press the button and follow the prompts.
Index
Home
298
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Receiving a Call
HFL Mode
Caller Name
When there is an incoming call, an audible notification sounds (if activated) and the Incoming Call screen appears.
Press the Press the
button to answer the call. button to decline or end the call.
1Receiving a Call Call Waiting. Press the button to put the current call on hold to answer the incoming call.
Press the button again to return to the current call.
Ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer it.
Press the button if you want to hang up the current call.
QRG TOC
Features
Continued
Index
Home
299
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
QRG
Options During a Call
1Options During a Call
The following options are available during a call.
Dial Tones: Available on some phones.
Mute: Mute your voice.
Transfer: Transfer a call from HFL to your phone.
Dial Tones: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call an automated phone system.
1. To view the available options, press the PHONE button.
2. Rotate to select the option, then
TOC
press .
Features
Index
Home
300
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Models with navigation system
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using your vehicle's audio system, without handling your cell phone.
Using HFL
HFL Buttons
1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing procedures, and special feature capabilities:
· U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
1-888-528-7876.
· Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888-
528 -7876.
Volume up
Microphone
Talk Button
Volume down
Pick-up Button Hang-up Button
(Back) Button
PHONE Button
Interface Dial
(Pick-up) button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen or to answer an incoming call.
(Hang-up) button: Press to end a call.
(Talk) button: Press to call a number with a stored voice tag. PHONE button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen.
(Back) button:Press to cancel a command. Interface dial: Rotate or move to select an item on the screen, then press .
Voice control tips
· Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the
windows, as noise coming from them may interfere with the microphone.
· Press and release the button when you want to
call a number using a stored voice tag. Speak clearly and naturally after a beep.
· If the microphone picks up voices other than yours,
the command may be misinterpreted.
· To change the volume level, use the audio system's
volume knob or the remote audio controls on the steering wheel.
State or local laws may prohibit the operation of handheld electronic devices while operating a vehicle.
Continued
Features
QRG
TOC
Index Home
301
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL
QRG
HFL Status Display
Battery Level Status Signal Strength Roam Status Bluetooth Indicator Comes on when your phone is connected to HFL. HFL Mode
The display shows call status and phone information.
TOC
Features
Call Name
1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® Bluetooth® Wireless Technology The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of such marks by Honda Motors Co., Ltd., is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
HFL Limitations An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio system when it is playing. It will resume when the call is ended.
1HFL Status Display The information that appears on the display varies between phone models.
You can change the system language to English, French, or Spanish.
2 Customized Features P. 90
Index
Home
302
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
HFL Menus
QRG
The ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w to use HFL.
1HFL Menus
You can operate HFL by voice when on the PHONE screen. Below is the flow chart showing available voice commands.
To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetoothcompatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle is parked.
Press the (Pick-Up) button to display the PHONE screen.
Press the (Talk) button each time you give a voice command.
"Phone Setup"
"Connection"
"Add New Phone" Pair your phone to the system.
"Connect" "Disconnect"
"Delete"
Switch from a currently linked phone to another paired phone.
Disconnect your paired phone from the system.
Delete a previously paired phone.
TOC
"Pass-Key"
Set a "fixed" or "random" pass-key code for phone pairing.
Features
"Edit Speed Dial"
"Phone Name/PIN" "Auto Transfer" "Auto Answer"
"Clear Phone Information"
"Store Voice Tag" "Delete Voice Tag" "Store Speed Dial" "Delete Speed Dial"
Create a voice tag for a speed dial number.
Delete a voice tag for a speed dial number. Select a number from Call History or Phonebook to store as a speed dial number. Delete a previously stored speed dial number.
"Phone Name" "PIN"
Create a user name for a paired phone. Create a PIN number for a paired phone.
Turn the auto transfer on or off.
Turn the auto answer on or off. Delete all paired phones, phonebook entries, speed dials, and pass-keys.
Continued
Index
Home
303
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus QRG
Press the (Pick-Up) button to display the Cellular Phone screen. Press the (Talk) button each time you give a voice command.
Features
TOC
Index Home
304
"Call History" "Phonebook"
"Dial"
"More Speed Dial" "Speed dial entries"
Display the last 30 incoming, outgoing, or missed calls.
Display the paired phone's previously imported phonebook (or import a new one).
Say a phone number to dial. "Dial Tones" "Mute" "Transfer"
"Dial"
Send numbers or names during a call. Mute your voice during a call. Transfer a call from HFL to your phone, or from your phone to HFL.
Display a list of all 20 speed dial entries.
"One" "Two" "Three" "Four"
The first four on the Cellular Phone screen.
Phone Setup
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
To pair a cell phone (when there is no phone paired to the system)
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Yes. Press .
3. Put your cell phone in Discovery or Search mode.
4. Select OK.
1Phone Setup Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to HFL before you can make and receive hands-free calls.
You can control the HFL system using voice commands.
2 HFL Menus P. 303
The maximum range between your phone and vehicle is about 30 feet (10 meters).
5. Select your phone in the list. u Select Phone Not Found? if your phone is not found. u Refer to your phone manual for instructions on searching for a Bluetoothr device.
6. Enter the 4-digit pairing code on your phone when prompted to complete the pairing process.
Phone Pairing Tips
· You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is
moving.
· Your phone must be in discovery or search mode
when pairing the phone. Refer to your phone's manual.
· Up to six phones can be paired. · Your phone's battery may drain faster when it is
paired to HFL.
· If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found
by the system within three minutes, the system will time out and returns to idle.
· The default pass-key "0000" is used until you
change the setting.
Pass-Key You can change the pass-key setting.
2 To change the Pass-key setting P. 307 You can delete the paired phone.
2 To delete a paired phone P. 308
Continued
Features
QRG
TOC
Index Home
305
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
QRG
To pair a cell phone (when a phone has already been paired to the system) 1. Press the PHONE button or the button. 2. Move to select PHONE SETUP.
3. Rotate
to select Connection, then press .
4. Rotate to select Add New Phone. press .
1To pair a cell phone (when a phone has already been paired to the system)
If a prompt appears asking to connect to a phone, select No and proceed with step 1.
5. Select the location (1-6) for the phone to be added.
TOC
6. Put your cell phone in Discovery or Search
mode.
Features
7. Select OK. u The system begins to search for your phone.
8. Select your phone in the list. u Select Phone Not Found? if your phone is not found. u Refer to your phone manual for instructions on searching for a Bluetoothr device.
Index
9. Enter the 4-digit pairing code on your phone when prompted to complete the pairing process.
Home
306
To change the Pass-key setting 1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Move to select PHONE SETUP.
3. Rotate
to select Connection, then press . 4. Rotate to select Pass-Key. Press .
5. Rotate to select an item. Press .
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus QRG
TOC
Features
The following items are available: · Random: Uses a randomly generated pass-key. · Fixed: Create your own pass-key.
Continued
Index
Home
307
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
QRG 6. If you select Fixed, move to select DELETE to remove the current pass-key. 7. Enter a new pass-key. Move to select OK.
To delete a paired phone TOC 1. Press the PHONE button or the
button.
Features
2. Move to select PHONE SETUP.
3. Rotate to select a Connection, then press .
4. Rotate to select Delete.
Index
Home
308
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Trash icon Bluetoothr icon
5. Rotate to select a phone to delete. press . u The Bluetoothr icon indicates the currently linked phone. u Items to be deleted are indicated with a trash icon.
6. Move to select OK.
7. Rotate to select Yes. Press to delete the device(s).
To change the currently paired phone 1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Move to select PHONE SETUP.
3. Rotate
to select Connection, then press . 4. Rotate to select Connect. Press .
5. Rotate to select a phone. Press . u HFL disconnects the linked phone and starts searching for another paired phone. If no other paired phone is found, HFL automatically links the previous phone.
6. Press to select OK.
1To change the currently paired phone
If no other phones are found or paired when trying to switch to another phone, HFL will inform you that the original phone is linked again.
Features
QRG TOC Index
Continued
Home
309
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
QRG
To Create Phone Name/PIN
1. Press the PHONE button or the button. 2. Move to select PHONE SETUP. 3. Rotate to select Phone Name/PIN, then press .
4. Rotate to select an item. Press .
TOC
1To Create Phone Name/PIN You can control the HFL system using voice commands. 2 HFL Menus P. 303
You can name up to six HFL users. Each can be PIN protected, and have their own phonebook, speed dial entries, and call history.
User name
Features
The following items are available: · Phone Name: Enter a name.
· PIN: Enter a 4-digit PIN. Re-enter to confirm. You can select DO NOT USE PIN to remove a PIN number.
PIN-protected speed dial
Index
Home
310
Automatic Transferring
If you get into the vehicle while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically transferred to HFL. 1. Press the PHONE button or the button. 2. Move to select PHONE SETUP. 3. Rotate to select Auto Transfer, then press . 4. Rotate to select On, then press .
Automatic Answering
You can choose when the HFL system automatically answers incoming calls. 1. Press the PHONE button or the button. 2. Move to select PHONE SETUP. 3. Rotate to select Auto Answer, then press . 4. Rotate to select a mode you want press .
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus QRG
TOC
Features
Continued
Index
Home
311
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
QRG
To Clear the System
All paired phones, phonebook entries, speed dials, and pass-keys are erased. 1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Move to select PHONE SETUP.
3. Rotate to select Clear Phone Information, then press . u If more than one phone is paired to the system, select the phone you want to
Features
clear. The Bluetooth icon indicates the currently linked phone. Move to select OK. TOC 4. Rotate to select Yes, then press . 5. You will receive a notification message on the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press .
6. You will receive a notification message on the screen. Rotate to finish.
Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
Up to 10,000 numbers for 1,000 names can be imported. Up to three icons are displayed for each phonebook entry. If there are more than three numbers for an entry, "..." is displayed.
When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook and call history are automatically imported to HFL.
Preference
Fax
Home
Car
Mobile
Voice
Index
Work Pager
Other
Home
312
This feature is not available on all phones.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
QRG
Speed Dial
To store a speed dial number: 1. Press the PHONE button or the button. 2. Move to select PHONE SETUP. 3. Rotate to select Edit Speed Dial, then press . 4. Rotate to select Store Speed Dial, then press .
5. Rotate to select a location in the speed dial list. Press .
1Speed Dial You can control the HFL system using voice commands. 2 HFL Menus P. 303
Up to 20 speed dial entries can be stored per user. The first four entries are displayed on the Cellular Phone screen.
TOC
Features
6. Rotate to select a number entry method. Press .
7. Follow the prompt to enter a voice tag.
Speed dial
You can select a No Entry field directly from the Cellular Phone screen to store a speed dial number.
The following options are available: · Phonebook: Adds a number from the imported phonebook. · Call History: Adds a number from the last 30 numbers. · Dial: Enters a number manually.
Continued
Index
Home
313
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
QRG
To add a voice tag to a stored speed dial number 1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Move to select PHONE SETUP. 3. Rotate to select Edit Speed Dial, then press .
4. Rotate to select Store Voice Tag. press .
5. Rotate to select a speed dial entry. press .
TOC
1To add a voice tag to a stored speed dial number
Voice tags allow you to call speed dial entries from
any screen by saying "Dial by voice tag" and the
voice tag followed by "Dial".
· Avoid using duplicate voice tags. · Avoid using "Home" as a voice tag. · It is easier for HFL to recognize a longer name (e.g.,
"John Smith" instead of "John").
Features
6. Follow the prompt to enter a voice tag.
Index
Home
314
To delete a voice tag 1. Press the PHONE button or the
button.
2. Move to select PHONE SETUP. 3. Rotate to select Edit Speed Dial, then press . 4. Rotate to select Delete Voice Tag. Press . 5. Rotate to select the number you want to delete the voice tag for. Move to
select OK.
To delete a speed dial number 1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Move to select PHONE SETUP.
3. Rotate to select Edit Speed Dial, then press .
4. Rotate 5. Rotate
to select Delete Speed Dial. Press . to select the entry you want to delete. Move
to select OK.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus QRG
TOC
Features
Continued
Index
Home
315
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
QRG
Making a Call
You can make calls by inputting any phone number, or by using the imported phonebook, call history, or speed dial entries.
1Making a Call You can control the HFL system using voice commands. 2 HFL Menus P. 303
When you say "Dial by number" or "Dial by voice tag" on most screens, the following screen appears:
TOC
Features
Index
Home
316
Say the phone number or the voice tag (e.g., "John Smith"), followed by "Dial".
2 To add a voice tag to a stored speed dial number P. 314
Only one phone can be used with HFL at a time. When there are more than two paired phones in the vehicle, a first paired phone the system finds will be automatically linked.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
To make a call using the imported phonebook When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook are automatically imported to HFL. 1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phonebook, then press .
1To make a call using the imported phonebook
You must first import a phonebook before using it to make calls.
2 Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History P. 312
QRG
3. Rotate to select a name. Press . u Move or to select alphabetical tabs to display the entries in the group.
4. Rotate to select a number. Press to
begin dialing.
TOC
Features
To make a call using a phone number 1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate
to select Dial, then press . 3. Enter a phone number.
4. Move to select DIAL to begin dialing.
1To make a call using a phone number
A command that consists of several words can be spoken together. For example, say "123-456-7890" at once.
Continued
Index
Home
317
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
QRG
To make a call using the call history Call history is stored by All, Dial, Receive, and Missed.
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
1To make a call using the call history
The call history only shows the last 30 calls from your phone.
2. Rotate
to select Call History, then press .
3. Rotate to select a call. Press to begin dialing. u Move or to select All, Dial, Receive, Missed to view the call history by category.
TOC
Features
To make a call using a speed dial entry 1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select one of the four speed dial numbers. Press
to begin dialing.
1To make a call using a speed dial entry
Select More Speed Dial to view another paired phone's speed dial list.
To make a call using speed dial, you need to create speed dial entries.
2 Speed Dial P. 313 If the other phone is PIN-protected, enter the PIN when prompted. Select OK. PINs are optional.
2 To Create Phone Name/PIN P. 310
Index
Home
318
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Receiving a Call
1. Press the (Pick-up) button to answer a call and display the Calling screen. u HANDSFREELINK is also displayed on the display.
2. Press the (Hang-up) button to terminate the call.
Options During a Call
The following options are available during a call. Mute: Mute your voice. Transfer: Transfer a call from HFL to your phone, or from your phone to HFL. Dial Tones: Send numbers or names during a call. This is useful when you call an automated phone system.
1. To view the available options, press the PHONE button.
2. Rotate to select the option, then press .
1Receiving a Call An incoming call notification appears on the screen, and you hear an audible ring tone.
If your phone has Call Waiting, press the button to put the original call on hold and answer the incoming call. To return to the original call, press the
button again. If you want to hang up the original call and answer the new call, press the button.
To change the volume level of HFL, use the audio system volume knob or the steering wheel volume controls.
Some phones may send battery, signal strength, and roaming status information to the screen.
Phonebook Displays the imported phonebook.
2 To make a call using the imported phonebook P. 317
1Options During a Call
Dial Tones: Available on some phones.
Features
QRG TOC Index
Home
319
Compass *
QRG
When you turn the ignition switch to ON (w, the compass self-calibrates, and the compass display appears.
Compass Calibration
If the compass indicates the wrong direction, or the compass display blinks, you need to manually calibrate the system.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w.
2. Press and hold the SETUP button until
the display shows the compass setting
TOC
menu list.
3. Rotate to select Calibration, then press .
Features
4. When the display changes to Start Calibration, press .
5. Drive the vehicle slowly in two circles. u The compass starts to show a direction after the calibration. The CAL indicator goes off.
1 Compass * Compass calibration can be affected under the following conditions:
· Driving near power lines or stations · Crossing a bridge · Passing a large vehicle, or driving near a large
object that can cause a magnetic disturbance
· When accessories such as antennas and roof racks
are mounted by magnets
On some models, the Compass Calibration screen is displayed but Calibration and Zone Adjust will not respond if selected.
1Compass Calibration Calibrate the compass in an open area.
While setting the compass:
· The RETURN button returns to the previous screen. · The SETUP button cancels the setting mode.
Index
Home
320 * Not available on all models
uuCompass*uCompass Zone Selection
Compass Zone Selection
QRG
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w.
1Compass Zone Selection
Zone Number
2. Press and hold the SETUP button until the display shows the compass setting menu list.
3. Rotate to select Zone Adjust, then press . The display shows the current zone number.
4. Rotate to select the zone number of your area (See Zone Map), then press .
The zone selection is done to compensate the variation between magnetic north and true north.
If the calibration starts while the audio system is in use, the display returns to normal after the calibration is completed.
TOC
Zone Map
Features
Guam Island: Zone 8 Puerto Rico: Zone11
Index
Home
321
QRG
Index Home
322
QRG
Driving
This chapter discusses driving, refueling, and information on items such as accessories.
Before Driving Driving Preparation .......................... 324 Maximum Load Limit........................ 327
Towing a Trailer Towing Preparation.......................... 329 Driving Safely with a Trailer .............. 338 Towing Your Vehicle ........................ 339
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines General Information......................... 340 Important Safety Precautions............ 340 Avoiding Trouble ............................. 341
When Driving Starting the Engine .......................... 342 Precautions While Driving................. 344
* Not available on all models
Automatic Transmission ................... 345 Shifting............................................ 346 Cruise Control ................................. 348 VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC
(Electronic Stability Control), System ...... 352 VTM (Variable Torque Management)-4r
System* ............................................. 354 TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)... 355 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) -
Required Federal Explanation ......... 357 Braking
Brake System ................................... 360 ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ........... 362
Brake Assist System ......................... 363 Parking Your Vehicle
When Stopped ................................ 364 Parking Sensor System* ................... 365 Rearview Camera*............................ 369 Multi-View Rear Camera* ................ 370 Refueling
Fuel Information .............................. 371
How to Refuel ................................. 372
Fuel Economy.................................... 374
Accessories and Modifications
Accessories ...................................... 375
Modifications................................... 375
Index
Home
323
Before Driving
QRG Driving Preparation
Check the following items before you start driving.
Exterior Checks
1Exterior Checks
· Make sure there are no obstructions on the windows, door mirrors, exterior lights, or other parts of the vehicle. u Remove any frost, snow, or ice. u Remove any snow on the roof, as this can slip down and obstruct your field of vision while driving. If frozen solid, remove ice once it has softened. u When removing ice from around the wheels, be sure not to damage the wheel or wheel components.
· Make sure the hood is securely closed. u If the hood opens while driving, your front view will be blocked.
NOTICE When doors are frozen shut, use warm water around the door edges to melt any ice. Do not try to force them open, as this can damage the rubber trim around the doors. When done, wipe dry to avoid further freezing.
Do not pour warm water into the key cylinder. You will be unable to insert key if the water freezes in the hole.
Driving
TOC · Make sure the tires are in good condition. u Check air pressures, and check for damage and excessive wear.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 414
· Make sure there are no people or objects behind or around the vehicle. u There are blind spots from the inside.
Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite flammable materials left under the hood, causing a fire. If you've parked your vehicle for an extended period, inspect and remove any debris that may have collected, such as dried grass and leaves that have fallen or have been carried in for use as a nest by a small animal. Also check under the hood for leftover flammable materials after you or someone else has performed maintenance on your vehicle.
Index
Home
324
uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation
Interior Checks
· Store or secure all items on board properly. u Carrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicle's handling, stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 327
· Do not pile items higher than the seat height. u They can block your view and may be thrown forward in the event of sudden braking.
· Do not place anything in the front seat footwells. Make sure to secure the floor mat. u An object or unsecured floor mat can interfere with your brake and accelerator pedal operation while driving.
· If you have any animals on board, do not let them move around in the vehicle. u They may interfere with driving and a crash could occur.
· Securely close and lock all doors and the tailgate.
2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 103
· Adjust your seating position properly. u Adjust the head restraint, too.
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 137 2 Adjusting the Head Restraints P. 141
· Adjust the mirrors and steering wheel properly for your driving. u Adjust them while sitting in the proper driving position.
2 Adjusting the Steering Wheel P. 134 2 Adjusting the Mirrors P. 135
1Interior Checks
The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry heavy items in the cargo area or tow a trailer, have the aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified technician.
Continued
Driving
QRG
TOC
Index Home
325
uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation
QRG · Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll under the seats. u They can interfere with the driver's ability to operate the pedals, the operation of the seats, or the operation of the sensors under the seats. · Everyone in the vehicle must fasten their seat belt. 2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 32 · Make sure that the indicators in the instrument panel come on when you start the vehicle, and go off soon after. u Always have a dealer check the vehicle if a problem is indicated. 2 Indicators P. 68
TOC
Index Home
326
Driving
uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit
Maximum Load Limit
The maximum load for your vehicle is 1,340 lbs (608 kg). See Tire and Loading Information label attached to the driver's doorjamb.
Label Example
1Maximum Load Limit
QRG
3 WARNING
Overloading or improper loading can affect handling and stability and cause a crash in which you can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other loading guidelines in this manual.
This figure includes the total weight of all occupants, cargo, and accessories, and the tongue load if you are towing a trailer.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit -
(1) Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1, 400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle, all occupants, all accessories, all cargo, and the tongue load.
2 Specifications P. 464
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle axle.
2 Specifications P. 464
Continued
Driving
TOC
Index Home
327
uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit
QRG (5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, accessories, cargo, and trailer tongue load must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVW R) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on the driver's doorjamb.
Load Limits Example TOC
Example1
Driving
Max Load 1,340 lbs (608 kg)
Example2
Passenger Weight 150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs (68 kg x 2 = 136 kg)
Cargo Weight 1,040 lbs (472 kg)
Index
Home
328
Max Load 1,340 lbs (608 kg)
Passenger Weight 150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs (68 kg x 5 = 340 kg)
Cargo Weight 590 lbs (268 kg)
Towing a Trailer
Towing Preparation
Towing Load Limits
Your vehicle can tow a trailer if you carefully observe the load limits, use the proper equipment, and follow the towing guidelines. Check the load limits before driving.
Total trailer weight Do not exceed the maximum allowable weight of the trailer, cargo, and everything in or on it shown in the table. Towing loads in excess of this can seriously affect vehicle handling and performance and can damage the engine and drivetrain.
Total Load
Number of occupants
2 3 4 5 6 7
8
4WD models
4,500 lbs (2,041 kg) 4,300 lbs (1,950 kg) 4,100 lbs (1,860 kg) 4,000 lbs (1,814 kg) 3,800 lbs (1,724 kg) 2,000 lbs (905 kg)
Towing not recommended
2WD models with ATF cooler
3,500 lbs (1,588 kg) 3,300 lbs (1,497 kg) 3,100 lbs (1,406 kg) 3,000 lbs (1,361 kg) 2,800 lbs (1,270 kg) 2,000 lbs (905 kg)
Towing not recommended
2WD models without ATF cooler
2,000 lbs (905 kg)
Towing not recommended
Each weight limit is calculated based on the following conditions: · Occupants fill seats from the front of the vehicle to the back · Each occupant weights 150 lbs (68 kg) · Each occupant has 15 lbs (7 kg) of cargo in the cargo area Any additional weight, cargo or accessories reduce the maximum trailer weight and maximum tongue load.
Continued
1Towing Load Limits
3 WARNING
Exceeding any load limit or improperly loading your vehicle and trailer can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Check the loading of your vehicle and trailer carefully before starting to drive.
Check if all loads are within limits at a public scale. If a public scale is not available, add the estimated weight of your cargo load to the weight of your trailer (as quoted by the manufacturer), and then measure the tongue load with an appropriate scale or tongue gauge or estimate it based on cargo distribution.
Refer to the trailer owner's manual for additional information.
Break-in Period Avoid towing a trailer during your vehicle's first 600 miles (1,000 km).
Never exceed the gross weight ratings. Gross weight information
2 Vehicle Specifications P. 464
Driving
QRG
TOC
Index Home
329
uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation
QRG
Tongue load The weight of the tongue with a fully loaded trailer on the hitch should be approximately:
Boat trailers: 5 - 10% of the total trailer weight
Other trailers: 8 - 15% of total trailer weight
TToonnggue LLooaadd
Number of occupants
4WD models
2WD models with
2WD models
ATF cooler
without ATF cooler
2
450 lbs (204 kg)
350 lbs (159 kg)
200 lbs (90 kg)
3
400 lbs (181 kg)
300 lbs (136 kg)
Driving
TOC
4
330 lbs (150 kg)
230 lbs (104 kg)
5
270 lbs (122 kg)
200 lbs (90 kg)
Towing not
6
190 lbs (86 kg)
150 lbs (68 kg)
recommended
7
100 lbs (45 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
8
Towing not recommended
Towing not recommended
Index
Home
330
To estimate the tongue load Excessive tongue load reduces front tire traction and steering control. Too little tongue load can make the trailer unstable and cause it to sway.
You can estimate the tongue load by measuring the trailer hitch height from the ground in the following steps:
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
2. Measure the distance between the ground and the bottom of the trailer hitch.
3. Connect the fully loaded trailer to the hitch.
4. Measure the distance between the ground and the bottom of the trailer hitch again.
5. Subtract the second measurement from the first measurement, then refer to the following table.
If the difference is 5/8" 1 1/4" 1 3/4" 2 1/4"
4WD models
2WD models
150 lbs (68 kg)
250 lbs (114 kg)
350 lbs (159 kg)
450 lbs (205 kg)
-
If the difference becomes more than indicated in the table, distribute the load or remove cargo as needed.
Continued
uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation QRG
TOC
Index Home
331
Driving
uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation
Driving
QRG TOC
How to weigh the trailer loads using the public scale Check each weight in the order indicated as shown. Refer to the table on the right for each weight's limit except for the tongue load.
2 Tongue load P. 330
1. Front gross axle weight.
4. Gross combined weight.
2. Gross vehicle weight. 3. Rear gross axle weight.
5. Hitched trailer weight. 6. Unhitched trailer weight.
· If you cannot weigh the rear axle, subtract 1 from 2.
· The maximum gross combined weight (4) decreases by 2% for every 1,000 feet (305 meters) of elevation.
· To calculate the tongue load, subtract 5 from 6. · Refer to the trailer owner's manual for additional information.
1How to weigh the trailer loads using the public scale
Fully load the vehicle and trailer. An attendant who watches the scale is needed as all occupants should stay in the vehicle.
Weight limit for 2WD models 4WD models
Front gross axle
2,921 lbs (1,325 kg)
Gross vehicle
5,952 lbs (2,700 kg)
6,096 lbs (2,765 kg)
Rear gross axle
3,196 lbs (1,450 kg)
3,362 lbs (1,525 kg) 3,252 lbs (1,475 kg)*
Gross combined
8,466 lbs (3,840kg)
9,579 lbs (4,345kg)
*: LX models
If a public scale is not available, add the estimated weight of your cargo load to the weight of your trailer (as quoted by the manufacturer), and then measure the tongue load with an appropriate scale or tongue gauge or estimate it based on cargo distribution.
Index
Home
332
uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation
Towing Equipment and Accessories
Your vehicle has a class 3 trailer hitch as standard equipment. The jumper harness and trailer brake fuse are stored in the glove box.
2 Trailer brakes P. 334 2 Trailer light P. 335
Turn the knob one-quarter left to open the cover.
u The 7-Pin trailer connector and trailer hitch are located.
Knob
7-Pin Trailer Connector
1Towing Equipment and Accessories Make sure that all equipment is properly installed and maintained, and that it meets federal, state, province/ territory, and local regulations.
Consult your trailer sales or rental agency if any other items are recommended or required for your towing situation.
The lighting and wiring of trailers can vary by type and brand. If a connector is required, it should only be installed by a qualified technician.
Trailer packages and products:
· Ball mount, hitch plug, hitch pin etc. · Wiring harness kit · Trailer hitch kit (jumper harness included)
2 Trailer brakes P. 334
2WD models
· Automatic transmission cooler kit
2 Automatic transmission cooler P. 337 Are available at a dealer.
Driving
QRG TOC
Trailer Hitch
Continued
Index
Home
333
uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation
QRG
Trailer brakes
1Trailer brakes
Recommended for any trailer with a total weight of 1,000 lbs (450 kg) or more: There are two common types of trailer brakes: surge and electric. Surge brakes are
The 4-pin gray connector is located under the instrument panel near the top of the parking brake
common for boat trailers, since the brakes will get wet.
pedal.
If you choose electric brakes, be sure they are electronically actuated. Do not attempt to attach trailer brakes to your vehicle's hydraulic system, as it will lower braking effectiveness and create a potential hazard.
The 4-pin gray connector installed in your vehicle has all of the circuits required to install most electric trailer brake controllers.
Trailer brake controller connector's terminals:
Have a qualified mechanic install your trailer brake controller following the trailer brake
Electric Brake
Brake (20A) controller manufacturer's instructions. Failure
(Brown/White) (Purple)
to properly install the trailer brake controller
TOC
may increase the distance it takes for you to
stop your vehicle when towing a trailer.
Driving
Ground (Black) Stop (Sky Blue)
Electric Brake (Brown/White)
Ground (Black)
Brake Lights (Sky Blue)
Touring models
The trailer jumper harness is used to install the controller for the electric trailer brakes. Insert the trailer brake fuse into the engine compartment sub fuse box.
2 Engine Compartment Sub Fuse Box P. 455
Index
Brake (20A) (Blue)
Home
334
uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation
Trailer light Trailer lights and equipment must comply with federal, state, province/territory, and local regulations. Check with your local trailer sales or rental agency for the requirements in the area where you plan to tow.
Pins' wiring color codes and their purposes: Left Turn Signal and Brake Lights (Red)
Taillights (Green)
Back-up Lights (Yellow)
Right Turn Signal and Brake Lights (White)
Electric Brake (Brown/White)
Ground (Black)
1Trailer light
The trailer lighting connector is located behind the left side panel in the cargo area. Even if you are planning to use the non-Honda trailer lighting harness and converter, ask a dealer for the correct connector and pins.
+B Charge (Blue)
Ground (Black)
We recommend that you have a dealer install a Honda wiring harness and converter. They are designed for your vehicle.
QRG TOC
Driving
Continued
Index
Home
335
uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation
QRG
Touring models
The 7-pin trailer connector is needed for your trailer lights. When inserting the connector to the socket, check if the connector and the socket are free of dirt, moisture, or other foreign material.
Pins' wiring color codes and their purposes:
1. Pull the socket lid to open.
Small Light (Green)
+B Charge
(Blue)
Socket
3. Hook the lid retaining tab onto the socket retaining tab.
Left Turn/ Stop (Red)
Right Turn/ Stop (White)
TOC Ground (Black)
Electric Brake (Brown/White)
Back Light
(Yellow)
2. Insert the 7-pin trailer connector into the socket.
Driving
Hitches Read the trailer manufacturer's instructions, and select the appropriate draw bar for the height of the trailer you will be towing.
Index
Weight distribution hitches A weight distributing hitch is not recommended for use with your vehicle. An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch may reduce handling, stability, and braking performance.
Home
336
Safety chains Always use safety chains when you tow a trailer. Leave enough slack to allow the trailer to turn corners easily, but do not allow the chains to drag on the ground.
Sway control Recommended to use if your trailer tends to sway. Consult the trailer maker for what kind of sway control you need and how to install it.
2WD models
Automatic transmission cooler Install an additional ATF (automatic transmission fluid) cooler to help prevent the transmission from overheating, and damaging. You can get the additional ATF cooler at a dealer.
Trailer mirrors Many states, provinces and territories require special exterior mirrors when towing a trailer. Install special mirrors whenever you cannot clearly see behind you, or if the trailer creates a blind spot.
uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation QRG
TOC
Driving
Index
Home
337
uuTowing a TraileruDriving Safely with a Trailer
QRG Driving Safely with a Trailer
Things You Need To Know Before Towing a Trailer
· Have the trailer properly serviced and keep it in good condition.
· Make sure that all the weights and load in the vehicle and trailer are within limits.
2 Towing Load Limits P. 329
1Driving Safely with a Trailer
Parking In addition to the normal precautions, place wheel chocks at each of the trailer's tires.
· When towing more than 3,500lbs (1,590 kg), use of gasoline with a pump octane number of 91 or higher is recommended. u Towing performance can be affected by high altitude, high temperature, or steep uphill.
· Securely attach the hitch, safety chains, and other necessary parts to the trailer.
· Securely store all the items in and on the trailer so that they do not shift while driving.
TOC · Check if the lights and brakes on the trailer are working properly.
· Check the pressures of the trailer tires, including the spare.
Driving
Towing Speeds and Gears
· Drive slower than normal. · Obey posted speed limits for vehicles with trailers. · Use the (D position when towing a trailer on level roads.
Index Home
Turning and Braking
· Turn more slowly and with a wider turning arc than normal. · Allow more time and distance for braking. · Do not brake or turn suddenly.
338
Driving in Hilly Terrain
· Monitor your temperature gauge. If it nears the red (Hot) mark, turn off the climate control system and reduce speed. Pull to the side of the road safely to cool down the engine if necessary.
· Shift to the (d position if the transmission shifts frequently.
Retrieving a Boat
If the tires slip when retrieving a boat from the water, shift to (1, and turn on VTM4r lock. Disengage VTM-4r lock as soon as the boat is out of the water to prevent damage to the VTM-4r system.
Towing Your Vehicle
Your vehicle is not designed to be towed behind a motor home. If your vehicle needs to be towed in an emergency, refer to the emergency towing information.
2 Emergency Towing P. 459
uuTowing a TraileruTowing Your Vehicle QRG
TOC
Driving
Index
Home
339
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
QRG General Information
Your vehicle has been designed primarily for use on pavement, however, its higher ground clearance allows you to occasionally travel on unpaved roads. It is not designed for trail-blazing, or other challenging off-road activities.
1Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
3 WARNING
If you decide to drive on unpaved roads, you will find that it requires somewhat different driving skills and that your vehicle will handle somewhat differently than it does on pavement. Pay attention to the precautions and tips in this section, and get acquainted with your vehicle before leaving the pavement.
Improperly operating this vehicle on or off pavement can cause a crash or rollover in which you and your passengers can be seriously injured or killed.
Important Safety Precautions
To avoid loss of control or rollover, be sure to follow all precautions and recommendations:
· Follow all instructions and guidelines in this owner's manual.
· Keep your speed low, and don't drive faster than conditions permit.
Driving
TOC · Be sure to store cargo properly and do not exceed your cargo load limits.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 327
· Whenever you drive, make sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts.
Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in a crash or a rollover.
2 Important Handling Information P. 26 2 Precautions While Driving P. 344
· Keep your speed low, and never go faster than the conditions allow.
· It's up to you to continually assess the situation and drive within the limits.
Index
Home
340
uuOff-Highway Driving GuidelinesuAvoiding Trouble
Avoiding Trouble
· Check Out Your Vehicle before you leave the pavement and make sure that all scheduled maintenance has been completed. Pay special attention to the condition of the tires, and check the tire pressures.
· Remember the route you choose presents limits (too steep or bumpy), you have limits (driving skill and comfort), and your vehicle has limits (traction, stability, and power). Failing to recognize these limits will likely put you and your passengers in a hazardous situation.
· Accelerating and Braking should be done slowly and gradually. Trying to start or stop too fast can cause a loss of traction and you could lose control.
· Avoiding Obstacles and Debris in the road reduces the likelihood of a rollover or damage to your suspension or other components.
· Driving on Slopes increasing your risk of a rollover, particularly if you attempt to drive across a slope that is too steep. Going straight or down a slope is usually the safest. If you can't clearly see all conditions or obstacles on a slope, walk it before you drive it. If there is any doubt whether you can safely pass, don't try it. Find another route. If you get stuck when climbing, do not try to turn around. Back down slowly following the same route you took up the hill.
· Crossing a Stream - Avoid driving through deep water. If you encounter water in your route (a small stream or large puddle, for example), evaluate it carefully before going ahead. Make sure it is shallow, flowing slowly, and has firm ground underneath. If you are not sure of the depth or the ground, turn around and find another route. Driving through deep water can also damage your vehicle. The water can get into the transmission and differential, diluting the lubricant and causing an eventual failure. It can also wash the grease out of the wheel bearings.
· If You Get Stuck, carefully go in the direction that you think will get you unstuck. Do not spin the tires as this will only make things worse and could damage the transmission. If you are unable to free yourself, your vehicle will need to be towed. Front and rear tow hooks are provided for this purpose.
Driving
QRG
TOC
Index Home
341
Driving
When Driving
QRG Starting the Engine
Brake Pedal TOC
Index Home
342
1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
1Starting the Engine
Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when starting the engine.
The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400 meters).
2. Check that the shift lever is in (P, then depress the brake pedal. u Although it is possible to start the vehicle in (N, it is safer to start it in (P.
When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all electrical accessories such as the lights, climate control system, and rear defogger in order to reduce battery drain.
If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold, an engine block heater will improve starting and warming of the engine. If temperatures consistently below -22°F (-30°C) are expected, the coolant mixture should be changed to a higher concentration to prevent freezing. Consult a dealer for details.
3. Turn the ignition switch to START (e without depressing the accelerator pedal.
If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with the engine or exhaust system.
Do not hold the key in START (e for more than 15 seconds.
· If the engine does not start right away, wait for at
least 10 seconds before trying again.
· If the engine starts, but then immediately stops,
wait at least 10 seconds before repeating step 3 while gently depressing the accelerator pedal. Release the accelerator pedal once the engine starts.
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
Starting to Drive
1. Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, release the parking brake. Check that the parking brake indicator has gone off.
2 Parking Brake P. 360
1Starting the Engine
The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from theft. If an improperly coded key (or other device) is used, the engine's fuel system is disabled.
2 Immobilizer System P. 118
QRG
2. Put the shift lever in (D. Select (R when reversing.
3. Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to pull away.
Hill start assist system Hill start assist keeps the brake engaged briefly to help prevent the vehicle from rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator.
1Hill start assist system Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and does not operate on small inclines.
Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking brake.
Move the shift lever to (D or (d when facing uphill, or (R when facing downhill,
Hill start assist will operate even when VSA® is
TOC
then release the brake pedal.
switched off.
Driving
Index
Home
343
uuWhen DrivinguPrecautions While Driving
QRG TOC
Precautions While Driving
Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle
1Precautions While Driving
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. To prevent rollovers or loss of control: · Take corners at slower speeds than you would with a passenger vehicle. · Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers whenever possible.
· Do not modify your vehicle in any way that you would raise the center of gravity.
· Do not carry heavy cargo on the roof.
NOTICE Do not operate the shift lever while pressing the accelerator pedal. You could damage the transmission.
If the ignition switch is turned to ACCESSORY (q or LOCK (0 while driving, the engine will shut down and all steering and brake power assist functions will stop, making it difficult to control the vehicle.
In Rain
Avoid driving in deep water and on flooded roads. This can damage the engine, driveline, or cause electrical component failure.
Do not put the shift lever in (N, as you will lose engine braking (and acceleration) performance.
During the first 600 miles (1,000 km) of operation, avoid sudden acceleration or full throttle operation so as not to damage the engine or powertrain.
Driving
Other Precautions
If there is a strong impact with something under the vehicle, stop in a safe location. Check the underside of the vehicle for damage or any fluid leaks.
Avoid hard braking for the first 200 miles (300 km). You should also follow this when the brake pads are replaced.
1Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle
Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in a crash or a rollover.
2 Important Handling Information P. 26 2 Precautions While Driving P. 344
Index
Home
344
Automatic Transmission
Creeping
The following conditions cause the engine to run at high revolutions, and increase creeping: · Immediately after the engine starts. · When the climate control system is in use. Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed when stopped.
Kickdown
Quickly depressing the accelerator pedal while driving uphill may cause the transmission to drop to a lower gear, unexpectedly increasing vehicle speed. Depress the accelerator pedal carefully, especially on slippery roads and curves.
uuWhen DrivinguAutomatic Transmission QRG
TOC
Driving
Index
Home
345
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
QRG Shifting
Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.
Shift lever positions
Release Button TOC
Driving
Index
(d Button
Park Used when parking or starting the engine
Reverse Used when reversing
Neutral Used when idling
Drive Used for normal driving (gears change between 1st and 5th automatically)
Second Used to increase engine braking (the transmission is locked in 2nd gear)
First Used to further increase engine braking (the transmission is locked in 1st gear)
Drive (D3) Press the (d button while the shift lever is in (D. Used when: Going up or down hills Towing a trailer in hilly terrain
1Shifting You cannot turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 and remove the key unless the shift lever is in (P.
The vehicle may move forward very slightly even in (N while the engine is cold. Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary, apply the parking brake.
Home
346
Shift Lever Operation
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Tachometer's red zone Shift Lever Position Indicator
Depress the brake pedal and press the shift lever release button to shift. Shift without pressing the shift lever release button. Press the shift lever release button and shift.
1Shift Lever Operation
NOTICE When you change the shift lever from (D to (R and vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the brake pedal depressed. Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come to a complete standstill can damage the transmission.
Use the shift lever position indicator to check the lever position before pulling away.
Whichever position the shift lever is in when driving, a blinking D indicator indicates a transmission problem. Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine speeds in or over the tachometer's red zone (engine speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a slight jolt.
It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release button is held down. Depress the brake pedal first.
Driving
QRG TOC
Index
Home
347
uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control
QRG Cruise Control
Maintains a constant vehicle speed without having to keep your foot on the accelerator. Use cruise control on freeways or open roads where you can travel at a constant speed with little acceleration or deceleration.
1Cruise Control
3 WARNING
When to use
Vehicle speed for cruise control:
Desired speed in a range above roughly 25 mph (40 km/h) ~
Always keep sufficient distance between you and the vehicle in front of you.
Improper use of the cruise control can lead to a crash.
Use the cruise control only when traveling on open highways in good weather.
Shift positions for cruise control:
In (D or (d
It may not be possible to maintain a constant speed when driving uphill or downhill.
TOC
When to use
CRUISE MAIN is on in the instrument panel.
Cruise control is ready to use.
When not using cruise control: Turn off cruise control by pressing the CRUISE button.
Driving
Press the CRUISE button
on the steering wheel.
Index
Home
348
To Set the Vehicle Speed
On
DECEL/SET Button
Press and release On
On when cruise control begins Take your foot off the pedal and press the DECEL/SET button when you reach the desired speed.
The moment you release the DECEL/SET button, the set speed is fixed, and cruise control begins. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes on.
uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control QRG
TOC
Driving
Continued
Index
Home
349
uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control
QRG
To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/ACCEL or DECEL/SET buttons on the steering wheel.
1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
You can set the vehicle speed using the DECEL/SET button on the steering wheel when adjusting the speed with the accelerator and brake pedals.
To increase speed
Driving
To decrease speed
TOC · Each time you press the button, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
· If you keep the button pressed, the vehicle speed increases or decreases until you release it. This speed is then set.
Index
Home
350
uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control
To Cancel
CRUISE Button
CANCEL Button
To cancel cruise control, do any of the following: · Press the CANCEL button. · Press the CRUISE button. · Depress the brake pedal. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator goes off.
1To Cancel Resuming the prior set speed: After cruise control has been canceled, you can still resume the prior set speed by pressing the RES/ ACCEL button while driving at a speed of at least 25 mph (40 km/h) or more.
You cannot set or resume in the following situations:
· When vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h) · When the CRUISE button is turned off
At vehicle speeds of 22 mph (35 km/h) or less, cruise control is canceled automatically.
QRG
TOC
Driving
Index
Home
351
uuWhen DrivinguVSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability Control), System
QRG VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability Control), System
1VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability
VSA® helps to stabilize the vehicle during cornering if the vehicle turns more or less than what was intended. It also assists in maintaining traction on slippery surfaces. It does so by regulating engine output and selectively applying the brakes.
Control), System
The VSA® may not function properly if tire type and size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and type of tire, and the air pressures as specified.
Driving
VSA® Operation
TOC
VSA® System
Indicator
When VSA® activates, you may notice that the engine does not respond to the accelerator. You may also notice some noise from the hydraulic system. You will also see the indicator blink.
When the VSA® indicator comes on and stays on while driving, there may be a problem with the system. While this may not interfere with normal driving, have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
VSA® cannot enhance stability in all driving situations and does not control the entire braking system. You still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate for the conditions and always leave a sufficient margin of safety.
The main function of the VSA® system is generally known as Electronic Stability Control (ESC). The system also includes a traction control function.
Index
Home
352
VSA® On and Off
VSA® OFF Indicator
uuWhen DrivinguVSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability Control), System
This button is on the driver side control panel. To turn the VSA® system on and off, press and hold it until you hear a beep.
1VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability Control), System
Without VSA®, your vehicle will have normal braking and cornering ability, but it will not have VSA® traction and stability enhancement.
VSA® will stop and the indicator will come on.
To turn it on again, press the (VSA® OFF) button until you hear a beep.
VSA® is turned on every time you start the engine, even if you turned it off the last time you drove the vehicle.
In certain unusual conditions when your vehicle gets stuck in shallow mud or fresh snow, it may be easier to free it with the VSA® temporarily switched off.
When the VSA® system is off, the traction control system is also off. You should only attempt to free your vehicle with the VSA® off if you are not able to free it when the VSA® is on.
Immediately after freeing your vehicle, be sure to switch VSA® on again. We do not recommend driving your vehicle with the VSA® and traction control systems switched off.
If the low tire pressure/TPMS, low tire pressure, or TPMS indicator comes on or blinks, the VSA® system comes on automatically. In this case, you cannot turn
the system off by pressing the button.
You may hear a motor sound coming from the engine compartment while system checks are being performed immediately after starting the engine or while driving. This is normal.
Driving
QRG TOC Index
Home
353
Driving
uuWhen DrivinguVTM (Variable Torque Management)-4r System*
QRG VTM (Variable Torque Management)-4r System*
Senses a traction loss caused by a road condition change, and automatically transfers some power to the rear wheels.
To Engage the VTM-4r LOCK
Use the VTM-4r LOCK to increase more torque to the rear wheels. 1. Stop your vehicle with the engine running. 2. Move the shift lever to (1, (2, or (R. 3. Press the VTM-4r LOCK button.
u The indicator in the button comes on.
To Disengage the VTM-4r LOCK
TOC Any of the following disengages the VTM-4r LOCK: · Pressing the VTM-4r LOCK button again. · Moving the shift lever to (D or (d. · Turning the ignition switch to the LOCK (0 position.
Index
Home
354 * Not available on all models
1VTM (Variable Torque Management)-4r System*
NOTICE Do not continuously spin the front tires of your vehicle. Continuously spinning the front tires can cause transmission or rear differential damage.
1To Engage the VTM-4r LOCK Do not use the VTM-4r LOCK button on dry, paved roads. Driving on dry, paved roads with VTM-4r LOCK on may damage the rear differential when making a turn. Strange noise and vibration can also result.
The VTM-4r LOCK can be used to help free your vehicle from being stuck in mud, sand, or gravel. When the lock is engaged, apply light pressure to the accelerator pedal.
When more torque is applied, the rear tires are not likely to spin. This is normal.
If you are not able to free the vehicle, stop and reverse direction.
As soon as this feature is no longer needed, disengage the VTM-4r LOCK.
1To Disengage the VTM-4r LOCK The VTM-4r LOCK temporarily disengages when the vehicle speed exceeds 18 mph (30 km/h). The indicator in the button remains on.
uuWhen DrivinguTPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
Models with information display
Monitors the tire pressure while you are driving. If your vehicle's tire pressure becomes significantly low, the low tire pressure indicator comes on.
1TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
Models with information display
Conditions such as low ambient temperature and altitude change directly affect tire pressure and can trigger the low tire pressure indicator to come on.
2 If the Low Tire Pressure Indicator Comes On P. 452
Models with multi-information display
Monitors the tire pressure while you are driving. If your vehicle's tire pressure becomes significantly low, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on and a message appears on the multi-information display.
Tire pressure checked and inflated in:
· Warm weather can become under-inflated in
colder weather.
· Cold weather can become over-inflated in warmer
weather. The low tire pressure indicator will not come on as a result of over inflation.
Models with multi-information display
Conditions such as low ambient temperature and altitude change directly affect tire pressure and can trigger the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to come on.
2 If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks P. 453
Tire pressure checked and inflated in:
· Warm weather can become under-inflated in
colder weather.
· Cold weather can become over-inflated in warmer
weather. The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator will not come on as a result of over inflation.
Continued
Driving
QRG
TOC
Index Home
355
uuWhen DrivinguTPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
QRG
Tire Pressure Monitor
Models with information display
If your vehicle's tire pressure becomes significantly low, the specific tire indicator
comes on.
Models with multi-information display
To select the tire pressure monitor, turn the
ignition switch to ON (w, and press the
/
(information) button until you see the tire
pressure screen.
The pressure for each tire is displayed in PSI (U.S.) or kPa (Canada).
1Tire Pressure Monitor
Models with multi-information display
The pressure displayed on the multi-information display can be slightly different from the actual pressure as measured by a gauge. If there is a significant difference between the two values, or if the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator and the message on the multi-information display do not go off after you have inflated the tire to the specified pressure, have the system checked by a dealer.
CHECK TPMS SYSTEM may appear if you drive with the compact spare tire, or there is a problem with the TPMS.
TOC
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE is displayed when a
tire has significantly low pressure. The specific
tire is displayed on the screen.
Driving
Index
Home
356
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) -
QRG
Required Federal Explanation
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more tires is significantly under-inflated.
Driving
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure tell tale illuminates, you should
TOC
stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
Continued
Index
Home
357
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation
QRG Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Models with information display
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is provided by a separate telltale, which displays the symbol "TPMS" when illuminated.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TOC TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Index
Home
358
Driving
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation
QRG
Models with multi-information display
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle startups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
TOC
that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Driving
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Index
Home
359
Braking
QRG Brake System Parking Brake
Use the parking brake to keep the vehicle stationary when parking. To apply: Depress the parking brake pedal down with your foot.
To release: 1. Depress the brake pedal. TOC 2. Pull the release handle fully.
1Parking Brake
NOTICE Release the parking brake fully before driving. The rear brakes and axle can be damaged if you drive with the parking brake applied.
If you start driving without fully releasing the parking brake, a buzzer sounds as a warning, and RELEASE PARKING BRAKE appears on the multi-information display *.
Always apply the parking brake when parking.
Driving
Index
Home
360 * Not available on all models
uuBrakinguBrake System
Foot Brake
Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes at all four wheels. A vacuum power assist helps reduce the effort needed on the brake pedal. The brake assist system increases the stopping force when you depress the brake pedal hard in an emergency situation. The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps you retain steering control when braking very hard.
2 Brake Assist System P. 363 2 ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) P. 362
1Foot Brake Check the brakes after driving through deep water, or if there is a buildup of road surface water. If necessary, dry the brakes by lightly depressing the pedal several times.
If you hear a continuous metallic friction sound when applying the brakes, the brake pads need to be replaced. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
Constantly using the brake pedal while going down a long hill builds up heat, which reduces the brake effectiveness. Apply engine braking by taking your foot off the accelerator pedal and downshifting to a lower gear.
Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving, as it will lightly apply the brakes and cause them to lose effectiveness over time and reduce pad life. It will also confuse drivers behind you.
Driving
QRG TOC
Index
Home
361
uuBrakinguABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
QRG ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
ABS
Helps prevent the wheels from locking up, and helps you retain steering control by pumping the brakes rapidly, much faster than you.
1ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
NOTICE The ABS may not function correctly if you use an incorrect tire type and size.
Driving
The electronic brake distribution (EBD) system, which is part of the ABS, also balances the front-to-rear braking distribution according to vehicle loading.
You should never pump the brake pedal. Let the ABS work for you by always keeping firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. This is sometimes referred to as "stomp and steer."
ABS operation The brake pedal may pulsate slightly when the ABS is working. Keep holding the TOC pedal firmly down. On dry pavement, you will need to press on the brake pedal very hard before the ABS activates. However, you may feel the ABS activate immediately if you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
When the vehicle speed goes under 6 mph (10 km/h), the ABS stops.
When the ABS indicator comes on while driving, there may be a problem with the system. While normal braking is not affected, there is a possibility of the ABS not operating. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
The ABS does not reduce the time or distance it takes to stop the vehicle. It only helps with steering control during hard braking.
In the following cases, your vehicle may need more stopping distance than a vehicle without the ABS:
· When driving on rough road surfaces, including
when driving on uneven surfaces, such as gravel or snow.
· When tire chains are installed.
You may hear a motor sound coming from the engine compartment while system checks are being performed immediately after starting the engine or while driving. This is normal.
Index
Home
362
Brake Assist System
Designed to assist the driver by generating greater braking force when you depress the brake pedal hard during emergency braking.
Brake assist system operation Press the brake pedal firmly for more powerful braking.
When brake assist operates, the pedal may wiggle slightly and an operating noise may be heard. This is normal. Keep holding the brake pedal firmly down.
uuBrakinguBrake Assist System QRG
TOC
Driving
Index
Home
363
Parking Your Vehicle
QRG When Stopped
1. Depress the brake pedal firmly with the shift lever in (D. 2. Firmly apply the parking brake. 3. Move the shift lever from (D to (P. 4. Turn off the engine. Always set the parking brake firmly, in particular if you are parked on an incline.
TOC
1Parking Your Vehicle Do not park your vehicle near flammable objects, such as dry grass, oil, or timber. Heat from the exhaust can cause a fire.
1When Stopped
NOTICE The following can damage the transmission:
· Depressing the accelerator and brake pedals
simultaneously.
· Holding the vehicle in place when facing uphill by
depressing the accelerator pedal.
· Moving the shift lever into (P before the vehicle
stops completely.
Raise the wiper arms when snow is expected.
Driving
Index
Home
364
uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System*
Parking Sensor System*
The corner and rear center sensors monitor obstacles around your vehicle, and the beeper and display let you know the approximate distance between your vehicle and the obstacle.
The sensor location and range
Front Corner Sensors Rear Corner Sensors
Rear Center Sensors
1Parking Sensor System*
Even when the system is on, always confirm if there is no obstacle near your vehicle before parking.
The system may not work properly when:
· The sensors are covered with snow, ice, mud, or
dirt.
· The vehicle is on an uneven surface, such as grass,
bumps, or a hill.
· The vehicle has been out in hot or cold weather. · The system is affected by some electric devices that
generate ultrasonic waves.
· Driving in bad weather.
Within about 60 cm (24 in) or less
Within about 110 cm (43 in) or less
The system may not sense:
· Thin or low objects. · Sonic-absorptive materials, such as snow, cotton,
or sponge.
· Objects directly under the bumper.
Do not put any accessories on or around the sensors.
Driving
QRG TOC
* Not available on all models
Continued
Index
Home
365
uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System*
QRG
When you activate the system
1Parking Sensor System*
When you turn the ignition switch to ON (w, the system will be in the previously selected condition.
Beep
Driving
Parking Sensor System
TOC
Button:
Press to activate the
system with the ignition
switch in ON (w.
The indicator in the button comes on and the beeper sounds when the system is on.
The corner sensors start to detect an obstacle when the shift lever is in any position other than (P, and the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
The rear center sensors start to detect an obstacle when the shift lever is in (R, and Index the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Home
366 * Not available on all models
uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System*
When the distance between your vehicle and obstacles behind becomes shorter
Length of the intermittent
beep
Distance between the Bumper and Obstacle
Corner Sensors
Center Sensors
Appropriate Indicator
Long Short Very short
--
About 43-24 in (110-60 cm)
About 24-18 in (60-45 cm) About 24-18 in (60-45 cm)
About 18-14 in (45-35 cm) About 18-14 in (45-35 cm)
Multiinformation display
Navigation screen
Continuous About 14 in (35 cm) or less About 14 in (35 cm) or less
QRG
Navigation screen indicator
color Yellow Amber Amber
Red
Stays on
Blinks
TOC
Driving
* Not available on all models
Index
Home
Continued 367
uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System*
QRG
The parking sensor system on navigation screen · An appropriate indicator blinks when there are any obstacles around the parking sensors. The color of the indicator changes in accordance with the distance between your vehicle and obstacles.
· An appropriate indicator stays on in red when there is a problem with the corresponding parking sensor.
2 Multi-Information Display Warning and Information Messages* P. 78
TOC Turning off All Rear Sensors
1Turning off All Rear Sensors
Driving
1. Make sure that the parking sensor system is not activated. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0.
2. Press and hold the parking sensor system button, and turn the ignition switch to
When you shift to (R, the indicator in the parking sensor system button blinks as a reminder that the rear sensors have been turned off.
ON (w.
3. Keep pressing the button for ten seconds. Release the button when the indicator in the button flashes.
4. Press the button again. The indicator in the button goes off. u The beeper sounds twice. The rear sensors are now turned off.
Index To turn the rear sensors on again, follow the above procedure. The beeper sounds three times when the rear sensors come back on.
Home
368 * Not available on all models
Rearview Camera*
About Your Rearview Camera
Models without navigation system
The audio/information screen can display your vehicle's rear view. The display automatically changes to a rear view when the shift lever is moved to (R .
Rearview Camera Display Area
Screen display Guidelines
Bumper
Approx. 118 in (3 m)
Approx. 79 in (2 m) Approx. 39 in (1 m)
Camera Approx. 20 in (0.5 m) Tailgate Open Range Approx. 39 in (1 m) Approx. 79 in (2 m)
Approx. 118 in (3 m)
1About Your Rearview Camera The rear camera view is restricted. You cannot see the corner ends of the bumper or what is underneath the bumper. Its unique lens also makes objects appear closer or farther than they actually are.
Visually confirm that it is safe to drive before backing up. Certain conditions (such as weather, lighting, and high temperatures) may also restrict the rear view. Do not rely on the rearview display which does not give you all information about conditions at the back of your vehicle.
To turn the guide lines on or off, press and hold the RETURN button for about three seconds. If you turn the guide lines off, they remain off until you turn them back on.
Rotate to adjust the brightness of the rearview camera.
If the camera lens is covered with dirt or moisture, use a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free of debris.
Driving
QRG TOC
* Not available on all models
Index
Home
369
Multi-View Rear Camera*
QRG About Your Multi-View Rear Camera
Models with navigation system
For models with the navigation system, see the Navigation System Manual.
TOC
Index Home
370 * Not available on all models
Driving
Refueling
Fuel Information
Fuel recommendation
1Fuel Information
QRG
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher
NOTICE
Use of lower octane gasoline can cause a persistent, heavy metallic knocking noise that can lead to engine damage.
We recommend quality gasoline containing detergent additives that help prevent fuel system and engine deposits. In addition, in order to maintain
Top tier detergent gasoline
good performance, fuel economy, and emissions control, we strongly recommend the use of gasoline
Because the level of detergency and additives in gasoline vary in the market, Honda endorses the use of "TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline" where available to help maintain the performance and reliability of your vehicle. TOP TIER Detergent
that does NOT contain harmful manganese-based fuel additives such as MMT, if such gasoline is available.
Gasoline meets a new gasoline standard jointly established by leading automotive manufacturers to meet the needs of today's advanced engines.
Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely affect performance, and cause the malfunction
Qualifying gasoline retailers will, in most cases, identify their gasoline as having met
indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on. If this happens, contact a dealer for service.
"TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline" standards at the retail location. This fuel is
TOC
Driving
guaranteed to contain the proper level of detergent additives and be free of metallic
additives. The proper level of detergent additives, and absence of harmful metallic
additives in gasoline, help avoid build-up of deposits in your engine and emission
control system.
For further important fuel-related information for your vehicle, or on information on gasoline that does not contain MMT, visit www.hondacars.com. In Canada, visit www.honda.ca for additional information on gasoline. For more information on top tier gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com.
Continued
Index
Home
371
uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel
QRG
Gasoline containing ethanol Some gasoline today is blended with oxygenates such as ethanol. Your vehicle is designed to operate on oxygenated gasoline containing up to 10% ethanol by volume. Do not use gasoline containing methanol. If you notice any undesirable operating symptoms, try another service station or switch to another brand of gasoline.
Fuel tank capacity: 21.0 US gal (79.5 liters)
Driving
How to Refuel
TOC Pull
1. Stop your vehicle with the service station pump on the left side of the vehicle in the rear.
2. Turn off the engine.
3. Pull on the fuel fill door release handle under the lower left corner of the dashboard. u The fuel fill door opens.
1How to Refuel
3 WARNING
Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive. You can be burned or seriously injured when handling fuel.
· Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks, and flame away.
· Handle fuel only outdoors. · Wipe up spills immediately.
Index
Home
372
Cap Cap
Holder
uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel
4. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly. If you hear a release of air, wait until this stops, then turn the knob slowly to open the fuel fill cap.
1How to Refuel
The filler nozzle automatically stops to leave space in the fuel tank so that fuel does not overflow as a result of changes in air temperature.
5. Place the fuel fill cap in the holder.
6. Insert the fuel filler nozzle fully. u When the tank is full, the filler nozzle will click off automatically. This leaves space in the fuel tank in case the fuel expands with a change in the temperature.
7. After filling, replace the fuel fill cap, tightening it until you hear it click at least once. u Shut the fuel fill door by hand.
If the fuel filler nozzle keeps turning off when the tank is not full, there may be a problem with the pump's fuel vapor recovery system. Try filling at another pump. If this does not fix the problem, consult a dealer.
Do not continue to add fuel after the nozzle has automatically stopped. Additional fuel can exceed the full tank capacity.
Driving
QRG TOC
Index
Home
373
Fuel Economy
QRG Improving Fuel Economy
Fuel economy depends on several conditions, including driving conditions, your driving habits, the condition of your vehicle, and loading. Depending on these and other conditions, you may or may not achieve the rated fuel economy of this vehicle.
1Improving Fuel Economy
Direct calculation is the recommended method to determine actual fuel consumed while driving.
Maintenance and Fuel Economy
You can optimize your fuel economy with proper maintenance of your vehicle. Always maintain your vehicle in accordance with the messages displayed on the information display*/multi-information display*. · Use the recommended viscosity engine oil, displaying the API Certification Seal.
· Maintain the specified tire pressure.
· Do not load the vehicle with excess cargo. TOC · Keep your vehicle clean. A buildup of snow or mud on your vehicle's underside
adds weight and increases wind resistance.
Miles driven 100
Gallons of fuel
Liter
Miles per Gallon
Kilometers
L per 100 km
In Canada, posted fuel economy numbers are established following a simulated test. For more information on how this test is performed, please visit http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/
Driving
Index
Home
374 * Not available on all models
Accessories and Modifications
Accessories
QRG
When installing accessories, check the following:
1Accessories and Modifications
· Do not install accessories on the windshield. They can obstruct your view and delay your reaction to driving conditions.
3 WARNING
· Do not install accessories on the side pillars or across the side windows. Accessories installed in these areas may interfere with proper operation of the side curtain airbags.
Improper accessories or modifications can affect your vehicle's handling, stability, and performance, and cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
· Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits or interfere with proper operation of your vehicle.
2 Fuses P. 454
· Before installing any electronic accessory, have the installer contact a dealer for
Follow all instructions in this owner's manual regarding accessories and modifications.
assistance. If possible, have a dealer inspect the final installation.
Honda Genuine accessories are recommended to
ensure proper operation on your vehicle. TOC
Modifications
Driving
Do not modify your vehicle or use non-Honda components that can affect its handling, stability, and reliability.
Overall vehicle performance can be affected. Always make sure all equipment is properly installed and maintained, and that it meets federal, state, province, territory, and local regulations.
Index
Home
375
QRG
Index Home
376
QRG
Maintenance
This chapter discusses basic maintenance.
Before Performing Maintenance Inspection and Maintenance ............ 378 Safety When Performing Maintenance..... 379 Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service ........................................... 380
Maintenance MinderTM .................... 381 Maintenance Under the Hood
Maintenance Items Under the Hood..... 389 Opening the Hood ........................... 390 Recommended Engine Oil ................ 392 Oil Check ......................................... 393 Adding Engine Oil ............................ 394 Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter ..... 395
* Not available on all models
Engine Coolant ................................ 397 Transmission Fluid............................ 399 Brake Fluid....................................... 400 Power Steering Fluid ........................ 400 Refilling Window Washer Fluid......... 401 Replacing Light Bulbs ....................... 402 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades ....410 Checking and Maintaining Tires Checking Tires ................................. 414 Tire and Loading Information Label ...... 415 Tire Labeling .................................... 415 DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles).......417 Wear Indicators................................ 419
Tire Service Life................................ 419 Tire and Wheel Replacement ........... 420 Tire Rotation.................................... 421 Winter Tires ..................................... 422 Battery............................................... 423 Remote Transmitter Care Replacing the Button Battery ........... 424 Remote Control and Wireless Headphone Care* ........................... 425 Climate Control System Maintenance .....427 Cleaning
Interior Care .................................... 428 Exterior Care.................................... 430
Index
Home
377
Before Performing Maintenance
QRG Inspection and Maintenance
For your safety, perform all listed inspections and maintenance to keep your vehicle in good condition. If you become aware of any abnormality (noise, smell, insufficient brake fluid, oil residue on the ground, etc.), have your vehicle inspected by a dealer. (Note, however, that service at a dealer is not mandatory to keep your warranties in effect.) Refer to the separate maintenance booklet for detailed maintenance and inspection information.
1Inspection and Maintenance
U.S. models
Maintenance, replacement, or repair of emissions control devices and systems may be done by any automotive repair establishment or individuals using parts that are "certified" to EPA standards.
Maintenance
Types of Inspection and Maintenance
Daily inspections Perform inspections before long distance trips, when washing the vehicle, or when refueling.
Periodic inspections · Check the automatic transmission fluid level monthly.
2 Automatic Transmission Fluid P. 399
TOC · Check the brake fluid level monthly.
2 Checking the Brake Fluid P. 400
· Check the tire pressure monthly. Examine the tread for wear and foreign objects.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 414
· Check the operation of the exterior lights monthly.
2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 402
According to state and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on the maintenance main items marked with # will not void your emissions warranties. However, all maintenance services should be performed in accordance with the intervals indicated by the information display*/multiinformation display*.
2 Maintenance Service Items P. 383
If you want to perform complex maintenance tasks that require more skills and tools, purchase the service manual.
2 Authorized Manuals P. 474
If you want to perform maintenance yourself, make sure that you have the necessary tools and skills first. After performing maintenance, update the records in the separate maintenance booklet.
Index
· Check the condition of the wiper blades at least every six months.
2 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 410
Home
378 * Not available on all models
uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuSafety When Performing Maintenance
Safety When Performing Maintenance
Some of the most important safety precautions are given here. However, we cannot warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in performing maintenance. Only you can decide whether or not you should perform a given task.
Maintenance Safety
· To reduce the possibility of fire or explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, and flames away from the battery and all fuel related parts.
· Never leave rags, towels, or other flammable objects under the hood. u Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite them causing a fire.
· To clean parts, use a commercially available degreaser or parts cleaner, not gasoline.
· Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working with the battery or compressed air.
· Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide, which is poisonous and can kill you. u Only operate the engine if there is sufficient ventilation.
1Safety When Performing Maintenance
3 WARNING
Improperly maintaining this vehicle or failing to correct a problem before driving can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection and maintenance recommendations according to the schedules in this owner's manual.
3 WARNING
Failure to properly follow maintenance instructions and precautions can cause you to be seriously hurt or killed.
Vehicle Safety
· The vehicle must be in a stationary condition. u Make sure your vehicle is parked on level ground, the parking brake is set, and the engine is off.
· Be aware that hot parts can burn you. u Make sure to let the engine and exhaust system cool thoroughly before touching vehicle parts.
· Be aware that moving parts can injure you. u Do not start the engine unless instructed, and keep your hands and limbs away from moving parts.
Always follow the procedures and precautions in this owner's manual.
Maintenance
QRG
TOC Index Home
379
uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuParts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
QRG Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
The use of Honda genuine parts and fluids is recommended when maintaining and servicing your vehicle. Honda genuine parts are manufactured according to the same high quality standards used in Honda vehicles.
TOC
Index Home
380
Maintenance
Maintenance MinderTM
If the engine oil life is less than 15%, you will see the Maintenance Minder messages appear on the information display* or the multi-information display* every time you turn the ignition switch to ON (w. The messages notify you when to change the engine oil, or when to bring your vehicle to a dealer for indicated maintenance services.
Models with information display
To Use Maintenance MinderTM
Displaying the Engine Oil Life
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w.
2. Press the (Select/Reset) knob repeatedly until the engine oil life appears on the information display.
The Maintenance Minder indicator ( ) stays on in the instrument panel after the engine oil life becomes 0%. Have the indicated maintenance done by a dealer immediately.
1Displaying the Engine Oil Life
Based on the engine operating conditions, the remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed as a percentage.
Displayed Engine Oil Life (%) 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 15 10 5 0
Calculated Engine Oil Life (%) 100 to 91 90 to 81 80 to 71 70 to 61 60 to 51 50 to 41 40 to 31 30 to 21 20 to 16 15 to 11 10 to 6 5 to 1 0
* Not available on all models
Continued
Maintenance
QRG
TOC Index Home
381
uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
QRG
Maintenance Minder Messages on the Information Display
To switch the display, press the (Select/Reset) knob.
Oil Life Display
Explanation
Information
Maintenance Minder Indicator
The engine oil life indicator starts to appear along with other due soon maintenance item codes when the remaining oil life becomes 15 percent.
The SERVICE message also starts to appear along with the engine oil life indicator and the maintenance item codes.
The engine oil is approaching the end of its service life.
The engine oil has almost reached the end of its service life, and the maintenance items should be inspected and serviced as soon as possible.
Starts to come on when the remaining engine oil life becomes 15 percent. It goes off when the display is switched.
The remaining engine oil life has The engine oil life has passed.
TOC
passed its service life, and a
The maintenance items must be
Maintenance
negative distance appears after inspected and serviced
driving over 10 miles (U.S. models) immediately. or 10 km (Canadian models). The negative distance on the display
Stays on as a reminder even when the display is switched.
blinks.
Index
Home
382
Maintenance Service Items
Maintenance Minder Indicator
uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
Maintenance Minder Message Main Item
1Maintenance Service Items
· Independent of the Maintenance Minder
information, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.
· Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000
km).
· Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if
they are noisy.
QRG
Sub Items
CODE A B
Maintenance Main Items Replace engine oil*1
Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter Inspect front and rear brakes/service as necessary Check parking brake adjustment Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots Inspect suspension components Inspect driveshaft boots Inspect brake hoses and lines (Including ABS/VSA) Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids Inspect exhaust system# Inspect fuel lines and connections#
*1: If a message SERVICE does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.
*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 15,000 miles (24,000 km). *3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km). # : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty.
* Not available on all models
CODE 1 2
3 4
5 6
Maintenance Sub Items Rotate tires Replace air cleaner element*2 Replace dust and pollen filter*3 Inspect drive belt Replace transmission and transfer* fluid Replace spark plugs Replace timing belt and inspect water pump*4 Inspect valve clearance Replace engine coolant Replace VTM-4r* rear differential fluid*5
*4: If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over 110ºF, 43ºC), in very low temperatures (under -20ºF, -29ºC), or tow a trailer, replace every 60,000 miles/100,000 km.
*5: Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds or trailer towing results in higher level of mechanical (shear) stress to fluid. This requires differential fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the differential fluid changed at 7,500 miles (12,000 km), then every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
Continued
Maintenance
TOC
Index Home
383
uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
QRG TOC
Resetting the Display
Reset the engine oil life display if you have performed the maintenance service.
Reset Mode Initial Display
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w.
2. Display the engine oil life by repeatedly pressing the (Select/Reset) knob.
Oil Life
3. Press and hold the knob for ten seconds or more. u The information display shows the reset mode initial display.
Outside Temperature*
4. Press and hold the knob for five seconds or more. u The displayed maintenance items disappear and the engine oil life display will return to 100%.
1Resetting the Display
NOTICE Failure to reset the engine oil life after a maintenance service results in the system showing incorrect maintenance intervals, which can lead to serious mechanical problems.
The dealer will reset the engine oil life display after completing the required maintenance service. If someone other than a dealer performs maintenance service, reset the engine oil life display yourself.
Maintenance
Index
Home
384 * Not available on all models
uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
Models with multi-information display
To Use Maintenance MinderTM
Displaying the Engine Oil Life
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w.
2. Press the
/ button repeatedly until the engine oil life appears on the
multi-information display.
Engine Oil Life SEL/RESET Button
1Displaying the Engine Oil Life
Based on the engine operating conditions, the remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed as a percentage.
Displayed Engine Oil Life (%) 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 15 10 5 0
Calculated Engine Oil Life (%) 100 to 91 90 to 81 80 to 71 70 to 61 60 to 51 50 to 41 40 to 31 30 to 21 20 to 16 15 to 11 10 to 6 5 to 1 0
There is a list of maintenance main and sub items you can view on the multi-information display.
2 Maintenance Service Items P. 387
Maintenance
QRG TOC
Continued
Index
Home
385
uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
QRG
Maintenance Minder Messages on the Multi-Information
Display
Maintenance Message SERVICE DUE SOON
Oil Life Display 15%
Explanation
Information
The remaining engine oil life is 15 to The engine oil is approaching the end
6 percent. Once you switch the
of its service life, and the maintenance
display by pressing the
/
items should be inspected and serviced
(information) button, this message soon.
will go off.
SERVICE DUE NOW
5%
The remaining engine oil life is 5 to 1 The engine oil has almost reached the
percent. Press the
/ button end of its service life, and the
to switch to another display.
maintenance items should be inspected
and serviced as soon as possible.
Maintenance
TOC
SERVICE PAST DUE
Negative Distance
The remaining engine oil life has The engine oil life has passed. passed its service life, and a negative The maintenance items must be distance appears after driving over inspected and serviced immediately.
10 miles (U.S. models) or 10 km
(Canadian models). Press the
/
button to switch to another display.
Index The system message indicator ( ) comes on along with the Maintenance Minder message.
Home
386
Maintenance Service Items
Maintenance Minder Message
uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
System Message Indicator
1Maintenance Service Items
· Independent of the Maintenance Minder
information, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.
· Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000
km).
· Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3
only if they are noisy.
QRG
Main Item
Sub Items
CODE A B
Maintenance Main Items Replace engine oil*1
Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter Inspect front and rear brakes/service as necessary Check parking brake adjustment Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots Inspect suspension components Inspect driveshaft boots Inspect brake hoses and lines (Including ABS/VSA) Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids Inspect exhaust system# Inspect fuel lines and connections#
*1: If a message SERVICE does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.
*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 15,000 miles (24,000 km). *3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km). # : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty.
* Not available on all models
CODE 1 2
3 4
5 6
Maintenance Sub Items Rotate tires Replace air cleaner element*2 Replace dust and pollen filter*3 Inspect drive belt Replace transmission and transfer* fluid Replace spark plugs Replace timing belt and inspect water pump*4 Inspect valve clearance Replace engine coolant Replace VTM-4r* rear differential fluid*5
*4: If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over 110ºF, 43ºC), in very low temperatures (under -20ºF, -29ºC), or tow a trailer, replace every 60,000 miles/100,000 km.
*5: Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds or trailer towing results in higher level of mechanical (shear) stress to fluid. This requires differential fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the differential fluid changed at 7,500 miles (12,000 km), then every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
Continued
Maintenance
TOC
Index Home
387
uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
QRG
Resetting the Display
Reset the engine oil life display if you have performed the maintenance service.
Maintenance Item Codes Engine Oil Life
1Resetting the Display
NOTICE Failure to reset the engine oil life after a maintenance service results in the system showing incorrect maintenance intervals, which can lead to serious mechanical problems.
The dealer will reset the engine oil life display after completing the required maintenance service. If someone other than a dealer performs maintenance service, reset the engine oil life display yourself.
/ (information) Button
TOC
SEL/RESET
Button
Maintenance
Index
Home
388
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w.
2. Display the engine oil life by repeatedly pressing the SEL/RESET button.
3. Press and hold the SEL/RESET button for 10 seconds or more. u The oil life reset mode is displayed on the multi-information display.
4. Select RESET with the
/ button, then press the SEL/RESET button.
u The service code will disappear and the engine oil life display will return to 100%.
To cancel the oil life reset mode, select CANCEL, then press the SEL/RESET button.
Maintenance Under the Hood
Maintenance Items Under the Hood
Engine Oil Fill Cap Engine Oil Dipstick (Orange Loop) Washer Fluid (Blue Cap)
Power Steering Fluid (Red Cap)
Engine Coolant Reservoir
Radiator Cap
QRG
Brake Fluid (Black Cap)
Battery TOC
Maintenance
Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick (Yellow Loop)
Index
Home
389
uuMaintenance Under the HooduOpening the Hood
QRG Opening the Hood
Hood Release Handle Pull
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and set the parking brake.
2. Pull the hood release handle under the lower left corner of the dashboard. u The hood will pop up slightly.
1Opening the Hood
NOTICE Do not open the hood when the wiper arms are raised.
The hood will strike the wipers, and may damage either the hood or the wipers.
3. Push up the hood latch lever in the center of the hood to release the lock mechanism, and open the hood.
When closing the hood, check that the hood is securely latched.
If the hood latch lever moves stiffly, or if you can open the hood without lifting the lever, the latch mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated.
Lever
Maintenance
TOC
Index Home
390
Grip Support Rod Clamp
4. Remove the support rod from the clamp using the grip. Mount the support rod in the hood.
When closing, remove the support rod, and stow it in the clamp, then gently lower the hood. Remove your hand at a height of approximately 12 inches (30 cm) and let the hood close.
uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Compartment Covers
Engine Compartment Covers
QRG
The component parts in the engine compartment are protected by two covers.You may need to remove the covers when you perform certain maintenance work.To remove the covers:
1Engine Compartment Covers
When removing the clip, insert a flat-tip screwdriver, then lift and remove the center pin.
Center pin
Bulkhead Cover Remove the holding clips.
When mounting the clip, insert while keeping the center pin of the clip raised, then push until the pin is flat.
TOC Push until the pin is flat.
Index Home
391
Maintenance
uuMaintenance Under the HooduRecommended Engine Oil
QRG Recommended Engine Oil
· Genuine Honda Motor Oil · Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil with an API Certification Seal on the
container.
Oil is a major contributor to your engine's performance and longevity. If you drive the vehicle with insufficient or deteriorated oil, the engine may fail or be damaged.
1Recommended Engine Oil
Engine Oil Additives Your vehicle does not require oil additives. In fact, they may adversely affect the engine performance and durability.
This seal indicates the oil is energy conserving and that it meets the American Petroleum Institute's latest requirements.
Use a Genuine Honda Motor Oil or another commercial engine oil of suitable viscosity for the ambient temperature as shown.
TOC
Maintenance
Ambient Temperature
Index
Synthetic oil You may also use synthetic motor oil if it is labeled with the API Certification Seal and is the specified viscosity grade.
Home
392
Oil Check
We recommend that you check the engine oil level every time you refuel.
Park the vehicle on level ground.
Wait approximately three minutes after turning the engine off before you check the oil.
1. Remove the dipstick (orange loop).
2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth or paper towel.
3. Insert the dipstick back all the way into its hole.
uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check
1Oil Check
If the oil level is near or below the lower mark, slowly add oil being careful not to overfill.
QRG
Maintenance
4. Remove the dipstick again, and check the level. It should be between the upper and lower marks. Add oil if necessary. TOC
Upper Mark Lower Mark
Index
Home
393
uuMaintenance Under the HooduAdding Engine Oil
QRG Adding Engine Oil
Engine Oil Fill Cap
1. Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap.
2. Add oil slowly.
3. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and tighten it securely.
4. Wait for three minutes and recheck the engine oil dipstick.
1Adding Engine Oil If any oil spills, wipe it up immediately. Spilled oil may damage the engine compartment components.
NOTICE Do not fill the engine oil above the upper mark. Overfilling the engine oil can result in leaks and engine damage.
Maintenance
TOC
Index Home
394
uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
QRG
You must change the engine oil and oil filter regularly in order to maintain the engine's lubrication. The engine may be damaged if they are not changed regularly.
Change the oil and filter in accordance with the maintenance message on the information display*/multi-information display*.
Drain Bolt
1. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature, and then turn the engine off.
1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
NOTICE You may damage the environment if you do not dispose of the oil in a suitable way. If you are changing the oil by yourself, appropriately dispose of the used oil. Put the oil in a sealed container and take it to a recycling center. Do not throw the oil away into a garbage can or onto the ground.
2. Open the hood and remove the engine oil fill cap.
Washer
3. Remove the drain bolt and washer from the bottom of the engine, and drain the oil into a suitable container.
TOC
Maintenance
* Not available on all models
Continued
Index
Home
395
uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
Maintenance
QRG
TOC Index Home
396
Oil Filter
4. Remove the oil filter and dispose of the remaining oil.
5. Check that the filter gasket is not stuck to the engine contact surface. u If it is stuck, you must detach it.
6. Wipe away dirt and dust adhering to the contact surface of the engine block, and install a new oil filter. u Apply a light coat of new engine oil to the filter gasket.
7. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then reinstall the drain bolt. u Tightening torque: 29 lbfft (39 Nm, 4.0 kgfm)
8. Pour the recommended engine oil into the engine. u Engine oil change capacity (including filter): 4.5 US qt (4.3 L)
9. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap securely and start the engine.
10. Run the engine for a few minutes, and then check that there is no leak from the drain bolt or oil filter.
11. Stop the engine, wait for three minutes, and then check the oil level on the dipstick. u If necessary, add more engine oil.
1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter You will need a special wrench to replace the oil filter. You can buy this wrench from a dealer.
When installing the new oil filter, follow the instructions supplied with the oil filter.
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap. Start the engine. The low oil pressure indicator should go off within five seconds. If it does not, turn off the engine, and check your work.
uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant
Engine Coolant
Specified coolant: Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2
This coolant is premixed with 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Do not add any straight antifreeze or water.
We recommend you check the engine coolant level every time you refuel. Check the reserve tank first. If it is completely empty, also check the coolant level in the radiator. Add the engine coolant accordingly.
Reserve Tank
MAX
Reserve
Tank
MIN
1. Check the amount of coolant in the reserve tank.
2. If the coolant level is below the MIN mark, add the specified coolant until it reaches the MAX mark.
3. Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
1Engine Coolant
NOTICE If temperatures consistently below -22°F (-30°C) are expected, the coolant mixture should be changed to a higher concentration. Consult a dealer for more information.
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may use another major brand non-silicate coolant as a temporary replacement. Check that it is a high quality coolant recommended for aluminum engines. Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result in corrosion, causing the cooling system to malfunction or fail. Have the cooling system flushed and refilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as possible.
Do not add rust inhibitors or other additives to your vehicle's coolant system. They may not be compatible with the coolant or with the engine components.
QRG TOC
Maintenance
Continued
Index
Home
397
uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant
QRG
Radiator
Radiator Cap
TOC
1. Make sure the engine and radiator are cool.
2. Turn the radiator cap counterclockwise and relieve any pressure in the coolant system. Do not push the cap down when turning.
3. Push down and turn the radiator cap counterclockwise to remove it.
4. The coolant level should be up to the base of the filler neck. Add coolant if it is low.
5. Put the radiator cap back on, and tighten it fully.
6. Pour coolant into the reserve tank until it reaches the MAX mark. Put the cap back on the reserve tank.
1Radiator
3 WARNING
Removing the radiator cap while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator cap.
NOTICE Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can damage components in the engine compartment.
Maintenance
Index
Home
398
uuMaintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid
Transmission Fluid
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Specified fluid: Honda ATF DW-1 (automatic transmission fluid)
Check the fluid level when the engine is at normal operating temperature. 1. Park on level ground, and start the engine.
2. Wait until the radiator fan starts and then turn off the engine. u Perform step 3 after waiting for about 60 seconds (less than 90 seconds).
HOT Range
Upper Mark Lower Mark
3. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) from the transmission and wipe it with a clean cloth.
4. Insert the dipstick all the way back into the transmission securely, as shown in the image.
1Automatic Transmission Fluid
NOTICE Do not mix Honda ATF DW-1 with other transmission fluids. Using a transmission fluid other than Honda ATF DW-1 may adversely affect the operation and durability of your vehicle's transmission, and damage the transmission.
Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that is not equivalent to Honda ATF DW-1 is not covered by Honda's new vehicle warranty.
NOTICE Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can damage components in the engine compartment.
5. Remove the dipstick and check the fluid level. u It should be between the upper and lower marks in the HOT range.
6. If the level is below the lower mark, add fluid into the dipstick hole to bring it to the level between the upper and lower marks, and have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
Maintenance
QRG
TOC Index
Home
399
uuMaintenance Under the HooduBrake Fluid
QRG
Brake Fluid
Specified fluid: Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3
Checking the Brake Fluid
The fluid level should be between the MIN and MAX marks on the side of the reservoir.
MIN MAX
Brake Reservoir
1Brake Fluid
NOTICE Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your vehicle's braking system and can cause extensive damage.
If the specified brake fluid is not available, you should use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid from a sealed container as a temporary replacement.
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the longevity of the system. Have the brake system flushed and refilled with Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible.
Power Steering Fluid
Maintenance
TOC
Index Home
Specified fluid: Honda Power Steering Fluid
We recommend that you check the power steering fluid level every time you refuel. Check when the engine is not running.
UPPER LEVEL
1. Look at the side of the reservoir. The fluid should be between the UPPER LEVEL and
LOWER LEVEL.
LOWER LEVEL
2. Add power steering fluid if necessary to the UPPER LEVEL mark. u Inspect the system for a leak. If the fluid level goes below the LOWER LEVEL frequently, have the system inspected as soon as possible.
400
If the brake fluid level is at or below the MIN mark, have a dealer inspect for leaks or worn brake pads as soon as possible.
1Power Steering Fluid
NOTICE Turning the steering wheel to full left or right lock and holding it there can damage the power steering pump.
NOTICE Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill any. Clean up any spills immediately; it could damage components in the engine compartment.
uuMaintenance Under the HooduRefilling Window Washer Fluid
Refilling Window Washer Fluid
Models without washer level sensor
Check the amount of window washer fluid.
If the level is low, fill the washer reservoir.
1Refilling Window Washer Fluid
NOTICE Do not use engine antifreeze or a vinegar/water solution in the windshield washer reservoir. Antifreeze can damage your vehicle's paint. A vinegar/water solution can damage the windshield washer pump.
QRG
Models with washer level sensor
If the washer fluid is low, the washer level indicator* appears on the instrument panel or a message appears on the multi-information display*.
Pour the washer fluid carefully. Do not overflow the reservoir. TOC
Maintenance
* Not available on all models
Index
Home
401
Replacing Light Bulbs
Maintenance
QRG TOC
Headlight Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs. High beam headlight: 60W (HB3) Low beam headlight: 55 W (H11)
High Beam Headlight
Bulb
Driver's side
1. Remove the clips using a flat-tip screwdriver, then remove the upper part of the air intake duct.
2 Engine Compartment Covers P. 391
Coupler
Driver and passenger side
2. Push the tab to remove the coupler.
Tab
3. Rotate the old bulb to the left to remove.
4. Insert a new bulb into the headlight assembly and turn it to the right.
5. Insert the coupler into the connector of the bulb.
1Headlight Bulbs
NOTICE Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause the bulb to overheat and shatter.
The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry heavy items in the cargo area or tow a trailer, have the aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified technician.
The HB3 and H11 types are halogen bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle it by its base, and protect the glass from contact with your skin or hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.
The exterior lights' inside lenses (headlights, brake lights, etc.) may fog temporarily after a car wash or while driving in the rain. This does not impact the exterior light function.
However, if you see a large amount of water or ice accumulated inside the lenses, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
Index
Home
402
uuReplacing Light BulbsuFog Light Bulbs*
Low Beam Headlights
Bulb
Tab
Coupler
Driver's side
1. Remove the clips using a flat-tip screwdriver, then remove the upper part of the air intake duct.
2 Engine Compartment Covers P. 391
Driver and passenger side
2. Push the tab to remove the coupler.
3. Rotate the old bulb to the left to remove.
4. Insert a new bulb into the headlight assembly and turn it to the right.
Fog Light Bulbs*
5. Insert the coupler into the connector of the bulb.
When replacing, use the following bulbs. Fog Light: 55 W (H11)
1. Remove the clips using a flat-tip
Clip
screwdriver, and pull down the under
cover.
1Fog Light Bulbs*
NOTICE Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause the bulb to overheat and shatter.
The fog lights are halogen bulbs.
When replacing a bulb, handle it by its plastic case, and protect the glass from contact with your skin or hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.
* Not available on all models
Continued
Maintenance
QRG
TOC Index Home
403
uuReplacing Light BulbsuSide Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Light Bulbs*
QRG Tab
Bulb
2. Push the tab to remove the coupler. 3. Rotate the old bulb to the left to remove. 4. Insert new bulb.
1Fog Light Bulbs* Insert a flat-tip screwdriver, lift and remove the center pin to remove the clip.
Center pin
Coupler
Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Light Bulbs*
Door mirrors have the side turn lights. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light bulbs.
Insert the clip with the center pin raised, and push until it is flat.
TOC
Push until the pin is flat.
Maintenance
Index
Home
404 * Not available on all models
uuReplacing Light BulbsuFront Turn Signal/Parking Light and Front Side Marker Light Bulbs
Front Turn Signal/Parking Light and
QRG
Front Side Marker Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
Front Turn Signal/Parking Light: 28/8 W (Amber) Front Side Marker Light: 3CP
1. Turn the socket to the left and remove it.
2. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.
Bulb
Socket TOC
Maintenance
Index
Home
405
uuReplacing Light BulbsuBrake Light, Taillight, Back-Up Light, Rear Turn Signal Light and Rear Side Marker Light Bulbs
QRG Brake Light, Taillight, Back-Up Light, Rear Turn Signal Light and Rear Side Marker Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs. Brake/Taillight: 21/5 W Back-Up Light: 18 W Rear Turn Signal/Taillight: 21/5 W Rear Side Marker Light: 5 W
1. Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to remove the bolts.
Bolts
TOC
2. Loosen the assembly by carefully prying on
the top and side edges.
u Wrap the flat-tip screwdriver with a cloth
to prevent scratches.
Maintenance
Index
Home
406
uuReplacing Light BulbsuBrake Light, Taillight, Back-Up Light, Rear Turn Signal Light and Rear Side Marker Light Bulbs
QRG
3. Turn the socket to the left and remove it.
Bulb
Remove the old bulb.
Socket 4. Insert a new bulb.
5. Reinstall the light assembly by sliding it into the hole on the body.
Maintenance
TOC
Index Home
407
uuReplacing Light BulbsuRear License Plate Light Bulb
QRG Rear License Plate Light Bulb
When replacing, use the following bulb. Rear License Plate Light: 5 W
1. Remove the lens by prying on the edge of the lens using a flat-tip screwdriver. u Wrap the flat-tip screwdriver with a cloth to prevent scratches.
Bulb TOC
2. Remove the old bulb. 3. Insert a new bulb.
Lens
Maintenance
Index
Home
408
uuReplacing Light BulbsuHigh-Mount Brake Light Bulb
High-Mount Brake Light Bulb
QRG
When replacing, use the following bulb.
High-Mount Brake Light: 5 W
Lens Segment Screw
1. Remove the lens segment by prying on the edge using a flat-tip screwdriver. u Wrap the flat-tip screwdriver with a cloth to prevent scratches.
2. Remove the screw under each lens.
Bulb
3. Pull the high-mount brake light assembly
out of the vehicle.
4. Remove the two mounting screws from the
light assembly.
TOC
5. Remove the lens from the light assembly.
6. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.
Maintenance
Index
Home
409
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades
QRG Checking Wiper Blades
If the wiper blade rubber has deteriorated, it will leave streaks and the metal wiper arm may scratch the window glass.
Changing the Wiper Blade Rubber
1. Lift the driver side wiper arm first, then the passenger side.
1Changing the Wiper Blade Rubber
NOTICE Avoid dropping the wiper arm; it may damage the windshield.
Maintenance
TOC
Tab Index Home
410
2. Press and hold the tab, then slide the blade from the wiper arm.
uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Wiper Blade Rubber
QRG 3. Slide the wiper blade out from its holder by
pulling the tabbed end out.
Blade
Retainer Blade
4. Remove the retainers from the rubber blade that has been removed, and mount to a new rubber blade.
Indent Tab
5. Slide the new wiper blade onto the holder from the bottom end. u The tab on the holder should fit in the indent of the wiper blade.
6. Slide the wiper blade onto the wiper arm until it clicks.
7. Lower the passenger side wiper arm first, then the driver side.
Maintenance
TOC
Index Home
411
uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber
QRG Changing the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber
1. Raise the wiper arm off.
1Changing the Wiper Blade Rubber
Wiper Arm
2. Pivot the bottom end of the wiper blade up until it comes off from the wiper arm.
NOTICE Avoid dropping the wiper blade, it may damage the rear window.
Wiper Blade
3. Slide the blade out of the wiper.
Blade TOC
Retainer
4. Remove the retainers from wiper blade and mount it to a new rubber blade.
Maintenance
Index
Home
412
Rubber
uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber QRG
5. Slide the new wiper blade onto the holder. u Make sure it is engaged correctly, then install the wiper blade assembly onto the wiper arm.
TOC
Index Home
413
Maintenance
Checking and Maintaining Tires
QRG Checking Tires
To safely operate your vehicle, your tires must be of the proper type and size, in good condition with adequate tread, and properly inflated.
Inflation guidelines Properly inflated tires provide the best combination of handling, tread life, and comfort. Refer to the driver's doorjamb label or specification's page for the specified pressure.
Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from overheating.
Overinflated tires make your vehicle ride harshly, are more prone to road hazards, and wear unevenly.
Every day before you drive, look at each of the tires. If one looks lower than the others, check the pressure with a tire gauge.
Maintenance
At least once a month or before long trips, use a gauge to measure the pressure in all tires, including the spare. Even tires in good condition can lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to 20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm2) per month.
TOC
Inspection guidelines Every time you check inflation, also examine the tires and valve stems.
Look for:
· Bumps or bulges on the side or in the tread. Replace the tire if you find any cuts, splits, or cracks in the side of the tire. Replace it if you see fabric or cord.
· Remove any foreign objects and inspect for air leaks.
Index
Home
414
· Uneven tread wear. Have a dealer check the wheel alignment. · Excessive tread wear.
2 Wear Indicators P. 419
· Cracks or other damage around valve stem.
1Checking Tires
3 WARNING
Using tires that are excessively worn or improperly inflated can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner's manual regarding tire inflation and maintenance.
Measure the air pressure when tires are cold. This means the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). If necessary, add or release air until the specified pressure is reached.
If checked when hot, tire pressure can be as much as 46 psi (3040 kPa, 0.30.4 kgf/cm2) higher than if checked when cold.
Have a dealer check the tires if you feel a consistent vibration while driving. New tires and any that have been removed and reinstalled should be properly balanced.
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Loading Information Label
Tire and Loading Information Label
The label attached to the driver's doorjamb provides necessary tire and loading information.
Label Example
2
3
4
1Tire and Loading Information Label
The tire and loading information label attached to the driver's doorjamb contains: a The number of people your vehicle can carry. b The total weight your vehicle can carry. Do not
exceed this weight. c The original tire sizes for front, rear, and spare. d The proper cold tire pressure for front, rear, and
spare.
QRG
Tire Labeling
Example
Tire Size Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Maximum Tire Load
Maximum Tire Pressure Tire Size
The tires that came on your vehicle have a number of markings. Those you should be aware of are described below.
Tire Sizes
Whenever tires are replaced, they should be replaced with tires of the same size.
1Tire Sizes
Following is an example of tire size with an explanation of what each component means. P235/60 R18 102T P: Vehicle type (P indicates passenger vehicle). 235: Tire width in millimeters. 60: Aspect ratio (the tire's section height as a percentage of its width). R: Tire construction code (R indicates radial). 18: Rim diameter in inches. 102: Load index (a numerical code associated with the maximum load the tire can carry). T: Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating the maximum speed rating).
Maintenance
TOC Index
Continued
Home
415
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Labeling
QRG
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The tire identification number (TIN) is a group of numbers and letters that look like the example in the side column. TIN is located on the sidewall of the tire.
Glossary of Tire Terminology
Cold Tire Pressure The tire air pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Load Rating Means the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure.
1Tire Identification Number (TIN)
DOT B97R FW6X 2209 DOT: This indicates that the tire meets all requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation. B97R: Manufacturer's identification mark. FW6X: Tire type code. 22 09: Date of manufacture.
Year Week
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum tire air pressure that the tire can hold.
Maximum Load Rating Means the load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
TOC Recommended Inflation Pressure The cold tire inflation pressure recommended by the manufacturer.
Treadwear Indicators (TWI) Means the projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread.
Maintenance
Index
Home
416
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
QRG
The tires on your vehicle meet all U.S. Federal Safety Requirements. All tires are also graded for treadwear, traction, and temperature performance according to Department of Transportation (DOT) standards. The following explains these gradings.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
1Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between shoulder and maximum section width.
Treadwear
For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.
well on the government course As a tire graded 100. The relative performance
of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may
TOC
depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Maintenance
Continued
Index
Home
417
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
QRG
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire' s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety TOC Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
1Traction Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
1Temperature Warning: The temperature grade for this ries established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can casue heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Maintenance
Index
Home
418
Wear Indicators
Example of a Wear Indicator mark
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWear Indicators
QRG The groove where the wear indicator is located is 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) shallower than elsewhere on the tire. If the tread has worn so that the indicator is exposed, replace the tire. Worn out tires have poor traction on wet roads.
Tire Service Life
The life of your tires is dependent on many factors, including driving habits, road conditions, vehicle loading, inflation pressure, maintenance history, speed, and environmental conditions (even when the tires are not in use).
In addition to regular inspections and inflation pressure maintenance, it is recommended that you have annual inspections performed once the tires reach five years old. All tires, including the spare, should be removed from service after 10 years from the date of manufacture, regardless of their condition or state of wear.
Maintenance
TOC
Index Home
419
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Wheel Replacement
QRG Tire and Wheel Replacement
Replace your tires with radials of the same size, load range, speed rating, and maximum cold tire pressure rating (as shown on the tire's sidewall). Using tires of a different size or construction can cause the ABS, VSA® (vehicle stability assist), hill start assist, and the VTM-4r* system to work incorrectly.
It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that isn't possible, replace the front or rear tires in pairs.
1Tire and Wheel Replacement
3 WARNING
Installing improper tires on your vehicle can affect handling and stability. This can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Make sure that the wheel's specifications match those of the original wheels. If you replace a wheel, only use TPMS specified wheels approved for your vehicle.
Always use the size and type of tires recommended in this owner's manual.
TOC
Maintenance
Index
Home
420 * Not available on all models
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Rotation
Tire Rotation
QRG
Rotating tires according to the maintenance messages on the information display*/ multi-information display* helps to distribute wear more evenly and increase tire life.
Tires without rotation marks Rotate the tires as shown here.
1Tire Rotation
Tires with directional tread patterns should only be rotated front to back (not from one side to the other). Directional tires should be mounted with the rotation indication mark facing forward, as shown below.
Front
Front
Direction Mark
Tires with rotation marks
Rotate the tires as shown here.
Front
When the tires are rotated, make sure the air pressures are checked.
TOC
Maintenance
* Not available on all models
Index
Home
421
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWinter Tires
Maintenance
QRG
TOC Index
Winter Tires
If driving on snowy or frozen roads, mount all season marked "M+S" tires, snow tires, or tire chains; reduce speed; and maintain sufficient distance between vehicles when driving.
Be particularly careful when operating the steering wheel or brakes to prevent skidding.
Use tire chains, snow tires, or all season tires when necessary or according to the law.
1Winter Tires
3 WARNING
Using the wrong chains, or not properly installing chains, can damage the brake lines and cause a crash in which you can be seriously injured or killed.
When mounting, refer to the following points.
For winter tires: · Select the size and load ranges that are the same as the original tires.
Follow all instructions in this owner's manual regarding the selection and use of tire chains.
· Mount the tires to all four wheels.
For tire chains: · Install them on the front tires only. · Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance, we strongly recommend using the
chains listed below: Cable-type: QCC Premium Cobra 1046P
NOTICE Traction devices that are the wrong size or improperly installed can damage your vehicle's brake lines, suspension, body, and wheels. Stop driving if they are hitting any part of the vehicle.
When tire chains are mounted, follow the chain manufacturer's instructions regarding vehicle operational limits.
· Follow the chain manufacturer's instruction when installing. Mount them as tightly as you can.
· Check that the chains do not touch the brake lines or suspension.
· Drive slowly.
If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be aware that these tires are not designed for winter driving conditions. For more information, contact a dealer.
Home
422
Battery
Checking the Battery
Test Indicator Window
Check the battery condition monthly. Look at the test indicator window and check the terminals for corrosion.
1Battery
3 WARNING
The battery gives off explosive hydrogen gas during normal operation.
A spark or flame can cause the battery to explode with enough force to kill or seriously hurt you.
If your vehicle's battery is disconnected or goes dead: · The audio system is disabled.
2 Reactivating the audio system P. 174
· The clock resets.
2 Setting the Clock P. 98
· The navigation system* is disabled.
2 Refer to the navigation system manual
Charging the Battery
Disconnect both battery cables to prevent damaging your vehicle's electrical system. Always disconnect the negative () cable first, and reconnect it last.
When conducting any battery maintenance, wear protective clothing and a face shield, or have a skilled technician do it.
WARNING: Battery post, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your hands after handling.
The test indicator's color information is on the battery.
When you find corrosion, clean the battery terminals by applying a baking powder and water solution. Clean terminals with a damp towel. Cloth/towel dry the battery. Coat the terminals with grease to help prevent future corrosion.
Maintenance
QRG
TOC Index
* Not available on all models
Home
423
Remote Transmitter Care
QRG Replacing the Button Battery
If the indicator does not come on when the button is pressed, replace the battery. 1Replacing the Button Battery
Keypad
Battery type: CR1616
1. Unscrew the cover with a small Phillipshead screwdriver. Press a button to pry open the transmitter.
NOTICE An improperly disposed of battery can damage the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal.
Replacement batteries are commercially available or at a dealer.
Screw
2. Open the keypad. u Separate the inner cover from the keypad by releasing the two tabs on the cover.
3. Make sure to replace the battery with the
correct polarity.
TOC
Battery
Maintenance
Index
Home
424
Remote Control and Wireless Headphone Care*
Models with rear entertainment system
Replacing the Battery
Remote Control
If it takes several pushes on the remote control buttons to operate the rear entertainment system*.
Battery type: BR3032
1Replacing the Battery
NOTICE An improperly disposed of battery can damage the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal.
QRG
1. Remove the cover.
2. Make sure to replace the battery with the correct polarity.
Replacement batteries are commercially available or at a dealer.
TOC
Maintenance
* Not available on all models
Continued
Index
Home
425
uuRemote Control and Wireless Headphone Care*uReplacing the Battery
QRG
Wireless Headphone
If there is no sound coming from the wireless headphone, replace the battery. Battery type: AAA 1. To open the cover, insert a coin in the slot and twist it slightly to pry the cover away from the earpiece.
Cover
Coin
2. Make sure to replace the battery with the correct polarity.
TOC Battery
Maintenance
Index
Home
426
Climate Control System Maintenance
Dust and Pollen Filter
QRG
The climate control system is equipped with a dust and pollen filter that collects pollen, dust, and other debris in the air. The Maintenance MinderTM messages will let you know when to replace the filter.
We recommend that you replace the dust and pollen filter sooner when using your vehicle in areas with high concentrations of dust.
1Dust and Pollen Filter
If the airflow from the climate control system deteriorates noticeably, and the windows fog up easily, the filter may need to be replaced. Please contact a dealer for replacement.
Maintenance
TOC
Index Home
427
Cleaning
QRG
Interior Care
Use a damp cloth with a mixture of mild detergent and warm water to remove dirt. Use a clean cloth to remove detergent residue.
Cleaning Seat Belts
1Interior Care
Do not spill liquids inside the vehicle. Electrical devices and systems may malfunction if liquids are splashed on them.
Use a soft brush with a mixture of mild soap and warm water to clean the seat belts. Let the belts air dry. Wipe the openings of the seat belt anchors using a clean cloth.
Opening
Do not use silicone based sprays on electrical devices such as audio devices and switches.
Doing so may cause the items to malfunction or a fire inside the vehicle.
If a silicone based spray is inadvertently used on electrical devices, consult a dealer.
Depending on their composition, chemicals and liquid aromatics may cause discoloration, wrinkles, and cracking to resin-based parts and textiles. Do not use alkali solvents or organic solvents such as benzene or gasoline.
TOC
After using chemicals, make sure to gently wipe them
off using a dry cloth.
Do not place used cloths on top of resin based parts or textiles for long periods of time without washing.
Maintenance
Index
Home
428
Floor Mats
Front
Rear
uuCleaninguInterior Care
The floor mats hook over the floor anchors, which keep the mat from sliding forward.
Do not put additional floor mats on top of the anchored mat.
1Floor Mats
If you use any floor mats that were not originally provided with your vehicle, make sure they are designed for your specific vehicle, fit correctly, and are securely anchored by the floor anchors. Position the rear seat floor mats properly. If they are not properly positioned, the floor mats can interfere with the front seat functions.
QRG
Maintaining Genuine Leather*
Vacuum dirt and dust from the leather frequently. Pay close attention to the pleats and seams. Clean the leather with a soft cloth dampened with a 90% water and 10% neutral soap solution. Then buff it with a clean, dry cloth. Remove any dust or dirt on leather surfaces immediately.
* Not available on all models
Maintenance
TOC
Index Home
429
uuCleaninguExterior Care
QRG Exterior Care
Dust off the vehicle body after you drive. Regularly inspect your vehicle for scratches on painted surfaces. A scratch on a painted surface can result in body rust. If you find a scratch, promptly repair it.
Washing the Vehicle
Wash the vehicle regularly. Wash more frequently when driving in the following conditions: · If driving on roads with road salt. · If driving in coastal areas. · If tar, soot, bird droppings, insects, or tree sap are stuck to painted surfaces.
1Washing the Vehicle
Do not spray water into the air intake vents or engine compartment. It can cause a malfunction.
Using an Automated Car Wash
· Fold in the door mirrors. TOC Make sure to follow the instructions indicated on the automated car wash.
Air Intake Vents
Maintenance
Using High Pressure Cleaners
· Keep sufficient distance between the cleaning nozzle and the vehicle body. · Take particular care around the windows. Standing too close may cause water to
enter the vehicle interior. Do not spray water into the engine compartment.
Index
Home
430
uuCleaninguExterior Care
QRG
Applying Wax
A good coat of automotive body wax helps protect your vehicle's paint from the elements. Wax will wear off over time and expose your vehicle's paint to the elements, so reapply as necessary.
1Applying Wax
NOTICE Chemical solvents and strong cleaners can damage the paint, metal, and plastic on your vehicle. Wipe up spills immediately.
Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
If you get gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or battery fluid on resin coated parts, they may be stained or the coating may peel. Promptly wipe it away using a soft cloth and clean water.
1Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
Ask a dealer about the correct coating material when you want to repair the painted surface of the parts made of resin.
Cleaning the Window
Wipe using a glass cleaner.
1Cleaning the Window
Wires are mounted to the inside of the rear window. Wipe along the same direction as the wires with a soft cloth so as not to damage them.
Maintaining Aluminum Wheels*
TOC
Maintenance
Aluminum is susceptible to deterioration caused by salt and other road contaminants. Use a sponge and mild detergent to wipe away promptly. Be careful not to use harsh chemicals (including some commercial wheel cleaners) or a stiff brush. They can damage the clear coat of the aluminum alloy wheels that helps keep the aluminum from corroding and tarnishing.
* Not available on all models
Index
Home
431
QRG
Index Home
432
QRG
Handling the Unexpected
This chapter explains how to handle unexpected troubles.
Tools Types of Tools .................................. 434
If a Tire Goes Flat Changing a Flat Tire ......................... 435
Engine Does Not Start Checking the Engine ........................ 444
Jump Starting.................................... 445 Shift Lever Does Not Move .............. 447 Overheating
How to Handle Overheating............. 448
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On ............................................. 450 If the Charging System Indicator Comes On ................................................. 450 If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks ................................... 451 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On ................................................. 452 If the Low Tire Pressure Indicator Comes On ................................................. 452 If the TPMS Indicator Comes On ...... 453
If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks ....................... 453
Fuses Fuse Locations ................................. 454 Inspecting and Changing Fuses........ 458
Emergency Towing........................... 459 When You Cannot Open the Tailgate..... 461
Index
Home
433
Tools
QRG Types of Tools
Stay
Extension Bar
Wheel Nut Wrench/ Jack Handle
Towing Hook
Jack
1Types of Tools
The tools and jack are under the cargo area on the passenger's side.
Handling the Unexpected
TOC
Index Home
434
If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat while driving, grasp the steering wheel firmly, and brake gradually to reduce speed. Then, stop in a safe place. Replace the flat tire with a compact spare tire. Go to a dealer as soon as possible to have the full-size tire repaired or replaced.
1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and non-slippery surface and apply the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever to (P. 3. Turn on the hazard warning lights and turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0.
1Changing a Flat Tire Periodically check the tire pressure of the compact spare. It should be set to the specified pressure. Specified Pressure: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)
When driving with the compact spare tire, keep the vehicle speed under 50 mph (80 km/h). Replace with a full-size tire as soon as possible.
The compact spare tire and wheel in your vehicle are specifically for this model.
Do not use them with another vehicle.
Do not use another type of compact spare tire or wheel with your vehicle.
Do not mount tire chains on a compact spare tire. If a chain-mounted front tire goes flat, remove one of the full-size rear tires and replace it with the compact spare tire. Remove the flat front tire and replace it with the full-size tire that was removed from the rear. Mount the tire chains on the front tire.
Do not use a puncture-repairing agent on a flat tire, as it can damage the tire pressure sensor.
Handling the Unexpected
QRG TOC
Continued
Index
Home
435
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
QRG
Getting Ready to Replace the Flat Tire
1. Remove the cargo area floor lid.
Handling the Unexpected
TOC
Index Home
436
Cover
2. Remove the cover and take the jack, stay, wheel nut wrench, and extension bar out of the tool case.
Cover
3. Remove the cover and the rubber cap on the cargo area to access the shaft for the spare tire hoist.
4. Fold down the third row seats.
2 Folding Down the Third Row Seats P. 147
Wheel Nut Wrench
5. Put the extension bar with the wheel nut wrench on the hoist shaft. Turn the wrench to the left to lower the spare tire to the ground.
Extension Bar Bracket
6. Keep turning the wheel nut wrench to create slack in the cable.
7. Remove the bracket from the spare tire.
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire QRG
Handling the Unexpected
8. Place a wheel block or rock in front and rear of the wheel diagonal to the flat tire.
Wheel
Blocks The tire to be replaced.
Continued
TOC
Index Home
437
Handling the Unexpected
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire QRG
9. Place the compact spare tire (wheel side up) under the vehicle body, near the tire that needs to be replaced.
10. Loosen each wheel nut about one turn using the wheel nut wrench.
TOC
Index Home
438
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
QRG
How to Set Up the Jack
1How to Set Up the Jack
1. Place the jack under the jacking point closest to the tire to be changed.
3 WARNING
The vehicle can easily roll off the jack, seriously injuring anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for changing a tire exactly, and never get under the vehicle when it is supported only by the jack.
Handling the Unexpected
2. Turn the dial at the bottom of the jack to the right until the top of the jack contacts the jacking point. u Make sure that the jacking point tab is resting in the jack notch.
Do not use the jack with people or luggage in the vehicle.
Use the jack provided in your vehicle. Other jacks may not support the weight ("load") or their shape may not match.
The following instructions must be followed to use
the jack safely.
· Do not use while the engine is running.
· Use only where the ground is firm and level.
· Use only at the jacking points.
TOC
· Do not get in the vehicle while using the jack.
· Do not put anything on top of or underneath the
jack.
Continued
Index
Home
439
Handling the Unexpected
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire QRG
3. Raise the vehicle, using the stay, extension bar, and the jack handle, until the tire is off the ground.
Wheel Nut Wrench as Jack Handle Extension Bar Stay
TOC
Index Home
440
Replacing the Flat Tire
1. Remove the wheel nuts and flat tire.
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
1Replacing the Flat Tire
Do not over tighten the wheel nuts by applying extra torque using your foot or a pipe.
QRG
Handling the Unexpected
2. Wipe the mounting surfaces of the wheel with a clean cloth.
3. Mount the compact spare tire. 4. Screw the wheel nuts until they touch
the lips around the mounting holes, and stop rotating.
5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack. Tighten the wheel nuts in the order indicated in the image. Go around, tightening the nuts, two to three times in this order. Wheel nut torque: 94 lbfft (127 Nm, 13 kgfm)
Continued
TOC
Index Home
441
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
QRG
Storing the Flat Tire
1Storing the Flat Tire
If you store a full size tire on the hoist, remove the spacer to loosen the two bolts. 1. Remove the center cap.
2. Place the flat tire face up under the hoist.
3. Insert the hoist bracket into the center hole of the flat tire.
3 WARNING
Loose items can fly around the interior in a crash and can seriously injure the occupants. Store the wheel, jack, and tools securely before driving.
Handling the Unexpected
Bolts
4. Turn the extension bar with the wheel nut wrench to the right until the flat tire rests against the underbody of the vehicle and you hear the hoist click.
Always raise the spare tire hoist, even if you are not stowing a tire. If the hoist is left down, it will be damaged during driving and need to be replaced.
5. Securely put the jack, stay, extension bar, and wheel nut wrench back in the tool case.
TOC
Index
Home
442
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
QRG
TPMS and the Spare Tire
Models with information display
If you replace a flat tire with the spare tire, the low tire pressure indicator comes on while you are driving. After driving for a few miles (kilometers), the indicator will go off and the TPMS indicator comes on, but this is normal.
If you replace the tire with a specified regular tire, the low tire pressure or TPMS indicator will go off after a few miles (kilometers).
1TPMS and the Spare Tire The system cannot monitor the pressure of the spare tire. Manually check the spare tire pressure to be sure that it is correct.
Use TPMS specific wheels. Each is equipped with a tire pressure sensor mounted inside the tire behind the valve stem.
Handling the Unexpected
Models with multi-information display
If you replace a flat tire with the spare tire, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on while you are driving. After driving for a few miles (kilometers), the indicator will start blinking for a short time and then stay on. CHECK TPMS SYSTEM appears on the multi-information display, but this is normal.
If you replace the tire with a specified regular tire, the warning message on the multi-information display and the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator will go off after a few miles (kilometers).
TOC
Index
Home
443
Engine Does Not Start
QRG Checking the Engine
If the engine does not start, check the starter.
1Checking the Engine
If you must start the vehicle immediately, use an assisting vehicle to jump start it.
2 Jump Starting P. 445
Starter condition
Checklist
Starter doesn't turn or turns Check brightness of the interior light.
over slowly.
Turn on interior lights and check brightness.
The battery may be dead. Check each of the items on the right and respond accordingly.
If the interior lights are dim or do not come on at all
2 Battery P. 423
If the interior lights come on normally 2 Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 458
Handling the Unexpected
The starter turns over normally Review the engine start procedure.
but the engine doesn't start. Follow its instructions, and try to start the engine again. 2 Starting the Engine P. 342
There may be a problem with the Check the immobilizer system indicator.
fuse. Check each of the items on When the immobilizer system indicator is blinking, the engine cannot be started. the right and respond accordingly. 2 Immobilizer System P. 118
Check the fuel level.
There should be enough fuel in the tank. 2 Fuel Gauge P. 80
Check the fuse.
Check all fuses, or have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
TOC
2 Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 458
If the problem continues:
2 Emergency Towing P. 459
Index
Home
444
Jump Starting
Jump Starting Procedure
Turn off the power to electric devices, such as audio and lights. Turn off the engine, then open the hood.
1. Connect the first jumper cable to your vehicle's + terminal.
2. Connect the other end of the first jumper cable to the booster battery + terminal. u Use a 12-volt booster battery only.
Booster Battery
3. Connect the second jumper cable to the booster battery - terminal.
4. Connect the other end of the second jumper cable to the grounding strap as shown.
Do not connect this jumper cable to any other part.
5. If your vehicle is connected to another vehicle, start the assisting vehicle's engine and increase its rpm slightly.
6. Attempt to start your vehicle's engine. If it turns over slowly, check that the jumper cables have good metal-to-metal contact.
1Jump Starting
3 WARNING
A battery can explode if you do not follow the correct procedure, seriously injuring anyone nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames, and smoking materials away from the battery.
Securely attach the jumper cables clips so that they do not come off when the engine vibrates. Also be careful not to tangle the jumper cables or allow the cable ends to touch each other while attaching or detaching the jumper cables.
Battery performance degrades in cold conditions and may prevent the engine from starting.
Handling the Unexpected
QRG
TOC Index
Continued
Home
445
Handling the Unexpected
uuJump Startingu
QRG
What to Do After the Engine Starts
Once your vehicle's engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the following order. 1. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle's ground. 2. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery -
terminal. 3. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle's + terminal. 4. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery +
terminal. Have your vehicle inspected by a nearby service station or a dealer.
TOC
Index Home
446
Shift Lever Does Not Move
Follow the procedure below if you cannot move the shift lever out of the (P position.
Releasing the Lock
Cover
Slot Release Button
Shift Lock Release Slot
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
3. Wrap a cloth around the tip of a small flattip screwdriver. Put it into the shift lock release slot as shown in the image, and remove the cover.
4. Insert the key into the shift lock release slot.
5. While pushing on the key, press the shift lever release button and place the shift lever into (N. u The lock is now released. Have the shift lever checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
Handling the Unexpected
QRG
TOC Index Home
447
Overheating
QRG How to Handle Overheating
Overheating symptoms are as follows: · The temperature gauge needle is at the H mark or the engine suddenly
loses power. · Steam or spray comes out of the engine compartment.
First thing to do 1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place. 2. Turn off all accessories and turn on the hazard warning lights.
u No steam or spray present: Keep the engine running and open the hood. u Steam or spray is present: Turn off the engine and wait until it subsides.
Then, open the hood.
1How to Handle Overheating
3 WARNING
Steam and spray from an overheated engine can seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam is coming out.
NOTICE Continuing to drive with the temperature gauge needle at the H mark may damage the engine.
Handling the Unexpected
TOC
Index Home
448
uuOverheatinguHow to Handle Overheating
Next thing to do
MAX
Reserve
Tank
MIN
QRG
1. Check that the cooling fan is operating and stop the engine once the temperature gauge needle comes down. u If the cooling fan is not operating, immediately stop the engine.
1How to Handle Overheating
3 WARNING
Removing the radiator cap while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you.
2. Once the engine has cooled down, inspect the coolant level and check the cooling system components for leaks. u If the coolant level in the reserve tank is low, add coolant until it reaches the MAX mark. u If there is no coolant in the reserve tank, check that the radiator is cool. Cover the radiator cap with a heavy cloth and open the cap. If necessary, add coolant up to the base of the filler neck, and put the cap back on.
Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator cap.
If the coolant is leaking, contact a dealer for repairs.
Use water as an emergency/temporary measure only. Have a dealer flush the system with proper antifreeze as soon as possible.
Handling the Unexpected
Last thing to do
TOC
Once the engine has cooled sufficiently, restart it and check the temperature gauge.
If the temperature needle has gone down, resume driving. If it has not gone down,
contact a dealer for repairs.
Index
Home
449
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking
QRG If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On
Reasons for the indicator to come on Comes on when the engine oil pressure is low.
What to do as soon as the indicator comes on 1. Immediately park the vehicle on level ground in a safe place.
1If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On
NOTICE Running the engine with low oil pressure can cause serious mechanical damage almost immediately.
2. If necessary, turn the hazard warning lights on.
What to do after parking the vehicle 1. Stop the engine and let it sit for about three minutes.
2. Open the hood and check the oil level.
2 Oil Check P. 393
3. Start the engine and check the low oil pressure indicator. u The light goes out: Start driving again. u The light does not go out within 10 seconds: Stop the engine and contact a dealer for repairs immediately.
Handling the Unexpected
If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
Reasons for the indicator to come on
TOC
Comes on when the battery is not being charged.
What to do when the indicator comes on
1If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
If you need to stop temporarily, do not turn off the engine. Restarting the engine may rapidly discharge the battery.
Turn off the climate control system, rear defogger, and other electrical
systems, and immediately contact a dealer for repairs.
Index
Home
450
uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks
Reasons for indicator lamp to come on or blink · Comes on when there is a problem with the engine emissions control
system, or the fuel fill cap is missing, or loose.
· Blinks when engine misfiring is detected.
What to do when the indicator lamp comes on Avoid high speeds and immediately get your vehicle inspected at a dealer.
What to do when the indicator lamp blinks Park the vehicle in a safe place with no flammable items and wait at least ten minutes or more with the engine stopped until it cools.
1If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks
NOTICE If you drive with the malfunction indicator lamp on, the emissions control system and the engine could be damaged.
If the malfunction indicator lamp blinks again when restarting the engine, drive to the nearest dealer at 31 mph (50 km/h) or less. Have your vehicle inspected.
Check/Tighten Fuel Cap Message
The message appears on when: An evaporative system leak is detected. This may be caused by the fuel fill cap being loose or not being installed.
What to do when the message appears: 1. Stop the engine.
2. Check that the fuel fill cap is fully installed. u If not, loosen the cap, and then retighten it until it clicks at least once.
3. Drive for several days of normal driving. u The message should go off.
When the malfunction indicator lamp comes on Malfunction indicator lamp comes on if the system continues to detect a leak of gasoline vapor. If this happens, check the fuel fill cap using the procedures described above.
Handling the Unexpected
QRG
TOC Index Home
451
uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On
QRG If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On
U.S. Reasons for the indicator to come on · The brake fluid is low.
Canada
· There is a malfunction in the brake system.
What to do when the indicator comes on while driving Press the brake pedal lightly to check pedal pressure. · If normal, check the brake fluid level the next time you stop.
· If abnormal, take immediate action. If necessary, downshift the transmission to slow the vehicle using engine braking.
1If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On
Have your vehicle repaired immediately. It is dangerous to drive with low brake fluid. If there is no resistance from the brake pedal, stop immediately in a safe place. If necessary downshift the gears.
If the brake system indicator and ABS indicator come on simultaneously, the electronic brake distribution system is not working. This can result in vehicle instability under sudden braking. Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer immediately.
Handling the Unexpected
Models with information display
If the Low Tire Pressure Indicator Comes On
Reasons for the indicator to come on A tire pressure is significantly low. If the compact spare tire is installed, the indicator stays on for a while, then goes off after driving a few miles (kilometers).
1If the Low Tire Pressure Indicator Comes On
NOTICE Driving on an extremely underinflated tire can cause it to overheat. An overheated tire can fail. Always inflate your tires to the prescribed level.
TOC
What to do when the indicator comes on
Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Check the tire pressure and adjust the
pressure to the specified level. The specified tire pressure is on a label on
the driver side doorjamb.
Index
Home
452
uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the TPMS Indicator Comes On
Models with information display
If the TPMS Indicator Comes On
QRG
Reasons for the indicator to come on · Comes on when there is a problem with the TPMS.
· If the compact spare is installed, the indicator comes on after driving for a few miles (kilometers).
What to do when the indicator comes on Have the tire inspected by a dealer as soon as possible. If the compact spare tire causes the indicator to come on, change the tire to a full-size tire. The indicator goes off after driving for a few miles (kilometers).
Handling the Unexpected
Models with multi-information display
If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks
Reasons for the indicator to come on or blink A tire pressure is significantly low. If there is a problem with the TPMS or the compact spare tire is installed, the indicator blinks for about one minute, and then stays on.
What to do when the indicator comes on Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Check the tire pressure and adjust the pressure to the specified level. The specified tire pressure is on a label on the driver side doorjamb.
What to do when the indicator blinks Have the tire inspected by a dealer as soon as possible. If the compact spare tire causes the indicator to blink, change the tire to a full- size tire. The indicator goes off after driving for a few miles (kilometers).
1If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks
NOTICE Driving on an extremely underinflated tire can cause it to overheat. An overheated tire can fail. Always inflate your tires to the prescribed level.
TOC
Index Home
453
Fuses
QRG Fuse Locations
If any electrical devices are not working,
Circuit protected and fuse rating
turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 and
Circuit Protected
Amps
21
check to see if any applicable fuse is blown.
Main Fuse
120 A
22
1
Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box
-
-
23
cover. Locate the fuse in question by the
2
OP Main
80 A
fuse number and box cover number.
IG Main
50 A
3
Blower
40 A
Engine Compartment Fuse Box
AC Inverter Head Light Main
30 A 50 A
Located on the passenger's side, near the
4 Power Window Main
40 A
windshield washer reservoir. Push the tabs
5
to open the box.
6
- Condenser Fan
- 30 A
7
Cooling Fan
30 A
Handling the Unexpected
8
Rear Defogger
30 A
9
-
10
Fog Lights*
- (20 A)
11
Sub
12
ACM
15 A 10 A
TOC
13
Front Passenger's Power Seat Reclining*
(20 A)
14
Front Passenger's Power Seat Slide*
(20 A)
15
Oil Level
7.5 A
Index
16
FI ECU
17
Radio
18
IG Coil
(7.5 A) 20 A 15 A
Home
19
Main
20
MG Clutch
15 A 7.5 A
454 * Not available on all models
Circuit Protected DBW
Interior Lights Back Up
Amps 15 A 7.5 A 10 A
Engine Compartment
Sub Fuse Box
Located near the battery. Push the tabs to open the box.
Circuit protected and fuse rating
Circuit Protected
1 Power Tailgate Motor*
2
VTM-4 *
3
Trailer Main
4
VSA FSR
5
Rear Blower
6
VSA Motor
7
Hazard
8 Power Tailgate Closer*
9
Driver's Power Seat Reclining *
10 Driver's Power Seat Slide*
11
Stop & Horn
12
Rear Console Accessory Socket
13
Rear Wiper
14
Trailer E-Brake
15
Front Heated Seat*
16
Center Console Accessory Socket
17
Trailer Charge
18 Front Accessory Socket
19 Rear Accessory Socket
20
Glass Hatch Motor
21
Rear Heated Seat*
22 Head Light Washer Motor
Amps (40 A) (20 A) (30 A) 40 A 30 A 30 A 15 A (20 A)
(20 A)
(20 A) 20 A
15 A
10 A (20 A) (20 A)
15 A
(20 A) 15 A 15 A 20 A (15 A) (30 A)
* Not available on all models
uuFusesuFuse Locations QRG
TOC Index Home
Continued 455
Handling the Unexpected
uuFusesuFuse Locations
QRG
Interior Fuse Box
Located under the dashboard.
Fuse Box
Handling the Unexpected
TOC
Index Home
Fuse locations are shown on the label on the side panel.
Locate the fuse in question by the fuse number and label number.
Circuit protected and fuse rating
Circuit Protected
Amps
1
VTM-4 *
(7.5 A)
2
Fuel Pump
20 A
3
ACG
10 A
4
VSA
7.5 A
5
-
-
6
-
-
7
Auto Light
10 A
8
Auto Light
7.5 A
9
ODS
7.5 A
456 * Not available on all models
Circuit Protected
10
Meter
11
SRS
12
Right Daytime Running Light
13 Left Daytime Running Light
14 Small Lights (Interior)
15 Small Lights (Exterior)
16 Right Head Light Low
17 Left Head Light Low
18
Daytime Running Light Main
19
Small Lights Main
20
- TPMS
21 Head Light Low Main
22
VBSOL2
23
STRLD
24
-
25
-
26 Driver's Power Window
27
HAC OP
28
Moonroof
29
Door Lock
30
Front Passenger's Power Window
31
Audio Amp
Amps 7.5 A 10 A
10 A
10 A 7.5 A 10 A 15 A 15 A
20 A
15 A -
7.5 A 20 A 7.5 A 7.5 A
- - 20 A 20 A (20 A) 20 A
20 A
(30 A)
Circuit Protected
32
Passenger's Side Rear Power Window
33
Driver's Side Rear Power Window
34
-
35
ACC
36
HAC
37
Day Light
38
Wiper
Amps
20 A
20 A
- 10 A 10 A 7.5 A 30 A
Cargo Area Fuse Box
Located on the left side of cargo area. Remove the cover by prying on the edge of the cover using a flat-tip screwdriver.
u Wrap the flat-tip screwdriver with a cloth to prevent scratches.
Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box cover.
Locate the fuse in question by the fuse number and box cover number.
Circuit protected and fuse rating
Circuit Protected
Amps
1
Small Light
20 A
2
Stop Light
(7.5 A)
3
Back Light
(7.5 A)
4
Turn Light Hazard
(7.5 A)
uuFusesuFuse Locations QRG
TOC Index Home
457
Handling the Unexpected
uuFusesuInspecting and Changing Fuses
QRG Inspecting and Changing Fuses
Blown Fuse
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0. Turn headlights and all accessories off.
2. Remove the fuse box cover.
3. Check the large fuse in the engine compartment. u If the fuse is blown, use a Phillips-head screwdriver to remove the screw and replace it with a new one.
1Inspecting and Changing Fuses
NOTICE Replacing a fuse with one that has a higher rating greatly increases the chances of damaging the electrical system.
Replace fuse with a spare fuse of the same specified amperage. Confirm the specified amperage using the charts on P. 454 to 457.
Fuse Puller
4. Inspect the small fuses in the engine compartment and the vehicle interior. u If there is a burned out fuse, remove it with the fuse puller and replace it with a new one.
There is a fuse puller on the back of the engine compartment fuse box cover.
Handling the Unexpected
TOC
Index Home
458
Emergency Towing
Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.
All models
Flat bed equipment The operator loads your vehicle on the back of a truck. This is the best way to transport your vehicle.
2WD models
Wheel lift equipment The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the front tires and lift them off the ground. The rear tires remain on the ground. This is an acceptable way to tow your vehicle.
1Emergency Towing
NOTICE Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the bumpers will cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed to support the vehicle's weight.
Never tow your vehicle with just a rope or chain. It is very dangerous, since ropes or chains may shift from side to side or break.
QRG
Handling the Unexpected
TOC
Index Home
459
uuEmergency TowinguIf Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
QRG If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
For very short distances, such as freeing the vehicle, you can use the detachable towing hook that mounts on the anchors in the front and rear bumpers.
Cover
Front
1. Put cloth on the edge of the cover. Carefully pry with a small flat-tip screwdriver or a metal fingernail file to remove the cover. u The cover is attached to the bumper by a tether.
1If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
NOTICE To avoid damage to your vehicle, use the towing hook for straight, flat ground towing only. Do not tow at an angle. The hook should not be used to tow the vehicle onto a flat bed. Do not use it as a tie down.
2. Remove the rubber cap by pulling it out.
3. Remove the towing hook and wheel wrench from the tool case in the cargo area.
Towing Hook
4. Screw the towing hook into the hole, and tighten it with the wheel nut wrench.
Handling the Unexpected
TOC
Index Home
460
Rear
Remove the rear bumper cover.
2 Towing Equipment and Accessories P. 333
When You Cannot Open the Tailgate
QRG
What to Do When Unable to Open the Tailgate
If you cannot open the tailgate, use the following procedure. 1. Use a flat-tip screwdriver and remove the cover on the inside of the tailgate.
1What to Do When Unable to Open the Tailgate What to do-Following up After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have the vehicle checked.
When you open the tailgate from inside, make sure there is enough space around the tailgate, and it does not hit anyone or any object.
Cover Models with power tailgate
2. To open the tailgate, push the tailgate while sliding the lever to the right.
Handling the Unexpected
Lever
Continued
TOC
Index Home
461
uuWhen You Cannot Open the Tailgateu
QRG
Models without power tailgate
2. To open the tailgate, push the tailgate while pushing down the lever with the flattip screwdriver.
Handling the Unexpected
TOC
Index Home
462
QRG
Information
This chapter includes your vehicle's specifications, locations of identification numbers, and other information required by regulation.
Specifications .................................... 464 Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)...... 466 Engine Number and Transmission
Number...................................... 466 Devices that Emit Radio Waves ....... 467 Reporting Safety Defects ................. 469
Emissions Testing Testing of Readiness Codes.............. 470
Warranty Coverages ........................ 472 Authorized Manuals......................... 474 Customer Service Information......... 475 Gracenote® End User License
Agreement ...................................476
Index
Home
463
Specifications
QRG
Vehicle Specifications
Model
Honda Pilot
No. of Passengers:
Front
2
Second
3
Third
3
Total Weights: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
Gross Axle Weight Rating (Front) Gross Axle Weight Rating (Rear)
Air Conditioning: Refrigerant Type
8
U.S.: 5,953 lbs (2,700 kg)*1 6,096 lbs (2,765 kg)*2
Canada: 2,700 kg*1 2,765 kg*2
U.S.: 2,921 lbs (1,325 kg) Canada: 1,325 kg U.S.: 3,197 lbs (1,450 kg)*1
3,251 lbs (1,475 kg)*3 3,362 lbs (1,525 kg)*4 Canada: 1,450 kg*1
1,525 kg*2
HFC-134a (R-134a)
Charge Quantity Lubricant Type
21.2 22.9 oz (600 650 g) ND-OIL8
*1: 2WD models *2: 4WD models *3: LX models with 4WD *4: Except LX models with 4WD
Information
TOC
Index
Home
464
Engine Specifications
Displacement
212 cu-in (3,471 cm3)
Spark Plugs
NGK
DILZKR7A11G
Fuel
Fuel:
Unleaded gasoline, Pump octane number
Type
of 87 or higher
Fuel Tank Capacity 21.0 US gal (79.5 )
Battery
Capacity/Type
60AH(5)/72AH(20)
Washer Fluid
Tank Capacity
U.S.: 4.2 US qt (4.0 ) Canada: 6.9 US qt (6.5 )
Light Bulbs
Headlights (Low Beam)
55W (H11)
Headlights (High Beam) Daytime Running Lights Fog Lights*5 Front Turn Signal/Parking Lights
60 W (HB3) 60 W (HB3) 55W (H11) 28/8W (Amber)
Side Turn Signal Lights (on Door Mirrors)*5
LED
Front Side Marker Lights Rear Side Marker Lights Brake/Taillights Back-Up Lights
3CP 5W 21/5W 18W
Rear Turn Signal/Taillights High-Mount Brake Light Rear License Plate Light
21/5W 5W 5W
Interior Lights Map Lights (Front) 8W Map Lights (Rear) 4CP Door Courtesy Lights 2CP
Console Compartment Light
1.4W
Glove Box Light Foot Light Cargo Area Light Vanity Mirror Lights
1.4W LED 8W 1.4W
*5: Not available on all models
uu Specifications u
Brake Fluid
Specified
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Specified Capacity
Honda ATF DW-1
(automatic transmission fluid)
Change
3.2 US qt (3.1 )*1 3.6 US qt (3.4 )*2
*1: 2WD models *2: 4WD models
*
Rear Differential Fluid
Specified Capacity
Honda VTM-4 Differential Fluid Change 2.79 US qt (2.64 )
Transfer Assembly Fluid*
Specified Capacity
HYPOID GEAR OIL API GL4 or GL5 SAE75W-85 (SAE90 CAN BE USED) Change 0.45 US qt (0.43 )
Engine Oil
Recommended
·Genuine Honda Motor Oil 0W-20 ·API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil
Capacity
Change Change including filter
4.2 US qt (4.0 ) 4.5 US qt (4.3 )
Engine Coolant
Specified Ratio
Honda Long-Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2 50/50 with distilled water
Capacity
1.98 US gal (7.5 ) (change including the remaining 0.198 US gal (0.75 ) in the reserve tank)
Tire
Regular
Compact Spare Wheel Size
Size
Pressure psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])
Size Pressure psi (kPa [kgf/cm2]) Regular Compact Spare
P235/65R/17 103T*3 P235/60R/18 102T*4 Front 31 (210 [2.1])*3
35 (240 [2.4])*4 Rear 33 (230 [2.3])*3
35 (240 [2.4])*4 T165/80D17 104M
60 (420 [4.2])
17 x 7.5J*3 18 x 7.5J*4 17 x 4T
*3: U.S. LX *4: Except U.S. LX
QRG
Information
* Not available on all models
TOC
Index Home
465
Identification Numbers
QRG Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Your vehicle has a 17-digit vehicle identification number (VIN) used to register your vehicle for warranty purposes, and for licensing and insuring your vehicle. See the image below for the VIN locations.
Engine Number and Transmission Number
See the image below for the locations of your vehicle's engine number and transmission number.
Vehicle Identification Number
Engine Number
Information
Automatic Transmission Number
TOC Index Home
466
Certification Label/ Vehicle Identification Number
Devices that Emit Radio Waves
The following products and systems on your vehicle emit radio waves when in operation. Audio System Bluetooth® Audio Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® Immobilizer System
Models with Parking Sensor System
Parking Sensor System Remote Transmitter Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Models with Rear Entertainment System
Rear Entertainment System Remote Control
Each of the above complies with the appropriate requirements or the required standards of FCC (Federal Communications Commission) and Industry Canada Standard, described below:
As required by the FCC: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Continued
Information
QRG
TOC Index Home
467
uuDevices that Emit Radio Wavesu QRG
This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-Gen/210/310. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
TOC Index Home
468
Information
Reporting Safety Defects
In the U.S. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may: call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov ; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http:// www.safercar.gov.
In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Honda Canada Inc. and you may also inform Transport Canada.
If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may lead to a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Honda Canada Inc.
To contact Transport Canada's Defect Investigations and Recalls Division, you may call 1-800-333-0510. For more information on reporting safety defects or about motor vehicle safety, go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
Information
QRG
TOC Index Home
469
Emissions Testing
QRG Testing of Readiness Codes
Your vehicle uses "readiness codes," as part of its onboard self diagnostic system. Some states refer to these codes during testing to see if your vehicle's emissions components are working properly. The codes may not be read if you go through the testing just after the battery has gone dead or been disconnected.
To check if they are set, turn the ignition switch to ON (w, without starting the engine. The malfunction indicator lamp will come on for several seconds. If it then goes off, the readiness codes are set. If it blinks five times, the readiness codes are not set.
1Testing of Readiness Codes The readiness codes are erased when the battery is disconnected, and set again only after several days of driving under a variety of conditions.
If a testing facility determines that the readiness codes are not set, you may be requested to return at a later date to complete the test.
If the testing facility determines the readiness codes are still not set, see a dealer.
If you are required to have your vehicle tested before the readiness codes are ready, prepare the vehicle for retesting by doing the following:
Information
1. Fill the gas tank to approximately 3/4 full.
2. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 6 hours or more.
3. Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40°F and 95°F (4°C and 35°C).
4. Start the engine without touching the accelerator pedal, and let it idle for 20 seconds.
5. Keep the vehicle in (P. Increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it there for about 3 minutes.
TOC 6. Let the engine idle with your foot off the accelerator for 20 seconds.
Index
Home
470
7. Select a nearby, lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in (D. Do not use cruise control. When traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds without moving the accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot do this for a continuous 90 seconds because of traffic conditions, drive for at least 30 seconds, then repeat it two more times (for a total of 90 seconds).
8. Drive in city/suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal.
9. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 30 minutes.
uuEmissions TestinguTesting of Readiness Codes QRG
Information
TOC
Index Home
471
Warranty Coverages
QRG
U.S. Owners Your new vehicle is covered by these warranties:
New Vehicle Limited Warranty covers your new vehicle, except for the emissions control systems and accessories, against defects in materials and workmanship.
Emissions Control Systems Defects Warranty and Emissions Performance Warranty these two warranties cover your vehicle's emissions control systems. Time, mileage, and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty booklet for exact information.
Seat Belt Limited Warranty a seat belt that fails to function properly is covered by a limited warranty. Please read your warranty booklet for details.
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty all exterior body panels are covered for rust-through from the inside for the specified time period with no mileage limit.
Accessory Limited Warranty Honda accessories are covered under this warranty. Time and mileage limits depend on the type of accessory and other factors. Please read your warranty booklet for details.
TOC Replacement Parts Limited Warranty covers all Honda replacement parts against defects in materials and workmanship.
Index
Home
472
Information
Replacement Battery Limited Warranty provides prorated coverage for a replacement battery purchased from a dealer.
Replacement Muffler Lifetime Limited Warranty provides coverage for as long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the vehicle.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to all these warranties. Please read the 2013 Honda warranty information booklet that came with your vehicle for precise information on warranty coverages. Your vehicle's original tires are covered by their manufacturer. Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet.
Canadian Owners Please refer to the 2013 warranty manual that came with your vehicle.
uuWarranty Coveragesu QRG
Information
TOC
Index Home
473
Authorized Manuals
QRG
For U.S. Owners: The publications listed below can be purchased from Helm Incorporated. You can order a manual by phone at (800) 782-4356 (credit card orders only), or online at www.helminc.com.
Make an inquiry to Helm Inc. at (800) 782-4356 if you are interested in ordering other models' or other years' manuals.
Publication Form Number
61SZA04 61SZA04EL 61SZA40 31SZA640 31SZA840 31SZAM40
31SZAA40
31SZAB40
31SZAC40 HON-R
Form Description
2013 Honda Pilot Service Manual 2013 Honda Pilot Electrical Troubleshooting Manual
2013 Honda Pilot Body Repair Manual 2013 Honda Pilot Owner's Manual
2013 Honda Pilot Navigation System Owner's Manual 2013 Honda Pilot Service History
2013 Honda Pilot Technology Reference Guide (LX/EX/EX-L/EX-L with RES)
2013 Honda Pilot Technology Reference Guide (EX-L with Navigation)
2013 Honda Pilot Technology Reference Guide (Touring) Order Form for Previous Years-Indicate Year and Model Desired
Information
TOC
1Authorized Manuals Service Manual: Covers maintenance and recommended procedures for repair to engine and chassis components. It is written for the journeyman technician, but it is simple enough for most mechanically inclined owners to understand.
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual: Complements the Service Manual by providing indepth troubleshooting information for each electrical circuit in your vehicle.
Body Repair Manual: Describes the procedures involved in the replacement of damaged body parts.
For Canadian Owners: Si vous avez besoin d'un Manuel du Conducteur en français, veuillez demander à votre concessionnaire de commander le numéro de pièce 33SZAC40
Index
Home
474
Customer Service Information
QRG
Honda dealership personnel are trained professionals.
1Customer Service Information
They should be able to answer all your questions. If you encounter a problem that your dealership does not solve to your satisfaction, please discuss it with the dealership's service manager or general manager. If you are dissatisfied with the decision made by the dealership's management, contact Honda Customer Services.
U.S. Owners: American Honda Motor Co., Inc. Honda Automobile Customer Services Mail Stop 500-2N-7A
Canadian Owners: Honda Canada Inc. Customer Relations 180 Honda Boulevard
When you call or write, please give us the following
information:
· Vehicle Identification Number
2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) P. 466
· Date of purchase · Odometer reading of your vehicle · Your name, address, and telephone number · A detailed description of the problem · Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you
1919 Torrance Blvd.
Markham, ON
Torrance, CA 90501-2746 Tel: (800) 999-1009
L6C 0H9 Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9 Fax: 1-877-939-0909 E-mail: Honda_cr@ch.honda.com
Information
In Puerto Rico and the
U.S. Virgin Islands:
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
Tel: (787) 620-7546
TOC
Index
Home
475
Gracenote® End User License Agreement
QRG
This application or device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California ("Gracenote"). The software from Gracenote (the "Gracenote Software") enables this application to perform disc and/or file identification and obtain music-
1Gracenote® End User License Agreement Gracenote Music Recognition Service (CDDB)
Information
related information, including name, artist, track, and title information ("Gracenote Data") from online servers or embedded databases (collectively, "Gracenote Servers") and to perform other functions. You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End-User functions of this application or device.
You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for your own personal non-commercial use only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive license to use the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate these restrictions. If your license terminates, you agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote Servers, including all ownership rights. Under no circumstances will Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information that you TOC provide. You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights under this Agreement against you directly in its own name.
Music recognition technology and related data are provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote is the industry standard in music recognition technology and related content delivery. For more information, please visit www. gracenote.com.
When music is recorded to the HDD from a CD, information such as the recording artist and track name are retrieved from the Gracenote Database and displayed (when available). Gracenote may not contain information for all albums.
Gracenote is an internet-based music recognition service that allows artist, album, and track information from CDs to display on the HDD. More information about Gracenote is available at www.honda.com/ (in U.S.) or www.honda.ca (in Canada).
CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright© 2000 to present Gracenote.
Index
Home
476
uuGracenote® End User License Agreementu
The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow the Gracenote service to count queries without knowing anything about who you are. For more information, see the web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote service.
The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are licensed to you "AS IS." Gracenote makes no representations or warranties, express or implied, regarding the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete data from the Gracenote Servers or to change data categories for any cause that Gracenote deems sufficient. No warranty is made that the Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are error-free or that functioning of Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers will be uninterrupted. Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with new enhanced or additional data types or categories that Gracenote may provide in the future and is free to discontinue its services at any time.
1Gracenote® End User License Agreement
Gracenote Software, copyright© 2000 to present Gracenote. One or more patents owned by Gracenote apply to this product and service. See the Gracenote website for a non-exhaustive list of applicable Gracenote patents.
Gracenote, CDDB, MusicID, MediaVOCS, the Gracenote logo and logotype, and the "Powered by Gracenote" logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Gracenote in the United States and/or other countries.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES. copyright © 2000 to present Gracenote
Information
QRG
TOC Index
Home
477
INDEX A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
QRG Home
A
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)................... 362 AC Power Outlet....................................... 158 Accessories and Modifications ................. 375 Accessory Power Sockets .......................... 156 Additives
Coolant ................................................... 397 Engine Oil................................................ 392 Washer.................................................... 401 Additives, Engine Oil ................................ 392 Adjusting Armrest ................................................... 149 Front Seats .............................................. 137 Head Restraints........................................ 141 Mirrors .................................................... 135 Rear Seats................................................ 146 Steering Wheel ........................................ 134 Temperature.............................................. 87 Air Conditioning System (Climate Control System)........................ 165 Changing the Mode ................................ 165 Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows ............................................... 166 Dust and Pollen Filter ............................... 427 Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode ................... 165 Sensors.................................................... 170 Synchronized Mode ................................. 167 Using Automatic Climate Control ............ 165 Air Pressure ....................................... 415, 465
Airbags........................................................ 37 Advanced Airbags ..................................... 43 After a Collision ........................................ 41 Airbag Care............................................... 51 Event Data Recorder.................................. 20 Front Airbags (SRS).................................... 40 Indicator........................................ 48, 71, 75 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator .................. 49 Sensors ..................................................... 37 Side Airbag Cutoff System......................... 46 Side Airbag Off Indicator ........................... 50 Side Airbags .............................................. 44 Side Curtain Airbags.................................. 47
AM/FM Radio.................................... 186, 219 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 362
Indicator.................................................... 71 Armrest ..................................................... 149 Audio Remote Controls ................... 184, 217 Audio System............................................ 172
Adjusting the Sound........................ 185, 218 Auxiliary Input Jack.................................. 173 Error Messages........................................ 266 General Information ................................ 272 iPod®....................................................... 240 MP3/WMA/AAC.............................. 207, 244 Reactivating ............................................ 174 Recommended CDs................................. 273 Recommended Devices............................ 275 Remote Controls ............................. 184, 217 Security Code.......................................... 174 Theft Protection ...................................... 174
USB Adapter Cable ................................. 173 USB Flash Drives...................................... 275 Audio/Information Display ...................... 176 Authorized Manuals ................................ 474 Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ................ 105 Customize ........................................ 93, 106 Automatic Lighting.................................. 126 Automatic Transmission .......................... 345 Creeping................................................. 345 Fluid ....................................................... 399 Kickdown ............................................... 345 Operating the Shift Lever .................. 14, 347 Shift Lever Does Not Move ...................... 447 Shifting................................................... 346 Auxiliary Input Jack ................................. 173 Average Fuel Economy ........................ 82, 88 Average Speed ................................... 88, 177
B
Battery ...................................................... 423 Charging System Indicator ................ 69, 450 Jump Starting ......................................... 445 Maintenance (Checking the Battery) ....... 423 Maintenance (Replacing)......................... 424
Belts (Seat).................................................. 29 Beverage Holders ..................................... 154 Bluetooth® Audio............................. 211, 248 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®............. 278, 301 Booster Seats (For Children) ...................... 64
478
INDEX A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
Brake System ............................................ 360 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 362 Brake Assist System................................. 363 Fluid ....................................................... 400 Foot Brake .............................................. 361 Indicator ........................................... 68, 452 Parking Brake.......................................... 360
Brightness Control (Instrument Panel) ... 130 Bulb Replacement.................................... 402
Brake Light, Taillight, Back-Up Light, Rear Turn Signal Light and Rear Side Marker Light .......................... 406
Fog Lights ............................................... 403 Front Turn Signal/Parking Light and
Front Side Marker Light......................... 405 Headlights .............................................. 402 High-Mount Brake Light.......................... 409 Rear License Plate Light........................... 408 Side Turn Signal/
Emergency Indicator Light ..................... 404 Bulb Specifications................................... 464
C
Carbon Monoxide Gas ............................... 65 Cargo Hook .............................................. 160 Cargo Net ................................................. 159 Carrying Cargo ................................. 325, 327 CD Library................................................. 197 CD Player .......................................... 193, 226 Certification Label ................................... 466
Changing Bulbs......................................... 402 Charging System Indicator ................. 69, 450 Child Safety................................................. 52
Childproof Door Locks ............................. 104 Child Seat .................................................... 52
Booster Seats............................................. 64 Child Seat for Infants ................................. 54 Child Seat for Small Children ..................... 55 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/
Shoulder Seat Belt ................................... 60 Larger Children.......................................... 63 Rear-facing Child Seat ............................... 54 Selecting a Child Seat ................................ 56 Childproof Door Locks ............................. 104 Cleaning the Exterior ............................... 430 Cleaning the Interior ................................ 428 Climate Control System ............................ 165 Changing the Mode ................................ 165 Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows ............................................... 166 Dust and Pollen Filter ............................... 427 Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode ................... 165 Sensors.................................................... 170 Synchronized Mode ................................. 167 Using Automatic Climate Control ............ 165 Clock ............................................................ 98 Coat Hook ................................................. 159 Compact Spare Tire .......................... 435, 465 Console Compartment ............................. 152 Controls ....................................................... 97
Coolant (Engine) ...................................... 397 Adding to the Radiator............................ 398 Adding to the Reserve Tank..................... 397 Overheating ............................................ 448
Creeping (Automatic Transmission) ........ 345 Cruise Control........................................... 348
Indicator.................................................... 77 Cup Holders .............................................. 154 Customer Service Information................. 475 Customized Features.................................. 90
D
Daytime Running Lights .......................... 127 Dead Battery............................................. 445 Defrosting the Windshield and Windows ................................................. 166 Detachable Anchor .................................... 34 Devices that Emit Radio Waves ............... 467 Dimming
Headlights............................................... 125 Rearview Mirror....................................... 135 Dipstick (Engine Oil)................................. 393 Directional Signals (Turn Signal) ............. 125 Display/Information Button....................... 85 Door Mirrors ............................................. 136 Doors........................................................... 99 Auto Door Locking .................................. 105 Auto Door Unlocking .............................. 105 Door Open Indicator............................ 28, 72 Keys .......................................................... 99
QRG
Index Home
479
INDEX A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
QRG
Index Home
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside ...................................... 103
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside ................................... 101
Lockout Prevention System ...................... 102 DOT Tire Quality Grading ........................ 417 Driver's Seat Lumbar Support .................. 137 Driving....................................................... 323
Automatic Transmission........................... 345 Braking.................................................... 360 Cruise Control ......................................... 348 Off-Highway Driving Guidelines ............... 340 Shifting Gear ........................................... 346 Starting the Engine .................................. 342 Driving Position Memory System............. 132 Dust and Pollen Filter ............................... 427
E
Elapsed Time ....................................... 88, 177 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ............. 352 Emergency................................................. 459 Emissions Testing (Readiness Codes) ....... 470 Engine ....................................................... 466
Coolant ................................................... 397 Jump Starting .......................................... 445 Oil ........................................................... 392 Starting ................................................... 342 Switch Buzzer .......................................... 124 Engine Coolant ......................................... 397 Adding to the Radiator ............................ 398
Adding to the Reserve Tank..................... 397 Overheating ............................................ 448 Temperature Gauge .................................. 80 Engine Oil ................................................. 392 Adding.................................................... 394 Checking................................................. 393 Displaying Oil Life............................ 381, 385 Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 68, 450 Recommended Engine Oil ....................... 392 Exhaust Gas Hazard (Carbon Monoxide) .................................. 65 Exterior Care (Cleaning)........................... 430 Exterior Mirrors ........................................ 136
F
Features .................................................... 171 Filters
Dust and Pollen ....................................... 427 Oil........................................................... 395 Flat Tire ..................................................... 435 Floor Mats................................................. 429 Fluids Automatic Transmission .......................... 399 Brake ...................................................... 400 Engine Coolant ....................................... 397 Power Steering........................................ 400 Windshield Washer ................................. 401 Fog Light Indicator..................................... 75 Folding Down the Rear Seats .. 146, 147, 148 Foot Brake ................................................ 361
Front Airbags (SRS) .................................... 40 Front Seats................................................ 137
Adjusting ................................................ 137 Fuel ..................................................... 15, 371
Economy................................................. 374 Gauge ...................................................... 80 Instant Fuel Economy .......................... 82, 88 Low Fuel Indicator..................................... 70 Range ................................................. 82, 88 Recommendation.................................... 371 Refueling ................................................ 371 Fuel Economy ........................................... 374 Fuel Fill Cap ........................................ 15, 373 Message ................................................. 451 Fuel Fill Door ...................................... 15, 372 Fuses ......................................................... 454 Inspecting and Changing ........................ 458 Locations ........................ 454, 455, 456, 457
G
Gasoline (Fuel) Economy................................................. 374 Gauge ...................................................... 80 Information............................................. 371 Instant Fuel Economy .......................... 82, 88 Low Fuel Indicator..................................... 70 Refueling ................................................ 371
Gauges........................................................ 80 Gear Shift Lever Positions
Automatic Transmission .......................... 346
480
INDEX A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
Glass (care) ............................................... 431 Glove Box ................................................. 152
H
Halogen Bulbs .................................. 402, 403 Handling the Unexpected ....................... 433 HandsFreeLink® (HFL) ...................... 278, 301
Automatic Answering ............................. 289 Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and
Call History ................................... 291, 312 Automatic Transferring ................... 289, 311 HFL Buttons .................................... 278, 301 HFL Menus...................................... 280, 303 HFL Status Display........................... 279, 302 Making a Call ................................. 295, 316 Options During a Call...................... 300, 319 Phone Setup ................................... 283, 305 Receiving a Call............................... 299, 319 Speed Dial ...................................... 292, 313 To Clear the System ........................ 290, 312 To Create a Security PIN.................. 288, 310 Hazard Warning Button .............................. 2 Head Restraints ........................................ 141 Headlights ................................................ 125 Aiming.................................................... 402 Automatic Operation .............................. 126 Dimming......................................... 125, 127 Operating ............................................... 125 Heaters (Seat)........................................... 162 HFL (HandsFreeLink®) ...................... 278, 301
High Beam Indicator .................................. 75 Hill Start Assist System ............................. 343
I
Identification Numbers ............................ 466 Engine and Transmission ......................... 466 Vehicle Identification ............................... 466
Ignition Switch.......................................... 124 Illumination Control ................................. 130
Knob ....................................................... 130 Immobilizer System .................................. 118
Indicator .................................................... 76 Indicators .................................................... 68
A/T Temperature ....................................... 73 ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ..................... 71 Charging System ............................... 69, 450 CRUISE CONTROL.............................. 77, 349 CRUISE MAIN .................................... 77, 348 Door Open .......................................... 28, 72 Fog Light ................................................... 75 Fuel Economy ............................................ 76 High Beam ................................................ 75 Immobilizer System.................................... 76 Lights On................................................... 75 Low Fuel.................................................... 70 Low Oil Pressure ................................ 68, 450 Low Tire Pressure....................... 74, 355, 357 Low Tire Pressure/TPMS ..................... 74, 355 Maintenance Minder ......................... 77, 381 Malfunction Indicator Lamp ............... 69, 451
Parking Brake and Brake System........ 68, 452 Power Tailgate .......................................... 77 Seat Belt Reminder .............................. 30, 70 Security System Alarm ............................... 76 Shift Lever Position .................................... 69 Side Airbag Off ................................... 50, 75 Starter System ........................................... 76 Supplemental Restraint System............ 48, 71 System Message........................................ 73 Tailgate Open............................................ 72 TPMS ................................................ 74, 358 Transmission ............................................. 70 Turn Signal................................................ 75 VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist)
System ............................................ 72, 352 VSA® OFF .......................................... 72, 353 VTM-4® System ................................. 71, 354 Washer Level............................................. 77 Information .............................................. 463 Information Display ................................... 81 Instant Fuel Economy........................... 82, 88 Instrument Panel ........................................ 67 Brightness Control................................... 130 Integrated Sunshades .............................. 164 Interior Lights ........................................... 150 Interior Rearview Mirror.......................... 135 iPod® ......................................................... 240
Index
QRG
Index Home
481
INDEX A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
QRG
J
Jack (Wheel Nut Wrench)......................... 439 Jump Starting............................................ 445
K
Key Number Tag ....................................... 100 Keyless Lockout Prevention ..................... 102 Keys ............................................................. 99
Lockout Prevention .................................. 102 Master Keys............................................... 99 Number Tag ............................................ 100 Rear Door Won't Open ............................ 104 Remote Transmitter ................................. 101 Types and Functions .................................. 99 Valet Key ................................................. 100 Won't Turn................................................ 18 Kickdown (Automatic Transmission) ....... 345
Index Home
L
Language (HFL)................................. 279, 302 LATCH (Child Seats) .............................. 57, 61 Lights ................................................. 125, 402
Automatic ............................................... 126 Bulb Replacement.................................... 402 Daytime Running Lights ........................... 127 Fog Lights................................................ 127 High Beam Indicator .................................. 75 Interior .................................................... 150 Light Switches ......................................... 125
482
Lights On Indicator .................................... 75 Turn Signals ............................................ 125 Load Limits................................................ 327 Locking/Unlocking...................................... 99 Auto Door Locking/Unlocking.................. 105 Childproof Door Locks............................. 104 From Inside ............................................. 103 From Outside .......................................... 101 Keys .......................................................... 99 Using a Key ............................................. 102 Lockout Prevention System ..................... 102 Low Battery Charge ................................. 450 Low Fuel Indicator...................................... 70 Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 68, 450 Lower Anchors...................................... 57, 61 Luggage (Maximum Load Limit) ............. 327
M
Maintenance............................................. 377 Battery .................................................... 423 Brake Fluid .............................................. 400 Cleaning ................................................. 428 Climate Control System........................... 427 Coolant................................................... 397 Maintenance MinderTM ........................... 381 Oil........................................................... 393 Power Steering Fluid................................ 400 Precautions ............................................. 378 Radiator .................................................. 398 Remote Control....................................... 425
Remote Transmitter ................................ 424 Replacing Light Bulbs .............................. 402 Safety ..................................................... 379 Service Items................................... 383, 387 Tires........................................................ 414 Transmission Fluid ................................... 399 Under the Hood...................................... 389 Wireless Headphone ............................... 426 Malfunction Indicator Lamp ............. 69, 451 Map Lights................................................ 151 Maximum Load Limit............................... 327 Meters, Gauges .......................................... 80 Mirrors ...................................................... 135 Adjusting ................................................ 135 Door ....................................................... 136 Exterior ................................................... 136 Interior Rearview ..................................... 135 Modifications (and Accessories) .............. 375 Moonroof ................................................. 123 MP3................................... 193, 207, 226, 244 Multi-Information Display ......................... 85 Multi-View Rear Camera ......................... 370
N
Numbers (Identification) ......................... 466
INDEX A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
O
Odometer ............................................. 81, 86 Off-Highway Driving Guidelines............. 340 Oil (Engine) .............................................. 392
Adding ................................................... 394 Checking ................................................ 393 Displaying Oil Life ........................... 381, 385 Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 68, 450 Recommended Engine Oil ....................... 392 Viscosity.................................................. 392 Opening/Closing Hood ...................................................... 390 Moonroof ............................................... 123 Power Windows...................................... 120 Tailgate................................................... 110 Outside Temperature Display ............. 84, 87 Overheating ............................................. 448
P
Panic Mode............................................... 119 Parking ..................................................... 364 Parking Brake........................................... 360 Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator .................... 68, 452 Parking Sensor System............................. 365 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator................. 49 Passing Indicators..................................... 125 Power Tailgate ......................................... 112 Power Windows ....................................... 120 Precautions While Driving....................... 344
Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle ........................... 344
Rain......................................................... 344 Pregnant Women ....................................... 35 Puncture (Tire) .......................................... 435
R
Radiator .................................................... 398 Radio (AM/FM).................................. 186, 219 Radio (XM®) .............................................. 223 Radio Data System (RDS).................. 189, 222 Range .................................................... 82, 88 RDS (Radio Data System).................. 189, 222 Readiness Codes (Emissions Testing) ....... 470 Rear Defogger/
Heated Door Mirror Button ................... 131 Rear Entertainment System ..................... 251 Rear Seats (Folding Down)....... 146, 147, 148 Rearview Camera.............................. 369, 370 Rearview Mirror........................................ 135 Refueling................................................... 371
Fuel Gauge ................................................ 80 Gasoline .......................................... 371, 464 Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 70 Regulations ............................... 357, 417, 467 Remote Transmitter ................................. 101 Replacement Battery .................................................... 424 Bulbs ....................................................... 402 Fuses ............................... 454, 455, 456, 457
Tires ........................................................ 420 Wiper Blade Rubber ................................ 410 Reporting Safety Defects ......................... 469 Resetting a Trip Meter ......................... 82, 87
S
Safe Driving ................................................ 23 Safety Check ............................................... 28 Safety Labels............................................... 66 Safety Message........................................... 21 Seat Belts .................................................... 29
Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor.................. 33 Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners ................. 31 Checking................................................... 36 Detachable Anchor.................................... 34 Fastening .................................................. 32 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/
Shoulder Seat Belt ................................... 60 Pregnant Women ...................................... 35 Reminder .................................................. 30 Warning Indicator ............................... 30, 70 Seat Heaters.............................................. 162 Seats .......................................................... 137 Adjusting ................................................ 137 Driver's Seat Lumbar Support .................. 137 Front Seats .............................................. 137 Rear Seats ............................................... 146 Seat Heaters............................................ 162 Security System......................................... 118 Immobilizer System Indicator ..................... 76
QRG
Index Home
483
INDEX A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
QRG
Index Home
Security System Alarm Indicator ................. 76 SEL/RESET Knob .................................... 81, 85 Select Lever ......................................... 14, 346
Operation .......................................... 14, 347 Releasing ................................................. 447 Won't Move ............................................ 447 Selecting a Child Seat ................................. 56 Selector Knob (Audio) ...................... 175, 216 Setting the Clock ........................................ 98 Shift Lever ........................................... 14, 346 Shift Lever Position Indicator............. 69, 347 Shifting (Transmission) ............................. 346 Shoulder Anchor......................................... 33 Side Airbags ................................................ 44 Cutoff System............................................ 46 Off Indicator .............................................. 46 Side Curtain Airbags................................... 47 Snow Tires ................................................. 422 Spare Tire .......................................... 435, 465 Spark Plugs................................................ 464 Specifications ............................................ 464 Specified Fuel.................................... 371, 464 Speedometer............................................... 80 SRS Airbags (Airbags) ................................. 40 Starting the Engine .................................. 342 Does Not Start ......................................... 444 Engine Switch Buzzer............................... 124 Jump Starting .......................................... 445 Steering Wheel ......................................... 134 Adjusting................................................. 134 Stopping.................................................... 364
Storage Compartment ............................. 154 Summer Tires ............................................ 422 Sunglasses Holder..................................... 161 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)........ 40 Switches
(Around the Steering Wheel) ........ 2, 3, 124 Synchronized Mode ................................. 167 System Message Indicator.......................... 73
T
Tachometer................................................. 80 Tailgate ..................................................... 110
Unable to Open....................................... 461 Temperature
Outside Temperature Display............... 84, 87 Temperature Gauge................................... 80 Temperature Sensor..................... 84, 87, 170 Time (Setting) ............................................. 98 Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) ..................................................... 355 Indicator............................................ 74, 453
Tires........................................................... 414 Air Pressure ..................................... 415, 465 Checking and Maintaining ...................... 414 Inspection ............................................... 414 Labeling .................................................. 415 Puncture (Flat Tire) .................................. 435 Regulations ............................................. 417 Rotation .................................................. 421 Spare Tire........................................ 435, 465
Summer.................................................. 422 Tire Chains.............................................. 422 Wear Indicators....................................... 419 Winter .................................................... 422 Tools ......................................................... 434 Towing a Trailer....................................... 329 Equipment and Accessories..................... 333 Load Limits ............................................. 329 Towing Your Vehicle ............................... 339 Behind a Motorhome .............................. 339 Emergency.............................................. 459 TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) ........ 355 Indicator ........................................... 74, 453 Transmission............................................. 346 Automatic............................................... 346 Fluid ....................................................... 399 Number .................................................. 466 Shift Lever Position Indicator ............. 69, 347 Trip Meter .................................... 82, 87, 177 Troubleshooting ...................................... 433 Blown Fuse ..................... 454, 455, 456, 457 Brake Pedal Vibrates ................................. 18 Buzzer Sounds When Opening Door ......... 19 Emergency Towing ................................. 459 Engine Won't Start ................................. 444 Noise When Braking ................................. 19 Overheating............................................ 448 Puncture/Flat Tire .................................... 435 Rear Door Won't Open ..................... 18, 104 Select Lever Won't Move ........................ 447
484
INDEX A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
Warning Indicators.................................... 68 Turn Signals.............................................. 125
Indicators (Instrument Panel) ..................... 75
U
Unlocking the Doors................................ 101 USB Adapter Cable .......................... 172, 173 USB Flash Drives ....................................... 275
V
Valet Key .................................................. 100 Vanity Mirrors .............................................. 5 Vehicle Identification Number................ 466 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®) ................. 352
Off............................................................ 72 Off Button .............................................. 353 System...................................................... 72 Viscosity (Oil).................................... 392, 465 VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist) ................. 352 VTM (Variable Torque Management) System..................................................... 354
W
Wallpaper................................................. 179 Warning and Information Messages ........ 78 Warning Indicator On/Blinking............... 450 Warning Labels .......................................... 66 Warranties (Warranty Manual provided separately) .............................................. 472
Watts ......................................................... 464 Wear Indicators (Tire)............................... 419 Wheel Nut Wrench (Jack Handle) ........... 439 Window Washers...................................... 128
Adding/Refilling Fluid............................... 401 Switch ..................................................... 128 Windows (Opening and Closing)............. 120 Windshield ................................................ 128 Cleaning.................................................. 431 Defrosting/Defogging .............................. 166 Washer Fluid ........................................... 401 Wiper Blades ........................................... 410 Wipers and Washers ................................ 128 Winter Tires .............................................. 422 Snow Tires............................................... 422 Tire Chains .............................................. 422 Wipers and Washers ................................. 128 Checking and Replacing Wiper Blades ..... 410 Front ....................................................... 128 Rear ........................................................ 129 WMA ................................. 193, 207, 226, 244 Worn Tires................................................. 414
X
XM® Radio................................................. 223
QRG
Index Home
485
Aspose.Pdf for .NET 17.6 Aspose Ltd.